Home

User Manual - Steven M. Anlage Research Page

1. 0 comm g Q 0 0 Do0 o00 000 Oy ole mate 1 2 Connect the If needed push the On Standby power cord switch to power on the instrument Figure 1 2 Powering on the instrument Shutting Down the Instrument When you push the front panel On Standby switch the instrument starts a shutdown process including a Windows shutdown to preserve settings and then removes power from most circuitry in the instrument Avoid disconnecting the line cord to power off the instrument NOTE If you do not use the On Standby switch to shut down the instrument before powering off the instrument the instrument will be in the factory Default Setup when powered on the next time To completely remove power to the instrument perform the shutdown just described remove the power cord from the instrument Backing Up User Files You should back up your user files on a regular basis Use the Back Up tool to back up files stored on the hard disk The Back Up tool is located in the System Tools folder in the Accessories folder 1 Minimize the instrument application by selecting Minimize in the File menu 2 Touch the Windows Start button 3 Select All Programs Accessories System Tools Backup in the Start menu TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 9 Installation Installing Software Software Release Notes Accessory S
2. Tektronix I as CF A I S I oD S ee ojocss _ a Ole eloce sss 0 Ql 8 m coos gt og OlSss EFI ele Fle AO a A Figure 1 6 Setting up a dual display 6 Watch for a message on the external monitor telling you that Windows has successfully initialized the display adapter 7 The instrument should detect that the new monitor was connected Follow the instructions on the instrument display to install new drivers for the monitor 8 Type a Control M to minimize the instrument application 9 In the Windows desktop right click the mouse and then select Properties to display the Display Properties dialog box TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation 10 Select the Settings tab and select the grayed out monitor in the display box 11 Select yes when you are prompted to enable the new monitor 12 Set the resolution that you want to use on the external monitor 13 Click on the external monitor in the display box and drag it to the correct orientation monitor The internal resolution must be 1024 x 768 and the color setting must N CAUTION Do not change the resolution or color settings for the internal LCD be True Color 24 bit 14 Select OK to apply the settings The new monitor will display additio
3. Figure 3 6 Roll mode 3 22 Global Controls Like the horizontal controls the acquisition controls apply to all active channels for example channel 1 cannot acquire in Sample mode while channel 2 acquires in Envelope mode You cannot stop channel 4 from acquiring if turned on while other channels continue to acquire TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Preventing Aliasing Under certain conditions a waveform may be aliased on screen Read the following description about aliasing and the suggestions for preventing it When a waveform aliases it appears on screen with a frequency lower than the actual waveform being input or it appears unstable even though the TRIG D light is lighted Aliasing occurs because the instrument is not sampling the signal fast enough to construct an accurate waveform record See Figure 3 7 Actual high frequency waveform Apparent low frequency waveform due to aliasing Sampled points gt Figure 3 7 Aliasing Methods to Check and Eliminate Aliasing To quickly check for aliasing slowly decrease the horizontal scale time per division setting If the shape of the displayed waveform changes drastically or becomes stable at a faster time base setting your waveform was probably aliased To avoid aliasing be sure to sample the input signal at a rate more than twice as fast as the highest frequency component of the input signal For ex
4. Help on window You can also select topics related to the vertical controls E from the online help Contents Index Find window select Contents and Index in the Help menu as shown at right Contents and Index R Nie Tel Si Technical Support Customer Feedback About TekScope Input Conditioning This section contains background information that can help you more effectively Background set up the acquisition window of each channel Input This instrument samples in real time or random equivalent time both sampling methods provide pretrigger information by using the trigger to stop an already running acquisition Both sampling methods also sample the input after it is scaled providing improved input protection and dynamic range CAUTION To prevent damage to the acquisition system do not overdrive the inputs and observe static safe procedures Autoset Considerations Autoset acquires samples from the input signal and attempts to take the following actions based on the input data m Evaluate the amplitude range of the input signals and set the size and vertical offset of the vertical acquisition window to acquire the signal with good resolution but without clipping Set the trigger to the approximate midlevel of the signal being autoset and switches to edge trigger mode m Evaluate the signal transitions and set the horizontal scale to produce a waveform display of 2 or
5. 1 Located on the Product Software CD See CD instructions for installation instructions For more information on how the product documentation relates to the instru ment operating interfaces and features see Documentation Map on page 2 2 xviii TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C Getting Started SEE y Product Description This chapter describes the TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes and their options Following this description are three sections Model Key Features Installation shows you how to configure and install the instrument as well as how to reinstall the system software included with the product Incoming Inspection provides a procedure for verifying basic operation and functionality Accessories amp Options lists the standard and optional accessories for this product TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series instruments are high performance solutions for verifying debugging and characterizing sophisticated electronic designs The series features exceptional signal acquisition performance operational simplicity and open connectivity to the design environment Classic analog style controls a large touch sensitive display and graphical menus provide intuitive control Open access to the Windows operating system enables unprecedented customiza tion and extensibility Key features include 6 GHz bandwidth and 20 GS s real time sampling rate TDS6604B 8 GHz bandwidth and 20 GS s real
6. 1 Control elements and resources To set the time base to trigger after an A trigger and a Tri specified number of B trigger events from the toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq tab of the Trigger control window Touch A Then B Trig on nth Event To set the number of B trigger events touch Trig Event and use the multipurpose knob keypad or up and down jit arrows to set the number of events If using B Edge trigger type set the B trigger level by touching B Trig Level and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the level If using any other trigger type see To set up B triggering on page 3 93 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger on a sequence Cont Control elements and resources To set up To set the B Event trigger from the toolbar touch Trig B triggering and select the B Event tab of the Trigger control window 2 To specify the trigger type select it from the Trigger Type list The Trigger control window will display controls for the trigger type that you select sl 3 To set the trigger controls for the type you selected make appropriate settings in the controls that displayed IMEET from step 2 ny For assistance click Help from the toolbar to display help on the controls For example if you selected Runt IMi e ms as your B trigger event type as shown at right touching Help will display the topic Runt Trigger Control Win
7. Curs2 Pos aok In this example the cursors are now on the third and eleventh harmonic of the fast edge signal Read the frequencies from the cursor readouts w p I 200V 2 WE 20098 12 5kHz 15 Touch the Cursor Type Waveform button Touch the Cursor 2 button and then the Math 1 button Now in addition to the frequency at the cursor locations me tp ae the cursor readout displays the amplitude at the cursor Es locations The readout also displays the difference in frequency and amplitude between the cursor locations IE 200mv a IM y2 30 26dB il 3 0kHz IMG 20098 125kHz IR 4y 19 7s f2 11 OkHz Ayiaf 2 474mdBy Af B OkH2 yi 10 47dB 400pws div 1 25MS s_800ns pt 7 232mv For more 16 For additional information on setting up and using information spectral math see Defining Spectral Math Waveforms starting on page 3 160 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 197 Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 198 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual EEE Data Input Output This section describes the input and output capabilities of your instrument Specifically it covers m Saving and Recalling a Setup m Saving and Recalling Waveforms m Exporting and Copying Waveforms including exporting and copying of images waveforms measurements and histograms m Printing Waveforms Remote Communication Saving and Rec
8. Factor 2 Graticule Zoom Scrol Assign Knobs 1 Display 2 fo 0 a Area 3 Horizontal scale readout Zoomi Display Zoom Source Acq Y Lock Setup Close 1 0ms div HG 500mV 2 r BEALI 500mV 2001s 50 0kS s 20 0us pt 280mV Figure 3 27 Display elements 1 Display area The area where the waveforms appear The display comprises the timebase and graticules the waveforms histograms and some readouts 2 Graticule A grid marking the display area When MultiView Zoom is on the upper graticule displays unmagnified waveforms and the lower graticule displays magnified waveforms TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms 3 Horizontal scale readout Displays the scale of magnified and unmagnified waveforms 4 Horizontal reference A control that you can position to set the point around which channel waveforms expand and contract horizontally on screen as you change the Horizontal Scale control or push the MultiView Zoom button The reference is also the trigger point when the horizontal delay is 0 Touch Screen not shown A feature that lets you touch on screen controls or touch and drag screen objects to operate the instrument Some features of the display follow m Flexible Display Control Front panel knobs and buttons support quick access to the most often used adjustments those that display position
9. lt Duration 2 ms gt Figure 3 42 Duration and resolution control effects Using the gate controls Gating determines what portion of the acquired waveform is transformed into the frequency domain The gate has a position and a width control The gate position is the time in seconds from the trigger location to the center 50 position of the gate interval see Figure 3 43 The position and width units are seconds TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms lt Duration gt Gate position E Zero phase reference Time domain acquisition Gate gt Trigger width position Frequency domain samples Figure 3 43 Definition of gate parameters The gate must reside within the duration interval of the source waveform If the source waveform duration is adjusted and the gate position and width would result in the gate being outside of that duration then the gate position or width is set within the limits The width of the gate affects the resolution bandwidth of the spectral analyzer See Using Spectral Math Controls on page 3 161 for more details The data contained in the gated region is transformed to the frequency domain The gate is identified on the display using dashed markers similar to cursors The default gate width setting is equal to the duration of the source waveform Using the Frequency Domain controls The gate
10. Overshoot Overshoot Mean Cycle Mean 2 horizontal bars indicating the amplitude value 1 horizontal bar indicating the high value 1 horizontal bar indicating the low value 1 horizontal bar indicating the RMS value 1 horizontal bar indicating the Max value 1 vertical arrow indicating the time of the Max 1 horizontal bar indicating the Min value 1 vertical arrow indicating the time of the Min 2 horizontal bars indicating the Max and Min 2 vertical arrows indicating the time of the Max and Min 3 horizontal bars indicating the High the Low and the RMS value 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the cycle time 3 horizontal bars indicating the Max High and the Low 1 vertical arrow indicating the time of the Max 3 horizontal bars indicating the High Low land the Min 1 vertical arrow indicating the time of the Min 1 horizontal bar indicating the Mean value 3 horizontal bars indicating the High Low and the Cycle Mean 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the cycle time TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual A 9 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 2 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Time These annotations are not visible when the reference level units are absolute instead of a percentage measurement annotations Rise Time Fall Time Duty Cyc Duty Cy
11. Push the hard disk drive straight in Figure 1 4 Reinstalling the hard drive 1 14 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation Enabling or Disabling Your LAN and Connecting to a Network You can connect the instrument to a network to enable printing file sharing internet access and other communications functions Before you make the connection do the following steps to enable the default network access to the instrument Front panel Rear panel Tektronix oppooo _8 Olo ojo e S o B35 ofe arar dp o Io a ooo Q 07s aaao cap g 1 9 lS Power down K d C 3 Connect a keyboard and mouse ooo _ 6 Er R e 228 9 2 Power on Figure 1 5 Enabling your LAN and connecting to a network 4 As the instrument begins to boot press the F2 key on the keyboard repeatedly until the message Entering SETUP Loading SETUP on some instruments appears 5 Inthe BIOS Setup Utility use the right arrow key on the keyboard to highlight the Advanced menu at the top of the screen 6 Use the arrow down key to highlight Peripheral Configuration in the Advanced screen and then press Enter TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 15 Installation 7 U
12. T2 Values The T2 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions m TCross2mean the horizontal mean of the right crossing point at TCross2 m TCross2sigma the horizontal standard deviation of the right crossing point at TCrossy m TCross2pk pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the right crossing point at TCrossz DCD Values The duty cycle distortion DCD values are horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point at 50 of the eye height These areas are used to establish the DCD k pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at half the height of the eye TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 43 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 44 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Supported Mask Types and Standards Tables C 28 through C 17 list all supported mask types and standards NOTE The standards available for an instrument depend on the options bandwidth and configuration of that instrument Table C 28 ITU T masks None DS2 Rate Sym 6 312 Mb s E1 Coax Pair 2 048 Mb s E4 Binary 1 139 26 Mb s 32Mb 32 064 Mb s DS2 Rate Coax 6 312 Mb s E2 8 448 Mb s STM1E Binary 0 155 52 Mb s Table C 29 ANSI T1 102 masks None DS2 6 312 Mb s STS 1 Pulse 51 84
13. Time 4 0us Logic function AND becomes TRUE Logic function becomes FALSE and triggers acquisition Tek Run a 500mv Q IBA 500m Q Time logic function is TRUE Time Logic Function Must be TRUE 4 0 us 3 79 Triggering To Trigger ona State When you select the type State the instrument uses channel 4 as a clock and triggers on a logic circuit made from the rest of the channels page 3 62 describes how state triggers work To use state triggering do the following procedures Overview To trigger on a state Control elements and resources Select state 1 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of Tri triggering the Trigger control window and touch Select Touch State ABS EEE Mode Sia Aca Logic State Trigger Pattern Type Threshold one TTL ECL Input Threshold EN Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Cik ea _ EE E E O sow omv oove oy Define inputs 3 To set the logic state for each of the input channels Rover J 4B Se es adhan Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 and Ch4 touch each Input Threshold Deo e e and select either High H Low L or don t care X ot sete from the menu The choices for Ch4 are rising POS Input Threshold edge and falling NEG edge i Em E 500mV 0 0V 0 0 Set thresholds 4 To set the logic threshold for each channel select the S ec a channel threshold and use the multipurpose knob or Bassey A
14. Waveform Database Consider the following operating characteristics when using FastFrame You can push RUN STOP to terminate a FastFrame sequence If any frames were acquired they are displayed If no frames were acquired the previous FastFrame waveform is displayed Because FastFrame introduces additional processing time into the operation cycle of acquire process and display it is best to use Single Sequence Acquisition see Acquire menu Stop After menu With Single Sequence selected you will see the current acquisition sequence otherwise the display lags the current sequence by one sequence You can also see the current sequence by pushing the RUN STOP button to stop the acquisition FastFrame reduces the time required before the trigger is rearmed while preserving the individual subrecords TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Set FastFrame Mode Use the procedure that follows to set up FastFrame mode acquisitions Overview To set FastFrame mode Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The horizontal and vertical controls must be set up Triggering should also be set up See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup To set 2 Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from FastFrame the Horiz Acq control window Touch FastFrame Setup mode to display the FastFrame Setup control window 3 Touch FastFrame to toggle FastFrame to On Sele
15. m Rectangular Window This window is equal to unity see Figure 3 51 This means the data samples in the gate are not modified before input to the spectral analyzer This window has the narrowest resolution bandwidth of any of the windows but it also has the most spectral leakage and the highest side lobes Amplitude Figure 3 51 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Rectangular window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 175 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Hamming Window This window is unique in that the time domain shape does not taper all the way to zero at the ends see Figure 3 52 This makes it a good choice if you wanted to process the real and imaginary parts of the spectrum off line and inverse transform it back to the time domain Because the data does not taper to zero you could then remove the effect of the window function from the result Amplitude Heh Se SRRAAR Et biaa il TT iil il Ii F 4 l Frequency bins Figure 3 52 Time and frequency graphs of the Hamming window 3 176 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Hanning Kaiser Bessel and Blackman Harris Windows These windows have various resolution bandwidths and scallop losses see figures 3 53 3 54 and 3 55 Choose the one that best allows you to view the signal c
16. 0 0 00 ccc cee cee eee Acquisition Hardware sees rsata rA EtA cee eens SAMPLING PLOCESS revan t itin were ere Qs ecalnre gutxkcoeleyecete erg Ye acetone getvk lee Acquisition Modes vivie tritata EEA eee ce eens Wavelorm Record deb iy ritina er iTA EE RA RAPENA EEDAN Real Time Sampling siie iein e E EISE E eee cee eee Equivalent Time Interpolation To Set Display Format ier preisi 0 0 cee ce cee cee eee Using FastFrame Using FastFrame Acquisitions 0 00 eee cee eee To Set FastFrame Mode 0 cece cee eens Time Stamping Frames nt tt RASER ec cee cee eee Triggering EEEE abies EE ETEEETE DERENG The Pinpoint Trigger Triggering Concepts The Trigger Eve Mb co ae ev a AAE AE A AR AATA TAa Trigger Sources Trigger Types Trigger Modes Trigger Holdoff Trigger Coupling Horizontal Position sesos taoa cc cc eee eee eee aN Slope and Level Delayed Trigger System as rora aa Eo ee ec eee eee Triggering from the Front Panel 1 0 eee eee ee ee eee Access Procedures 6605 raaa se Sees tee eS eens SENS Lee Tees To Check Trigger Status s iv suie na iene ao piel Wa na nn Sa Additional Trigger Parameters 0 20 eee eee eee cee eens Advanced Triggering MAM PLING 64 5 ch sewer OMe ale TATEA System a Mais ae Hk Bl ewe eR ewan G eee i AnnrbRRRHRHRHRHRRHARRRA RR YWWWWWWWWWNNNNNNNHKE ORWOOOMANDAAKHHKR HWW ONDNAWNFFP TOO MAANADAARONRPDODOADAWHNH
17. 2 If your probe is a 1 M Ohm probe without a TCA interface connect it to the instrument using a TCA 1MEG adapter Low frequency 3 Connect fixture to the instrument see To Connect the compensation Probe Calibration Fixture on page 3 141 4 Connect one probe to the fixture 5 Push the AUTOSET button on the instrument 6 Adjust the probe compensation box for best square corner a E Probe compensated correctly ay Probe overcompensated PLE 7 Remove the connections Probe undercompensated 3 142 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To compensate passive probes Cont Related control elements and resources For further 8 Touch the Help button to access the online assistance assistance TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 143 Measuring Waveforms Serial Mask Testing 3 144 The instrument provides a portfolio of masks optional on the TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series for verifying compliance to electrical standards You can verify circuit design performance and perform interface compliance testing Mask testing results are reported live providing real time feedback Mask hits are highlighted on the display and accompanied by readouts indicating the number of waveforms tested pass fail results and hit counts File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utilities Help Buttons Tek Stopped 08 Jul 03 15 0
18. Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform B 11 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 8 Measure menu commands Cont Menu Time Comm More Histogram Measure ments Statistics Reference Levels Gating Waveform Histograms Rise Time Fall Time Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform Positive Width Negative Width Period Frequency Delay Pos Duty Cycle Neg Duty Cycle Ext Ratio Ext Ratio Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform Ext Ratio dB Eye Height Eye Width Eye Top Eye Base Crossing Jitter Pk Pk Jitter Rms Jitter 6 Sigma Noise Pk Pk Noise RMS S N Ratio Cycle Distortion Quality factor Area Cycle Area Phase Displays the selected measurement of the selected waveform Burst Width Waveform Count Hits in Displays the selected measurement of the histogram Box Peak Hits Median Maximum Minimum Peak to Peak Mean Standard Deviation Mean 1 StdDev Mean 2 StdDev Mean 3 StdDev Reset Statistics Resets measurement statistics Off Displays the selected measurement statistics of current measurements Mean All Statistics Controls Displays the Statistics Controls window Displays the Reference Levels setup window you use to set the reference levels used by your measurements Cursor Zoom 1 Zoom 2 Allows you to select the gating method turn off gating or displays the Zoom 3 Zoom
19. If you want an averaged spectral waveform touch Average touch Avgs and then set the number of averages in the control window Note If you want to redefine your waveform touch the Clear button and repeat the above steps TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources a See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Spectral Analysis Setup Control man T Math 2 Math 3 Math 4 Channel ee 3 185 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Display the 8 spectral waveform 3 186 To display your spectral waveform touch either the To define a spectral math waveform Cont Apply or the OK button Related control elements and resources Controls x a SE a 50 0mv 2 HH 20 008 250MHz TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Set the magnitude scale To define a spectral math waveform Cont 9 10 11 12 Select the Mag tab To select the vertical scale factor touch dB dBm or Linear The units will be dB W A V or whatever units are attached to the spectral analyzer input waveform dB Magnitude is displayed using log scale expressed in dB relative to the reference level offset m Linear Magnitude is displayed using units equal to the source units dBm Reference level offset is set
20. infinite persistence 3 113 3 114 3 115 intensified samples 3 111 3 114 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index intensity 3 112 interpolation 3 112 3 113 linear 3 114 linear interpolation 3 113 math colors 3 111 mouse 3 102 mouse and touch screen operation 3 102 normal and persistence displays 3 113 operations on the timebase 3 101 operations on waveforms 3 100 operations performed based on the waveform type 3 101 persistence 3 115 persistence displays 3 113 quick adjust the timebase zoom 3 104 record length 3 101 reference colors 3 111 reset zoom 3 109 3 110 scale 3 101 screen text 3 111 select a persistence mode 3 115 select the display persistence 3 114 select the display style 3 114 select zoom 3 106 set date and time 3 112 set display styles 3 114 set horizontal display parameters 3 103 set up MultiView zoom 3 108 set up zoom 3 108 set vertical display parameters 3 103 setting MultiView zoom controls 3 105 setting zoom controls 3 105 sin x x interpolation 3 113 sine x x 3 114 to display waveforms in the main graticule 3 103 to zoom waveforms 3 105 touch screen 3 99 3 102 trigger level marker 3 112 trigger T 3 112 using display controls 3 110 using the display 3 99 using the waveform display 3 98 using zoom with waveforms 3 105 variable persistence 3 113 3 114 3 115 vectors 3 111 3 114 vertical offset
21. select from clocked AND NAND OR and NOR m The condition for triggering whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean function becomes TRUE logic high or FALSE logic low The state and pattern logic choices are summarized in Table 3 2 Setup Hold Trigger A setup hold trigger occurs when a logic input changes state inside of the setup and hold times relative to the clock When you use setup hold triggering you define m The channel containing the logic input the data source and the channel containing the clock the clock source 3 62 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering m The direction of the clock edge to use m The clocking level and data level that the instrument uses to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred m The setup and hold times that together define a time range relative to the clock Data that changes state within the setup hold violation zone triggers the instrument Figure 3 21 shows how the setup and hold times that you choose positions this zone relative to the clock Setup hold triggering uses the setup hold violation zone to detect when data is unstable too near the time it is clocked Each time trigger holdoff ends the instrument monitors the data and clock sources When a clock edge occurs the instrument checks the data stream it is processing from the data source for transitions occurring within the setup hold violation zone If any occur the instrument trigge
22. 800 Ons 5GS s 00psipt Readouts Display AV 0 0V A 6 10 0mV Controls Status Quick reference to gt Ry ee Va ee og s 100m cursor readouts and vertical horizontal and trigger i R measurement selections scale and parameters Right click Right click Right click readouts in this area Acquisition mode Graticule Trigger level selectable from the If a setup menu is displayed these readouts move to the graticule area File Buttons Right click Channel waveform handle 5 2 6 Edit Vertical menu bar or toolbar Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursor Measure Math App MyScope Utilitieji Help Sample Peak Detect Clear wata Eriveloge Color Palette lop Autoset Hi Resolution Default Setup Average Cursors Trigger Type WimDB Screen Capture Trigger Source Save All Waveforms Trigger Coupling Slope Add Screen Text Set Level to 50 Display Format Mode Display Persistence Holdoff Color Palette Tr Level Marker Graticule Style Midis Turn Ch i Off Minimize Ctrl M Offset Termination Coupling Bandwidth oli DESKEWi Horizontal Scale E Right click Record Length Statistics Add Measurement Label Sampling Mode Color Delay Mode Save Waveform p 100ps div Save All Waveforms 40 0GS s IT 1 0ps pt z 1 2mV TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual a ae eee Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Use these buttons to start and stop acquisition or star
23. Access the Chart Wizard Select the entire row or column Specify a 7 From the Chart Wizard make sure Built In is chart Wizard Step Lof 4 Chart Type line graph selected Then select either of the following chart Standard Types Custom Types H Chart type Sample m Lines in the Standards Types tab a kil Column Area 250E 08 hd Columns with Depth 200E 08 amp Cones 150E 08 EE Floating Bars 1 00E 08 lik Line Column S 00E 07 7 kit Line Column on 2 Axes eum j 5 00E 07 lit Lines on 2 Axes 1008 08 fl Pad Logarithmic 150E 08 EE Outdoor Bars 2 00E 08 2 Pie Explosion 250E 08 Smooth lines in the Custom Types tab X Sect from User defined Smooth lines subtype From Excel 95 Built in Cancel lt Back Finish Finish the 8 Click Next to step through the next two steps accepting chart the defaults setting at each step Click the Finish button in step 4 You should have a waveform display similar to jD sajaa 7 Bees n oat 0 jeru E rrom AL z 90243072 that shown at the right Note This procedure assumes MS Excel 97 You can 7 likely specify titles customize the treatment and labeling ane Ne of the x and y axes and so forth in your data analysis Boo a 5 R 10 1 50E 08 application either as you create the chart or afterward E aa Use the help for your data analysis ap
24. Ali Frar Waveform Detail Data Ordering Include waveform scale factors fe E Copy Cancel Help 3 225 Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Setup to copy 9 Touch Source Waveform and select the source of the Ene wean waveforms waveform a channel math or reference waveform to Cont copy from the list Channeli Channel 2 Shannel 3 Shannel 4 Math 1 Math 2 waveform Detail 10 If you want waveform scale factors included in your T Include waveform Mathcad files touch Include waveform scale factors scale factors 11 Touch Data Ordering and select the data order top Data Ordering first bottom first top first rotate 90 degrees or bottom first rotate 90 degrees from the list Top first Bottom first Top first rotate 90 degrees Bottom first rotate 90 degrees Waveform Data Range 12 In the Waveform data range window select the data to include in the exported files C Samples P to ft Save Samples between Cursors Samples to enter the data range of the data to Paes E include in the exported files All g Number of Samples 5000 Save Samples between Cursors to include data A FastFrame Data Range between the cursors in the exported files C Frems R oh All Frames Save Samples in Zoom Area to include data in zoom area 1 2 3 or 4 in the exported files All to include all data i
25. B 14 equation editor B 14 label B 14 magnitude spectrum B 14 math setup B 13 B 14 phase spectrum B 14 position scale B 13 B 14 set math averages B 14 spectral controls B 14 spectral setup B 14 Math setup B 13 B 14 Math waveforms 3 121 apply averaging 3 155 consider the source 3 156 creating and using math waveforms 3 145 cursor measurements 3 151 defining math waveforms 3 146 defining spectral math waveforms 3 160 See also Spectral Math derivative See Derivative math waveform derivative math waveform illustration 3 150 differentiation 3 149 display the math control window 3 153 expression syntax 3 149 FastFrame 3 147 functional transformation of an acquired waveform illustration 3 146 how to create 3 147 how to manage displaying 3 156 Index 12 integral See Integral math waveform offset position and scale 3 151 operations on math waveforms 3 156 peak peak amplitude measurement of a derivative waveform illustration 3 151 select a function 3 154 select a math waveform 3 153 select and display 3 157 set scale and position 3 158 source dependencies 3 148 sources 3 148 spectral analysis of an impulse illustration 3 145 spectral math waveforms 3 160 take automatic measurements 3 158 take cursor measurements 3 159 to define a math waveform 3 153 to define an expression 3 153 to define edit a math expression 3 154 to use 3 157 to use math waveforms 3 157 using math 3 147 us
26. Ch1 Ch2 A Trigger control window 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 3 76 3 78 3 80 3 82 3 85 Ch3 Ch4 B 14 Ch3 Ch4 B 14 Channel 3 121 Glossary 3 Glossary 8 Glossary 13 configuration 3 29 readout 3 109 reference indicator Glossary 3 trigger input 3 45 3 51 Channel probe deskew 3 141 Glossary 3 Channels deskew 3 141 digitizer configuration 3 28 shared horizontal window 3 17 shared parameters illustrated 3 17 Circuit loading Glossary 3 Cleaning exterior D 1 flat panel display D 2 Clear all references and setups 3 211 Clipping derivative math waveforms 3 151 how to avoid 3 151 3 152 integral math waveforms 3 152 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Clock source A Trigger control window 3 82 Color math 3 111 palette 3 111 B 10 reference 3 111 Color palette 3 111 3 116 B 10 changing 3 116 definition 3 111 B 10 Colors B 9 Comm B 12 setup B 8 trigger B 7 triggering 3 95 Comm trigger C 28 Communication remote 3 233 Communication trigger codes supported C 38 C 49 Communication trigger standards supported C 38 C 49 AMI C 39 C 49 B3ZS C 39 C 49 BOZS C 39 C 49 B8ZS C 39 C 49 CMI C 39 C 50 HDB3 C 40 C 50 MLT3 C 40 C 50 NRZ C 40 C 50 Communications trigger C 28 accessing C 4 accessing the control window C 32 applying the serial pattern data C 34 binary format C 33 C 34 bit rate C 29 C 33 clock source C 33 code type C 29 control w
27. Continuously as subsequent waveforms are acquired the instrument retains the running minimum Min and maximum Max values in adjacent sample intervals creating an envelope of the number of waveforms that you specify Once the specified number of waveforms is reached the data is cleared and the process starts over This is similar to the Peak Detect mode but Envelope mode unlike Peak Detect gathers peaks over many trigger events Works in only real time non interpulated sampling m Average The instrument processes the number of waveforms that you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running average of the input signal This mode reduces random noise Acquiring and displaying a noisy square wave signal illustrates the difference among the modes Note how Average reduces the noise while Envelope captures its extremes Also notice Hi Res accuractely displays even rapidly changing waveforms while removing noise similar to averaging Tite FE 6 AR 0 AEF Peak Detect Hi Res Envelope Average m Waveform Database Using waveform database technology the instrument processes a much larger sample of data The waveform database is a three dimensional accumulation of source waveform data over several acquisitions In addition to amplitude and timing information the database includes a count of the number of times a specific waveform point time and amplitude has been acquire
28. Gate position is the position of the phase reference point in the gate with respect to the trigger in seconds The gate position and gate duration must be within the acquisition 26 To set the gate duration touch Gate Dur and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to adjust the gate duration Gate duration and resolution bandwidth both control gate duration gate duration is displayed in seconds and resolution bandwidth in hertz TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Rec Length E s Sample Rate 125 08 Duration E 2 0us f Resolution Rec Length E c bh Sample Rate 125 08 Duration E bos Resolution Window Type Gaussian F Du aoo oms 1 Gate Length 101 Window Type Gaussian Y Gate Pos Gate Length 101 3 191 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a spectral math waveform Cont Related control elements and resources Take cursor 27 From the toolbar touch the Cursor button to display the Cursor measurements cursors and the cursor control window 28 Select the Math tab and touch the numbered button for ERE Channel the spectral waveform that you want to measure i 2 x4 29 Select the cursor type by touching either the H Bars V Naas wane Bars Waveform or Screen buttons for more os information see Taking Cursor Measurements starting on page 3 130 30 Turn the multi
29. Hamming Hanning Black Harris Flattop2 KalserBessel TekExa 3 189 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Set the frequency domain controls 3 190 To define a spectral math waveform Cont The spectral analyzer center frequency and the frequency span must be within the bandwidth setting determined by the sample rate See Figure 3 44 on page 3 165 to see how a signal consisting of two sine waves looks on screen as the spectral analyzer controls are adjusted A rectangular window was used 20 To set the frequency range over which the spectral analysis is performed touch Freq Span and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the frequency range Higher sample rates allow you to set greater frequency spans To set the frequency span to the maximum allowed by the current sample rate touch the Full button 21 To set the center frequency of the spectral analysis touch Center Freq and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the center frequency Resolution bandwidth determines how small of a frequency difference may be resolved in the frequency domain output data It basically defines the bandwidth of the filters used to do the frequency domain analysis 22 To set the resolution bandwidth touch Res BW and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the resolution bandwidth TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Center Freq Freq Span 625
30. STS 1 Pulse STS 1 Eye STS 3 STS 3 51 84 Mb s 51 84 Mb s 155 52 Mb s Max Output 155 52 Mb s Table C 6 Ethernet masks None 100Base TX STP 100Base TX UTP 1000B SX LX 125 Mb s 125 Mb s 1 25 Gb s 1000B CX Norm TP2 1000B CX Abs TP2 1000B CX Abs TP3 XAUI Near 1 25 Gb s 1 25 Gb s 1 25 Gb s 3 125 Gb s XAUI Far EFM 3 125 Gb s 125 Mb s draft f 74 Table C 7 SONET SDH masks None 0C1 STMO OC3 STM1 O0C12 STM4 OC48 STM16 51 84 Mb s 155 52 Mb s 622 08 Mb s 2 4883 Gb s O0C48 FEC 2 666 Gb s TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 35 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 36 Table C 8 Fibre Channel masks None FC133 Optical FC266 Optical FC531 Optical 132 8 Mb s 265 6 Mb s 531 2 Mb s FC1063 Optical FC1063 Optical FC2125 Optical 1 0625 Gb s Draft Rev 11 2 125 Gb s Table C 9 Fibre Channel Electrical masks None FC133E Elec FC266E Elec FC531E Elec 132 8 Mb s 265 6 Mb s 531 2 Mb s FC1063E Elec FC1063E FC1063E FC1063E 1 0625 Gb s Norm Beta Transm Norm Delta Transm Norm Gamma Transm FC1063E FC1063E FC1063E FC1063E Abs Beta Transm Abs Delta Transm Abs Gamma Transm Abs Beta Recv FC1063E FC1063E FC2125E FC2125E Abs Delta Recv Abs Gamma Recv Norm Beta Transm Norm Delta Transm FC2125E FC2125E FC2125E FC2125E Norm Gamma Trans Abs Beta Transm Abs Delta Transm Abs Gamma Transm FC2125E FC2125E FC2125E FC4250E Abs Beta Recv Abs
31. Scale H Label 4 0v Delete Refi Recall Reference Waveform Lookin S Waveforms ee Gr 030709_ 102346 wim 030709_102351 wfm a 030709_ 102354 wm TOSWfMmO00 wfm TOSWfmO01 wfm TOS WMO wfm BATE File name a Cancel Help Waveform Files wim X Files of type Recall Reference Waveform Look in Waveforms ch Ey File name x Cancel Help Files of type Waveform Files wim Access to virtual keyboard TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To recall your waveform Cont Control elements and resources Recall your 8 Touch the Recall button to recall the waveform file To waveform cancel without recalling a waveform touch the Cancel Cancel Help button Display your 9 Touch Display to toggle the display of the reference ZECA reference waveform on Display ZO Boa ee E ee waveform o ui ce E g m 4 0 Save wim to File Delete Wim Fil Scale NAN 3 i nej aa 5 Save amp Delete Save all Wims to Files ALA Label ivi a Horz Pos 50 0 Refi Delete For further 10 For more help on recalling waveforms touch the Help assistance button to access contextual online help To Clear References You can clear individual references of data or delete waveform files If you are sure you do not want the data a reference waveform contains use the procedu
32. WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWWW WW i TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Table of Contents To Tricor on a GCE ea ue vie ten wie ea gai Wee aie ete e Rade gar wade AEA 3 65 To Trigger on a Runt Pulse 0 EAEAN eee 3 67 Trigger Based on Pulse Width oseo ecr eraa tearen snet Er eee eee 3 69 To Trigger Based on Transition Time 0 0 0 0 00 eee 3 71 Triggering ona Window ee eee cee eee een tenes 3 74 Trigger Based on Pulse Timeout 2 0 0 eee eee eee eee ee 3 76 Taer ona Pattern 20 asian end ie ais wre nie diate Weel belgian ee elas EEEE tes 3 77 DO PRIS GET ODA Sate esses We ain se acta gre e s EEE ee gain eye plate diate Wren eed 3 80 To Trigger on Setup Hold Time Violations 005 3 81 Logic Qualify a Trigger Aa EE Wie cian selene gutta eve E EEEN 3 84 Sequential Tsering ee en ete ave acta ee ele Westie EAEE EAA 3 85 Using Sequential Triggering 0 0 0 cece eee ee 3 86 TO Trigger ona Seguente cst aie Anes Spare sited igual ener aed 3 91 AG 0 cu rales Bal s 2 lt e oe nO nO a a ae re ere 3 95 Serial Pattern Tear MS seca han ects ated hein AEA gta ere na arm ene a a 3 95 Displaying Waveforms cc cece ccc c cece cence ren eeees 3 97 Using the Waveform Display 00 00 c cee cee ec cee eee 3 98 Using ithe Display 128 48 cacao RW eee eh Cashel 3 99 To Display Waveforms in the Main Graticule 0 3 103 Setting MultiVi
33. channel or not connected at all These choices are referred to as DC coupling and GND coupling The input resistance of each input channel is 50 Q To properly terminate signals in other impedance environments use an adapter All probes expect a specific coupling and input termination Both coupling and input termination resistance are displayed on screen Scaling and Positioning These key controls determine the portion of the input signal presented to the acquisition system m Set vertical scaling positioning and DC offsets to display the features of interest on your waveform and avoid clipping See Note that follows Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 12 describes the vertical acquisition window oH Acquired waveform Displayed waveform 3 4 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m Set horizontal scale position and resolution record length so that the acquired waveform record includes the waveform attributes of interest with good sampling density on the waveform The settings that you make define the horizontal acquisition window see Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 14 NOTE Waveform data outside the vertical acquisition window is clipped that is the data is limited to the minimum or maximum boundaries of the vertical acqui
34. forms Use the same procedure as is found under Take cursor measurements on page 3 159 When using that procedure note that the amplitude measurements on a derivative waveform will be in volts per second rather than in volt seconds as is indicated for the integral waveform measured in the procedure SEAL S S S A S S D S E O S E E E S DE U Ae a a ee ann Math Position 20div 7 Math Scale Z 0083MV 5 mi PEENE ES E E E E E N EN PE EE OE E E E E SANE A E ED ENE Ia 50 0mV 2 IMD 2 01Mvs 10 0 IM PEPR 5 8MV s Figure 3 41 Peak peak amplitude measurement of a derivative waveform Offset Position and Scale The settings that you make for offset scale and position affect the math waveform that you obtain Note the following tips for obtaining a good display m You should scale and position the source waveform so that it is contained on screen Off screen waveforms may be clipped resulting in errors in the derivative waveform m You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your derivative waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so it is clipped Waveform Integration The Math capabilities of the instrument include waveform integration This allows you to display an integral math waveform that is an integrated version of the acquired waveform TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 151 C
35. the recovered clock function is only available for NRZ coded signals Sets the edge positive or negative on which to trigger this function is only available when Type is set to Clock Sets the communications code type from a drop down menu AMI BZ3S B6ZS B8ZS CMI HDB3 MLT3 NRZ Sets the signal standard for the selected code from a drop down menu Sets or displays the bit rate for the selected standard if you change the default bit rate the signal standard changes to Custom Sets the source signal threshold levels for the selected code this function displays a single level field or upper lower level fields depending on the selected code and standard Sets the comm signal pulse format on which to trigger this function is displayed when required by a selected standard TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 5 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Accessing Serial Mask Testing Automatic Measurement Functions C 6 Serial Mask Testing also provides a number of communications related automatic measurements To access the communications signal automatic measurements do the following steps 1 Touch the Meas tool bar button The instrument displays the Measurement control window 2 Select the Comm tab The instrument displays the communication measure ment functions as shown in Figure C 3 Ampl Time More Histog nm Measurements p Setup Display Ent Ratio Eye Height ye To cn
36. waveform You may set duration using the record length control or the sample rate control m Resolution determines the time between samples Duration is kept constant as resolution is changed Therefore the Resolution control affects both the sample rate and the record length simultaneously m Most often you will want to use a short record length because long record lengths can slow instrument response However long record lengths lower the noise relative to the signal and increase the frequency resolution for the spectral math waveform More important they might be needed to capture the waveform feature you want to include in the waveform Examples of how duration and resolution affect the acquired waveform are shown in Figure 3 42 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 161 Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 162 Adjust Duration via lt p Dpration 1 ms pr r gt a Adjust Duration via record length sample rate y 7 I ii T T _ Resolution 0 04ms _ Record length 50 Resolution 0 08 ms _ Record length 25 lt _ _ Duration 2 ms gt lt Duration 2 ms gt gt Resolution 0 02 ms _ Record length 100 Adjust Resolution Duration remains constant
37. zoom setup B 6 Horizontal acquisition window Glossary 7 acquisition window considerations 3 14 acquisition window illustrated 3 15 bar cursors Glossary 7 cursors 3 130 delay 3 90 position 3 48 3 101 3 102 record length 3 101 reference 3 99 3 102 scale 3 15 3 101 zoom 3 109 Horizontal menu FastFrame setup 3 37 3 41 frame count 3 37 frame length 3 37 Index 9 Index frame 3 38 3 40 multiple frames 3 38 Horizontal offset overview 3 14 Horizontal reference point Glossary 7 Horizontal scale and offset setting up overview 3 14 Horizontal scale vs record length vs sample interval vs resolution 3 15 Horizontal acquisition setup B 5 Horizontal scale readout 3 99 Image printing 3 229 Impulse response testing 3 169 Incoming inspection procedure 1 19 1 28 Independent B 11 Independent vs shared Window 3 17 Infinite persistence 3 114 3 115 B 9 display control window 3 113 Initialize Glossary 8 Input 3 199 Input conditioning background 3 11 Input coupling 3 6 AC 3 6 DC 3 6 GND 3 6 Installation 1 5 1 18 C 3 incoming inspection procedure 1 19 option B 16 software installation 1 10 1 12 Instrument diagnostics B 15 id B 16 setup B 1 Integral math waveform 3 152 applications 3 152 derivation of 3 152 record length of 3 152 Integration waveform 3 151 Inten samp 3 114 Intensified samples 3 114 B 9 Intensity Glossary 8 Waveform 3 112 Internal reference
38. 12 statistics B 12 statistics controls B 12 time B 12 value count B 12 value mean B 12 Vert B 12 waveform histograms B 12 Measurement B 3 Glossary 9 accessing C 6 amplitude A 1 Glossary 1 annotation 3 125 area A 1 Glossary 2 burst width A 1 Glossary 2 comm C 6 Crossing C 41 C 51 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual crossing A 4 cycle area A 1 Glossary 3 cycle mean A 1 Glossary 3 cycle RMS A 1 Glossary 3 definitions C 41 C 51 delay Glossary 4 duty cycle Glossary 10 Glossary 12 Duty Cycle Distortion C 41 C 51 duty cycle distortion A 5 Extinction Ratio C 41 C 51 extinction ratio A 4 Extinction Ratio C 41 C 51 extinction ratio A 4 Extinction Ratio DB C 41 C 51 extinction ratio dB A 4 Eye Base C 41 C 51 eye base A 4 Eye Height C 41 C 51 eye height A 4 Eye Top C 41 C 51 eye top A 4 Eye Width C 41 C 51 eye width A 4 fall time A 1 frequency A 1 Glossary 6 functions C 6 gated Glossary 6 high A 1 Glossary 7 hits in box A 3 Jitter 6 sigma C 41 C 51 jitter 6 sigma A 4 Jitter Pk Pk C 41 C 51 jitter pk pk A 4 Jitter RMS C 41 C 51 jitter RMS A 4 low A 2 Glossary 9 mask C 6 maximum A 2 Glossary 9 mean A 2 A 3 Glossary 9 mean 1 stddev A 3 mean 2 stddev A 3 mean 3 stddev A 3 median A 3 minimum A 2 Glossary 10 negative duty cycle A 2 negative overshoot A 2 negative width A 2 No
39. 3 101 vertical position 3 101 vertical scale 3 101 vertical zoom 3 109 waveform display 3 99 waveform intensity 3 112 waveform interpolation 3 112 waveforms 3 116 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual zoom 3 99 3 101 3 104 zoom a waveform 3 107 zoom position 3 109 zoom reset 3 109 3 110 zoom scale 3 109 Dots 3 111 3 113 3 114 B 9 display control window 3 113 Dragging Glossary 5 Dual display setup 1 14 Dual graticule Glossary 5 Duration 3 161 Duty cycle Glossary 10 Glossary 12 distortion A 5 Duty Cycle Distortion C 41 C 51 E ECL 3 66 3 72 3 77 3 82 A Trigger level 3 56 3 57 Edge setup B 8 trigger 3 45 B 7 Glossary 5 Edit menu copy B 3 copy setup B 3 full screen B 3 graticule B 3 measurement B 3 select for copy B 3 waveform B 3 Edit MyScope control window 3 239 Either A Trigger control window 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 E mail on Trigger buttons 3 58 Enhanced Bandwidth 3 5 Envelope 3 20 3 24 3 36 acquisition mode 3 36 Enhanced Bandwidth Glossary 5 Envelope acquisition mode Glossary 5 Environment requirements 1 6 Equation editor B 14 Equivalent time B 6 Equivalent time sampling 3 31 3 36 random Glossary 5 Erase all references and setups 3 211 Error log B 15 Ethernet 3 233 Excel 3 222 Exiting the application 1 12 Export B 2 save format 3 214 setup B 2 Index 7 Index waveforms 3 215 Exporting files using PRINT button 3 220
40. 3 22 RUN STOP 3 24 Run Stop button only 3 21 sample 3 18 3 24 sample interval 3 30 sampling and acquisition mode 3 31 sampling process 3 29 select the acquisition mode 3 24 set the stop mode 3 24 set waveform count average and envelope only 3 24 sin x x interpolation 3 32 SINGLE 3 22 3 24 single sequence 3 22 single sequence off 3 24 to disable roll mode 3 28 to enable roll mode 3 27 to select an acquisition mode 3 24 to select real time or equivalent time sampling 3 25 to set acquisition modes 3 24 to set roll bode 3 27 to single sequence roll mode 3 27 to start acquiring 3 26 to start and stop acquisition 3 26 to stop acquiring 3 26 to take a single acquisition 3 26 to turn off roll mode acquisitions 3 27 trigger point 3 30 untriggered roll 3 22 untriggered roll with single sequence 3 22 using 3 18 using FastFrame 3 35 waveform database 3 20 3 24 waveform record 3 30 Acquisition mode B 6 Index 2 spectral math 3 182 Acquisition overview 3 28 Acquisition preview 3 99 Acquisition setup B 5 Address Tektronix xvii Advanced 3 59 Aliasing 3 23 3 182 Glossary 1 eliminating 3 23 illustrated 3 23 recognizing 3 182 All B 12 Amplitude A 1 B 11 Glossary 1 Analog to digital converter Glossary 1 Analyzer control locks 3 161 AND Glossary 1 AND A Trigger control window 3 78 3 80 3 85 Annotate 3 125 waveforms on screen 3 120 Annotated display 3 120 Appearance B 9 A
41. 3 62 Page setup window To Preview the Page To preview your printout from the menu bar select the File menu and then select Print Preview The instrument displays the standard MS Windows 2000 Print Preview window shown in Figure 3 63 Access the Windows help system for more information 3 230 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Print i zoom In Zoom Out Close Page Setup Help Fle Edt Yertca HonzfAcg Trig Diplay Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utiites Hep Buttons Tek Hin Siini DAIGA a1 Weds J ME soome A Figure 3 63 Print preview window To Print Using Pressing the Windows Print Screen key copies the currently displayed bitmap to Print Screen the clipboard This bitmap does not include the instrument waveforms or graticule The waveforms and graticule are displayed by the graphics adapter outside of normal Windows mechanisms The graphics adapter uses a technique similar to that used by TV weathermen They stand in front of a blank blue screen that is electronically replaced by a weather map The instrument uses a blank dark gray image that is electronical ly replaced by the graticule and the waveforms that are currently being displayed If you load the bitmap into a program such as Paint the graticule and waveforms are not part of the bitmap and although they are visible on Paint s window they will not be saved or printed To capture the instrument screen with its
42. 3 80 3 81 true for less than 3 79 true for more than 3 79 width 3 65 3 67 Manuals related xvi Margins printing 3 229 mask standards supported C 34 C 45 Mask testing 3 144 C 1 C 8 access the setup window C 15 C 19 C 20 accessing C 4 accessing the edit window C 17 adding a mask vertex C 18 C 22 aligning the mask and signal C 24 aligning waveform and mask C 10 autofit C 10 C 11 autofit and persistence interaction C 26 autoset C 9 C 10 autoset parameters C 10 AUX OUT C 12 bandwidth C 27 beep C 12 bit rate C 27 both polarities C 13 changing the tolerance C 24 completion C 12 control window functions C 4 copy a current mask C 16 create new mask segment C 22 creating a new mask C 21 creating a user mask C 15 creating an empty mask C 21 deleting a mask vertex C 18 display configuration C 10 display parameters C 10 easier to pass C 11 edit new mask segment C 22 edit user mask C 22 editing a user mask C 17 enable mask edit controls C 17 example C 23 failure C 12 functions C 4 harder to pass C 11 hookup C 23 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual image rescaling C 10 instrument settings C 23 interactions C 26 key points C 26 log date C 12 margin tolerance C 11 C 26 margins C 11 C 26 mask hits C 26 mask type C 9 masks directory C 20 moving a mask vertex C 18 negative polarity C 13 number of waveforms to test C 12 pass and fail parameters C 12
43. 3 cycles of the input signal Sometimes Autoset cannot produce a correct display due to the nature of the input signal if so you may have to adjust the scale trigger and acquisition controls manually Some conditions that can cause Autoset to fail are m No signal present m Signals with extreme or variable duty cycles TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 11 Acquiring Waveforms m Signals with multiple or unstable signal periods m Signals with too low amplitude m No recognizable trigger signal m Signals with a frequency lt 50 Hz m Autoset can fail on signals greater than delayed triggering bandwidth m Signals with a frequency above the bandwidth of the instrument m Signals with high offset and low peak to peak variations Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations You can set the vertical size position and offset of each channel independently of other channels Vertical scale and offset specify the vertical acquisition window for each channel Parts of the signal amplitude that fall within the vertical window are acquired parts outside if any are not The offset control subtracts a constant DC level from the input signal before the vertical scale factor is applied and the vertical position control adds a constant number of divisions of signal after the scale factor is applied to the resulting difference The vertical scale and position controls have the following effects on the vertical acquisition window
44. 40 Ous di from acquisition parameters check the Trigger readout at the bottom of Time base 4 5 ie f h oni readout the display The readouts differ for edge and the Wert gt ov napi advanced triggers i A trigger Trigger Trigger source Ch 1 slope rising edge level TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 53 Triggering Overview To check trigger status Cont Control elements and resources Trigger 3 To see the trigger point and level on the waveform Trigger point indicator shows location and display check the graphic indicators Trigger Point and the trigger position on the level from Trigger Level Indicator waveform record display Both the trigger point indicator and level bar are displayed from the Display menu See Customizing the Display on page 3 110 for more information The trigger point indicator shows horizontal position It can be positioned horizontally off screen to the left when horizontal delay is on The trigger level indicator shows only the trigger level It remains on screen regardless of the horizontal position as long as the channel providing the trigger source is displayed You can choose between two types of trigger level indicators a horizontal bar or Trigger level indicator shows the trigger an arrow at the right side of the graticule level on the waveform record You can drag the indicator to set the trigger level Additional Trigger Parameters Some additional tri
45. 7 TL Val Son ios Sats pod eins ea hath wo Se hew Rea heed AN G A 8 TZ Values ang ig cet ke edie ea ee a eel ea eh wd ecko A 8 DCD VAUC E ere ia aed seth tan aw tan ww DR AWA ERR RIAR A 8 Measurements Annotations 00 c ee ec ccc ec eee eee A 9 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Meller st aes B 1 File COMM ANAS te saci ak ones ch Nan evens A gaa ea rer aces ened yee ear B 1 Edit Commands sis cfcsccieh sashes ae PS RA co BIO SS B 3 Vertical Commands oa aoa sees a A eG a E cee RG cased BS B 4 Horizontal and Acquisition Commands 0 0000 c eee eee B 5 Togor Commands ya Ia Na A ct igen Oa es Tae Bes gusta A eae BS B 7 Display Commands ro ar A ay se SG a oo UNOS ee OS B 9 Cursors Commands asic seo hat BI RI ee Re B 11 Measure Commands EEE REA a ENE NANA ARANA A eens B 11 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Table of Contents Masks Command Sir o oo cai at canbe ails ahs See raha A aE aa a hats Soave erate ne B 13 Math Commands Esah ea cranial nsec aie E AAA vaca ivas vcgehn ed hata entity aed B 14 Application Commands 0 a EA cece cee ees B 14 Utilities Commands atare e a aE ie oat te tava tect E rind Sieve ented B 15 Help Commands icc E E nen eter dave S neta AEA inde Siero A B 16 BUTLODS hati keith eases cure ane a NE NE A E elated weenie bolas ghee gat B 16 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 1 Product DEScriptlony vs st sc dese Waa O oie
46. B 5 lists the commands available from the Trig menu on the menu bar Table B 5 Trig menu commands Menu Submenu Function a Main Trigger Displays the Trigger Setup window you use to set up the A Event triggers Quick Select Edge Glitch Width Sets up the selected trigger type Runt Window Timeout Transition Setup Hold Logic Pattern Logic State Comm Serial Pattern TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual B 7 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 5 Trig menu commands Cont Menu Function Edge Setup Glitch Setup Width Setup Runt Setup Displays the Trigger Setup window and sets up the selected trigger type Window Setup Timeout Setup Transition Setup Setup Hold Setup Logic Pattern Setup Logic State Setup Comm Setup optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Serial Pattern Setup optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series A B Trigger Sequence B Event Delayed Trig ger Setup Holdoff Displays the trigger Holdoff control window you use to set trigger holdoff Mode Displays the Trigger Mode control window you can use to select the trigger mode force a trigger and set the trigger level to 50 Run Stop Displays the Run Stop control window you can use to start and stop acquisi tions control a single sequence of acquisitions and display the acquisition status B 8 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Display Commands Table B 6 lists t
47. C 3 Serial trigger functions Menu Data Src Clk Src Clk Polarity Coding Standard Bit Rate Data Level Clk Level Editor Format Function Sets the serial trigger waveform data source Ch1 Ch4 Sets the serial trigger clock source Ch1 Ch4 Recovered Clock the recovered clock function is only available for NRZ coded signals Sets the source waveform polarity positive or negative this function is available only when Clk Src is set to a different value than Data Src Shows the serial trigger communications code type which is always NRZ Sets the serial trigger signal standard Sets or displays the bit rate for the selected standard Sets the data and clock source threshold levels for the selected code Opens the serial pattern data editor which lets you define the serial pattern on which to trigger Displays the serial trigger pattern data in binary or hexadecimal format TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 7 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Mask Testing C 8 Mask testing sets the instrument to test communications signals against industry standard or user defined masks to verify the timing amplitude and waveform shape of the signal This section provides step by step instructions on how to access and operate the mask test features The mask testing instructions cover the following subjects Mask test setup Running a mask test Creating a user mask from a defined mask Saving
48. Data Format used when copying images Waveforms Select the Data Destination channel Source data range Waveform Detail and Data Ordering used when copying waveforms Measurements Select the Data Format and type of Measurements used when copying measurements TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual B 3 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Vertical Commands Table B 3 lists the commands available from the Vertical menu Table B 3 Vertical menu commands Menu Vertical Setup Zoom Controls Display On Off Position Scale Label Offset Termination Coupling Bandwidth Probe Cal Deskew Attenuation Function Displays the Vertical Setup window that you use to set the position scale offset termination coupling and bandwidth of a channel You can also calibrate deskew and set the external attenuation of attached probes Displays the Zoom control window that you use to set the position and scale of zoomed waveforms Displays the Waveform Display control window that you can use to turn the display of waveforms on and off Displays the control window that you use to position the waveform and set the vertical scale Displays a control window that you use to label your waveforms Vertical labels move if the waveform position changes also see display screen text on page B 9 Displays the Vertical Offset control window you use to set the vertical offset and scale of a waveform Displays the Termination control wi
49. Delta Recv Abs Gamma Recv Abs Beta Recv FC4250E FC4250E FC4250E FC4250E Abs Beta Transm Abs Delta Recv Abs Delta Transm Abs Gamma Recv FC4250E FC4250E FC4250E FC4250E Abs Gamma Transm Norm Beta Transm Norm Delta Transm Norm Gamma Transm TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 10 InfiniBand masks 2 5 Optical 2 5 Gb s 2 5 Electrical 2 5 Gb s None Table C 11 Serial ATA masks G1 Tx 1 5 Gb s G1 Rx 1 5 Gb s G2 Rx 3 0 Gb s None G2 Tx 3 0 Gb s Table C 12 USB 1 1 2 0 masks None HS T3 480 Mb s Table C 13 1394b masks None 800b T1 983 0 Mb s 1600b T2 1 966 Gb s Table C 14 Rapid IO LP LVDS masks None Drv 1 5 Gb s Ext Drv 1 0 Gb s Rev 750 Mb s 400b T1 491 5 Mb s 800b T2 983 0 Mb s 1600 Optical 1 966 Gb s Drv 500 Mb s Drv 2 0 Gb s Ext Drv 1 5 Gb s Rev 1 0 Gb s Table C 15 Rapid IO Serial masks None TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 400b T2 491 5 Mb s 8006 Optical 983 0 Mb s Drv 750 Mb s Ext Drv 500 Mb s Ext Drv 2 0 Gb s Rev 1 5 Gb s RIO Serial RIO Serial 1 25 Gb s 2 5 Gb s FS 12 Mb s HS T1 480 Mb s HS T2 480 Mb s HS T4 480 Mb s HS T5 480 Mb s HS T6 480 Mb s 4006 Optical 491 5 Mb s 1600b T1 1 966 Gb s Drv 1 0 Gb s Ext Drv 750 Mb s Rev 500 Mb s Rev 2 0 Gb s RIO Serial 3 125 Gb s C 37 Ap
50. FALSE To setup pattern trigger do the following procedures Control elements and resources The instrument must be installed and operating The acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired See page 3 17 for acquisition setup TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 77 Triggering Overview Trigger on a pattern Cont Control elements and resources To Trigger ona 2 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of Tri pattern the Trigger control window and touch Select AEvent A gt B Sec B Event Mode A Patten Acquire Touch Pattern este iere EATE Pattern Type Threshold ma MA E Ea pis Input Threshold Chi Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 ECL rey pew a pev E 14V _ aa 124 _1IN To define 4 To set the logic state for each of the input channels a _ pattern inputs Ch1 Ch2 touch each Input Threshold and select Seti See a either High H Low L or don t care X from the Ea El menu Input Threshold maa 12V ae MN To set 5 To set the logic threshold for each channel select the M o thresholds channel threshold and use the multipurpose knobs Pattern Type ala a i Presets keypad or threshold presets to set each threshold Ea Fa Input Threshold ue Chi Ch2 Ch3 ch4 HW xv xv xv To define the 6 To choose the logic pattern type you want applied to the logic input channels to
51. Interval reaches its lower limit fastest rate Record Length must decrease if Time Duration decreases you set faster scale settings or Time Duration must increase forcing slower scale settings if Record Length increases you set longer record lengths The equation becomes Maximum Record Length Time Duration Min Sample Interval For example at 50 ps div and 10 divisions the record length must be 500 points Max Rec Length 10 divs x 50ps div 500 fs sample Max Rec Length 500 samples NOTE As implied from the operation just described resolution and the equiva lent elements sample interval and sample rate see equation 2 above cannot be set directly but are derived You can however check the resolution at anytime in the resolution readout Also note that the Resolution control actually adjusts the record length to increase sample density The above discussion also assumes that horizontal scale is held constant You can however choose to hold the sample rate constant instead by selecting Hold Sample Rate Constant in the Utilities User Preferences menu TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Independent vs Shared Window The instrument applies the same horizontal acquisition window to all channels from which it acquires data Unlike the vertical acquisition window that you size and offset independently for each channel the same time div resolution record length and h
52. Mb s DS1 1 544 Mb s DS3 44 736 Mb s STS 1 Eye 51 84 Mb s Table C 30 Ethernet masks None 1000B CX Norm TP2 1 25 Gb s XAUI Far 3 125 Gb s TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 100Base TX STP 125 Mb s 1000B CX Abs TP2 1 25 Gb s EFM 125 Mb s draft 97Mb 97 728 Mb s DS3 Rate 44 736 Mb s E3 34 368 Mb s STM1E Binary 1 155 52 Mb s DS1A 2 048 Mb s DS4NA 139 26 Mb s STS 3 155 52 Mb s 100Base TX UTP 125 Mb s 1000B CX Abs TP3 1 25 Gb s DS1 Rate 1 544 Mb s E1 Sym Pair 2 048 Mb s E4 Binary 0 139 26 Mb s DS1C 3 152 Mb s DS4NA Max Output 139 26 Mb s STS 3 Max Output 155 52 Mb s 1000B SX LX 1 25 Gb s XAUI Near 3 125 Gb s C 45 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 31 SONET SDH masks None 0C48 FEC 2 666 Gb s Table C 32 Fibre Channel masks None FC1063 Optical 1 0625 Gb s None FC1063E Elec 1 0625 Gb s FC1063E Abs Beta Transm FC1063E Abs Delta Recv FC2125E Norm Gamma Trans FC2125E Abs Beta Recv FC4250E Abs Beta Transm FC4250E Abs Gamma Transm C 46 FC133E Elec 132 8 Mb s FC1063E Norm Beta Transm FC1063E Abs Delta Transm FC1063E Abs Gamma Recv FC2125E Abs Beta Transm FC2125E Abs Delta Recv FC4250E Abs Delta Recv FC4250E Norm Beta Transm FC133 Optical FC266 Optical 132 8 Mb s 265 6 Mb s FC1063 Optical FC21
53. O0C48 STM16 O0C48 FEC 155 5 Mb s 622 1 Mb s 2 488 Gb s 2 666 Gb s PCI Express RapidlO 500M RapidlO 750M RapidlO 1 0G 2 5 Gb s 500 Mb s 750 Mb s 1 0 Gb s RapidlO 1 5G RapidlO 2 0G RIO Serial 1G RIO Serial 2G 1 5 Gb s 2 0 Gb s 1 25 Gb s 2 5 Gb s RIO Serial 3G 400b 800b 1600b 3 125 Gb s 491 5 Mb s 983 0 Mb s 1 966 Gb s SFI SPI 5 2 5G SFI SPI 5 3 1G TFI 5 2 5G TFI 5 3 1G 2 5 Gb s 3 1 Gb s 1 488 Gb s 3 11 Gb s VSR 00192 XAUI 1 244 Gb s 3 125 Gb s TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Automatic Communication Signal Measurements Table C 27 lists the automatic communication signal measurements that are part of the Serial Mask Testing features Table C 27 Supported communications measurements and their definition Name Z TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Ext Ratio Extinction Ratio Extinction Ratio dB Eye Height Eye Width Crossing Eye Top Eye Base Jitter Pk Pk Jitter RMS Jitter 60 Noise Pk Pk Noise RMS S N Ratio Definition The ratio of eye top to base Ext Ratio PT0pmean PBasSemean The ratio of eye base to top in Ext Ratio 100 PBaS mean PTOPmean The ratio of eye top to base in dB Ext Ratio dB 10 Log PTOpmean PBas nean The eye height in watts or volts Eye Height PTopmean 3 PTOPsigma PBaS mean 3 PBasesigma The eye width in seconds Eye Width TCross2nean 3 TCross2yigma TCroSSt
54. Oscilloscope and CSA7000B Series Communications Signal Analyzers This section also describes how to install the optional Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering functions on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series instruments The following text is an overview of the Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering features The Serial Mask Testing feature provides optical and electrical mask testing communication triggering and automatic communication signal measurements Mask testing consists of two tasks signal violation detection and pass fail testing Signal violation detection lets you test communications signals for time or amplitude violations against a predefined mask Each mask consists of one or more polygonal regions called segments The signal waveform data should stay outside of the segments defined by the mask Any signal data that occurs inside a mask segment is called a mask segment violation or hit You can select from any of the included telecommunications masks optional on TDS6000B Series instruments or you can define your own custom masks Selecting a mask automatically sets the instrument communications triggers to properly display most communication signals in the mask Pass Fail testing defines the mask testing parameters including the number of waveforms to test how many mask hits are allowed before failing a test setting a mask margin tolerance value and what action to perform at the completion of a test Commun
55. Real time sampling cc cece eee ences Figure 3 12 Equivalent time sampling eeeeeees Figure 3 13 Acquisition XY display cece cee eeees Figure 3 14 FastFrame cc cece cece eee e cece eeees Figure 3 15 FastFrame time stamp cece ceeceees Figure 3 16 Triggered versus untriggered displays Figure 3 17 Triggered versus untriggered displays Figure 3 18 Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers Figure 3 19 Slope and level controls help define the trigger 3 14 3 15 3 17 3 22 3 23 3 29 3 29 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 34 3 35 3 41 3 44 3 46 3 47 3 48 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Table of Contents Figure 3 20 Example advanced trigger readout 64 3 60 Figure 3 21 Violation zones for Setup Hold triggering 3 64 Figure 3 22 Triggering on a Setup Hold time violation 3 84 Figure 3 23 Triggering with Horizontal Delay off 3 87 Figure 3 24 Triggering with Horizontal Delay on 3 88 Figure 3 25 Reset trigger limitation 0 cc cece eeeee 3 89 Figure 3 26 Trigger and Horizontal Delay summary 3 90 Figure 3 27 Display elements ccs cecececeeceees 3 98 Figure 3 28 Horizontal Position includes time to Horizontal Reference 3 i3aiisese bis essa ret N EA bend Sade eek ae 3 102 Figure 3 29 Graticule Cursor and Automatic m
56. Reference Levels Method on page 3 122 Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements Optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series A 6 All eye diagram measurements are based on the power level the voltage level or the time locations of edges within each acquisition Figure A 2 shows an eye diagram and the areas from which values are taken that are used to calculate measurements TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported PTop TCross TCrosso ge PCrosso PBase ye Aperture Figure A 2 Eye diagram values P Values The P values include the mean and standard deviation of the vertical location of PTop and PBase These areas are used with a specified sample size to statisti cally measure the following values m PTopmean the mean value of PTop m PToPsigma the standard deviation of PTop m PToppk pk The vertical peak to peak deviation of PTop m PBasemean the mean value of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasegioma the standard deviation of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasepk pk the vertical peak to peak deviation of PBase The Eye Aperture defaults to the center 20 of the interval from TCross to TCrossp TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual A 7 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Ti Values The T1 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the leftmost crossing point These areas are used to
57. Set Display Styles that you can make Overview Set display styles Prerequisites 1 Access the 2 display setup dialog box Select the 3 display style and persistence and waveform interpolation mode 4 3 114 The instrument must be powered up with any waveform you want to display on screen From the toolbar touch Disp and then select the Appearance tab See right From display Persistence choose a persistence mode Off displays Waveforms with new data replacing the data from previous waveform acquisitions no persistence m Infinite persistence continuously accumulates record points until you change an acquisition setting m Variable persistence accumulates record points for a specified time Each point decays in a set time interval From display Style select an available style Vectors displays lines between waveform dots Dots displays waveform record points as dots m Inten Samp displays actual samples as bright dots and blacks out interpolated samples Note Adjustment of display intensity may be necessary to set display intensity to the desired level Select an Interpolation mode by choosing Sin x x or Linear For more information see Interpolation on page 3 113 Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments Related control elements and resources See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Appearan
58. Snapshot window tells you the waveform that the measurements are being taken on and the reference levels used Snapshot measurements are not continuously updated To update snapshot measurements touch the Snapshot Again button To select the type of snapshot measurements touch one of the Snapshot Type buttons Comm Selects snapshots of Comm measurements optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series General Selects all single waveform measure ments Phase Delay and Histogram measurements are not included in a snapshot Touch the Help button in the Measurements setup control window to access the online assistance See Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported on page A 1 for a list of the measurements and their definitions To gate a measurement 1 Set up as from last procedure Related control elements and resources PhP Noise RMS Noise Sia Noise PPK Jitter Use the procedure that follows to take a measurement over a segment of the waveform otherwise the entire waveform is included in the measurement Related control elements and resources eal See To Take Automatic Measurements on page 3 123 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview Access gating Enable and position the gates To gate a measurement Cont 2 From the toolbar select Meas and then select Gating from the Measurement setup control window 3 To select how t
59. The instrument displays the Mask Edit control window Touch the Mask Recall button The instrument opens the Recall Mask dialog The default recall location is the TekScope Masks folder If the mask files are in another folder use the navigation controls to access the appropriate folder Select the mask name Touch Recall to load the user mask into user mask memory on the instrument To recall a mask that was stored on disk do the following procedure Control elements and resources Mask Elements Segment Recall Mask Look in amass a Ea Examples DEE a mymask 1 msk File name coad msk Files of type User Mask Files msk X Cancel Help TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Creating a New User Mask To create a new user mask that is not based on an existing mask do the following procedure Overview Creating a new mask Control elements and resources Set instrument 1 Use the communications trigger features to trigger the settings instrument on a signal The instrument saves these settings with the mask information 900 See the instrument user manual for information on displaying waveforms Create an empty 2 From the button bar touch Masks and select the Masks user mask Masks tab 3 Touch the User Mask button ITU T ANSI T1 102 Ether net 4 Touch the mask standard field to display the drop down l
60. To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources 10 Touch the Save button to save the waveform file or reference To cancel without saving touch the Cancel button __ Concel Help 11 For more help on saving waveforms touch the Help button in the toolbar to access the contextual online help To Recall Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to recall a waveform to a reference You can only Overview Prerequisites Display the reference control window Recall the waveform recall waveforms into references NOTE Reference waveforms do not recall because they are already reside in the instrument You can copy a reference waveform to another reference first display the reference to be copied and then use the Save Waveform procedure to save it to another reference Ref1 Ref4 To recall your waveform Control elements and resources 1 The instrument must be powered up You must have access to a waveform saved by the instrument m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 2 From the toolbar touch Refs and then select the Ref 1 Refs to Ref 4 tab of the reference in which you want to recall the waveform Jef f2 Ref3 Reta Display a Olt E Main Fer pare Wim to Ref1 Recall Ref1 fron lat nat aT ee Recall OO me Ane 22 ave Wim to File Delete Wim Fil Canet voy a E bela 3 If recalling an internal reference touch Display to toggle an Se TES the display of the reference wav
61. Use the following procedure to open an existing MyScope control window Control Window Overview To open a MyScope control window Control elements and resources Select from 1 Select MyScope gt Open Control Window or one of ra menu the five most recently used MyScope windows spp Utilities Help urrent New Control Window Open Control Window Edit Control Window C TekScope My Scope 050520_122455 tcw C TekScope My Scope trigger tcw C TekScope My Scope export tcw Select a control 2 Select the MyScope control window that you want to x window use and then click Open Lookin Ga MySeope HEEE limit test tow wa measure tew 8 Measurement teow a MyContrals teow ja MyScopet tew ai test tew a test2 tcw jai vertical tew Files of type f MyScope files tcw Cancel e 3 238 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual MyScope To Display the Active Use the following procedure to display the active MyScope control window Myscope Control Window Overview To display the active MyScope control window Control elements and resources Select from 1 Select MyScope gt Current Your MyScope control ath App Utilities Help menu window remains active even when it is not displayed New Control Window Open Control Window Edit Control Window C TekScope MyScope 050520_122455 tew C TekScope My Scope trigger tew ec gt 9 MyScope export te T
62. W f Fef Leys cE J Comm Eye width y _Sating Snapshot Ext Ratio dB _ Annotation I Meas 1 Glose Figure C 3 Communication measurement functions Refer to the user manual for your instrument for information on setting up and taking automatic measurements Refer to Appendix C of this manual for a list and description of the communication measurements TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Accessing Serial Pattern Trigger Functions To access the Serial Pattern Trigger functions do the following steps 1 Touch the Trig tool bar button The instrument displays the Trigger control window 2 Select the A Event tab 3 Touch either of the Trigger Type buttons Select the Serial Trigger Type The instrument displays the serial pattern trigger functions as shown in Figure C 4 B Event Mode AcSerial Acquire Clk Src Data Src Standard Serial Pattern Data Level Serial Y Coding Bit Rate Select NRZ 1 25Gb s Serial Pattern Isb 1111 XOX VK OX KOX VONK 000 200000000 000K 2000C 0000 000K 2000X X20GK XX01 Editor Trigger Type RC chi GB Ethema Y AJAA 0 0 Rok NUU Format Ema Figure C 4 Serial pattern trigger control window Table C 3 describes the Serial Pattern Trigger functions Refer to the Mask Testing beginning on page C 8 of this manual as well as the online help for more information about these functions Table
63. You can enable Enhanced Bandwidth on any or all of the vertical input channels of the instrument Envelope acquisition mode A mode in which the instrument acquires and displays a waveform that shows the variation extremes of several acquisitions Equivalent time sampling ET A sampling mode in which the instrument acquires signals over many repetitions of the event These instruments use a type of equivalent time sampling called random equivalent time sampling which uses an internal clock that runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The instrument takes samples continuously independent of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger Although the samples are taken sequentially in time they are random with respect to the trigger TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 5 Glossary Glossary 6 Fall Time A measurement of the time it takes for the trailing edge of a pulse to fall from a HighRef value typically 90 to a LowRef value typically 10 of its amplitude Frequency A timing measurement that is the reciprocal of the period Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second Gated Measurements A feature that lets you limit automated measurements to a specified portion of the waveform You define the area of interest using the vertical cursors Glitch positive trigger Triggering occurs if the instrument dete
64. You can have up to eight tabs N Add tabs 8 To rename a tab do one of the following Click Rename Tab Double click the tab Then type the new name 9 To change the tab order click and drag a tab to a new location Set user 10 Click User Pref to specify user preferences that are preferences loaded with your MyScope control window Delete controls 11 To delete controls do one of the following m Select a tab and then click Delete The tab and all of the controls are deleted m Select a control and then click Delete Just the selected control is deleted Click and drag the control to the upper half of the screen off your MyScope control window Save MyScope 12 Click Save and then enter a name for your MyScope control window control window or use the default name TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources New Tab Tab 1 Rename Tab Taba Tab 1 User Pref New Tab Rename Tab User Pref Delete z are sen Guam dende ta imit test tew Save S fa measure tew a Measurement t tew MyControls tew a MyScopel tew a test tew we test2 tew i Vertical tew Filename EERE Save as type MyScope Files tew z Cancel I Autoincrement file name Help MyScope Using MyScope Control Windows The following section describes how to use MyScope control windows after you have created them To Open a MyScope
65. acquire a waveform even if a trigger does not occur Auto mode uses a timer that starts after a trigger event occurs If another trigger event is not detected before the timer times out the instrument forces a trigger The length of time it waits for a trigger event depends on the time base setting Be aware that auto mode when forcing triggers in the absence of valid triggering events does not synchronize the waveform on the display See Automatic trigger mode in Figure 3 17 Successive acquisitions will not be triggered at the same point on the waveform therefore the waveform will appear to roll across the screen Of course if valid triggers occur the display will become stable on screen Triggered waveform Untriggered waveforms Normal trigger mode Auto trigger mode Figure 3 17 Triggered versus untriggered displays Trigger holdoff can help stabilize triggering When the instrument recognizes a trigger event it disables the trigger system until acquisition is complete In addition the trigger system remains disabled during the holdoff period that TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering follows each acquisition You adjust holdoff to obtain stable triggering when the instrument is triggering on undesired trigger events as shown in Figure 3 18 A digital pulse train is a good example of a complex waveform See Figure 3 18 Each pulse looks like any other so many possible trigge
66. additional information on setting up and using serial mask information testing refer to other sections of this user manual and the instrument online help TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 25 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 26 Mask Key Points There are a number of mask test key points to be aware of prior to using editing or creating a mask Mask Testing Only one mask standard is active at any time If you have a mask selected enabled and then select a new mask the new mask replaces the previous mask You cannot test to multiple standards simultaneously Autofit and Persistence Interaction The Autofit function moves the waveform vertically and horizontally in a mask to reduce the number of segment hits within a mask If persistence is set to infinite or variable each Autofit waveform movement clears existing persistence data If Autofit makes frequent waveform movements there may be little or no displayed waveform persistence data Segments and Mask Hits Each mask can have a maximum of 16 segments Segments can overlap The number of mask hits is the sum of all hits in all segments regardless of whether or not segments overlap For example if a waveform crosses over an area where two segments overlap both segments will count the waveform hit Vertices Each segment can have a maximum of 50 vertices Vertices are numbered counterclockwise with vertex one generally located at the bot
67. also adjusts delay but only when delay mode is on e Verify the delay toggle function m Rotate the front panel horizontal POSITION knob to center the falling edge horizontally on the screen m Change the horizontal SCALE to 40 ns div The rising edge of the waveform should remain near the center graticule m Set horizontal DELAY to 80 ns The rising edge should be 2 divisions to the right of the center graticule line m Push the front panel DELAY button several times to toggle delay off and on and back off again Verify that the display switches quickly between two different points in time 9 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the equipment from the channel input and the FAST EDGE output Check Trigger Operation Equipment required One BNC cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 xx One TCA SMA TekConnect adapter Prerequisites None 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the equipment to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 1 12 3 Set up the instrument Push the front panel AUTOSET button TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 27 Incoming Inspection 1 28 Instrument under test ee Sly e 8E ols O 8s8 e ame Je JeF D QQ a gee e 0 o LJ SMA cable from FAST EDGE output to CH 1 input Figure 1 12 Setup for trigger test 4 Touch the Vert button and then touch O
68. and digitizing Acquisition Modes The instrument acquisition system can process the data as it is acquired averaging or enveloping the waveform data to produce enhanced waveform records Once the waveform record exists enhanced or not you can use the postprocessing capabilities of the instrument to further process that record perform measurements waveform math and so on Refer to Using the Acquisi tion Controls on page 3 18 for a description of the acquisition modes TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 29 Acquiring Waveforms 3 30 Waveform Record While sampling on the input signal provides the data that makes up the waveform record for any given channel the instrument builds the waveform record through use of some common parameters common means that they affect the waveforms in all channels Figure 3 10 shows how these common parameters define the waveform record as shown in the figure they define where in the data stream and how much data is taken Locate the following parameters in the figure m Sample Interval The time between sample points taken during acquisition m Record Length The number of samples required to fill a waveform record m Trigger Point The trigger point marks the time zero in a waveform record All waveform samples are located in time with respect to the trigger point m Horizontal Position If horizontal delay is off the time lapse from the first sample taken first point in the wave
69. and scale waveforms Mouse keyboard and touch screen interfaces support complete setup of all the display parameters Anything you can do with the mouse you can do with the touch screen m Fast Access to MultiView Zoom Waveform inspection has never been easier Just touch and drag a box around the feature of interest and select zoom from the choices offered and the feature of interest displays zoomed in the magnified graticule Both vertical and horizontal zoom functions are available Zoomed waveforms can be aligned locked and automatically scrolled m Acquisition Preview When the next acquisition is delayed due to slow triggers or long acquisition duration acquisition preview attempts to show what the next acquisition will look like Acquisition preview does not recalculate math waveforms or represent changes in trigger levels trigger modes or different acquisition modes Using the Display Read the following topics they provide the details that can help you set up the instrument display so that it best supports your data analysis tasks Waveform Display In general the method of displaying a waveform is to define the waveform if necessary math and reference waveforms and then turn it on Table 3 3 summarizes this process as it applies to the different waveforms TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 99 Displaying Waveforms Table 3 3 Defining and displaying waveforms Channel Chi Ch4 Channels are predefi
70. are individually vertically scaled If you use Autoset when no channels are displayed the instrument turns on channel one CH 1 and scales it The Autoset Undo control window opens automatically after an Autoset operation Touch Undo if you want to undo the last Autoset Only the parameters that were set by the last Autoset are undone Parameters that you changed that are not controlled by Autoset retain their settings If you don t want this window to appear set the Utilities User Preferences Autoset Undo button to Off You can still do an Autoset Undo using the Horiz Acq menu Select User Preferences in the Utilities menu to display the Prompt Before Action window Touch Autoset to toggle between ON and OFF OFF to set up for performing an autoset when the AUTOSET button is pushed ON to set up for displaying a prompt before performing an autoset when the AUTOSET button is pushed Touch Close to save your prompt selection TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources See page 3 43 in this manual for trigger setup information auroser DEFAUTT prir cursors _ FastAcq FrEe c HORIZONTAL TRIGGER POSITION e O ND am e SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE Autoset Aeypad Dafaulte Record Length HeasureTet Prompt user before performing requested action Default Recall Overwrite Delete Del Ref Wim Autoset Undo A
71. cee eee 3 204 Saving and Recalling Waveforms 0 cece eee eee eee eee 3 205 To Save Your Waveform 0 0 00 3 206 To Recall Your Waveform eicae nri viete nri ccc eee ee eee 3 209 To Clear References siaina ed Sw eh ee we ees 3 211 Exporting and Copying Waveforms 0 c cee cee eee eee 3 213 To Export Your Waveform 0 0 00 c ccc eee eens 3 215 To Use an Exported Waveform 0 0 0 c cece cee eee 3 222 To Copy Your Waveform mirre nri viore orit eE cece eee eens 3 224 Printing Waveforms 0 Ea cece cece eee eens 3 228 To Print from Front Panel vicie orit eee cee eee eee 3 228 To Print from Menu Bar nri viete nra CREEEREN AIET 3 228 TO Set Up the Page ienaa A aw Cech eh we ee ahi is 3 229 To Preview the Page orie aea eera cece eee eens 3 230 To Print Using Print Screen 0 one ori eE eee eee 3 231 To Date Time Stamp Hardcopies 0 000 c cee eee eee 3 232 Remote Communication onpi i n Aee ra ccc ccc eee ee eens 3 233 MEV SCOP DG sia arisen 2 ching EEE bindu To s phesia AENA VEEE 3 235 Using MyScope Control Windows 0 cece eee eee eee ee eens 3 238 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported A 1 Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements A 5 Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements Optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series 0004 A 6 P Values in tis reas ewan ha TAA dee wena ays ara de an A
72. compress zoom in or out on a waveform without changing the acquisition parameters sample rate record length and so on This section describes how to use MultiView Zoom and how it interacts with the selected waveform Use MultiView Zoom push the MultiView Zoom button when you want to expand a waveform to inspect small feature s on that waveform or compare the feature to the non zoomed waveform s For example to temporarily expand the front corner of a pulse to inspect its aberrations use MultiView Zoom to expand it horizontally and vertically To help you use MultiView Zoom effectively consider how it operates on waveforms When in zoom mode the instrument vertically expands or contracts one waveform at a time unless zoom lock is on Also the instrument only vertically positions one waveform at a time when in MultiView Zoom When zooming horizontally MultiView Zoom expands all waveforms at the same time When zooming horizontally or vertically MultiView Zoom expands or contracts the waveform by the zoom scale factor Use the procedure that follows to zoom a waveform For more information display online help when performing the procedure Control elements and resources p000 See page 3 43 for trigger setup TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 105 Displaying Waveforms Overview To zoom waveforms Cont Control elements and resources Select zoom 2 You can select zoom in two ways m To zoo
73. context sensitive help on math waveforms or see Measuring Waveforms on page 3 119 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Cursors Cursor Source Ch Channel 3 E Cursor Type H Bars Waveform V Bars Sereen Matht Scale 2 c082Mvi8 I 50 cmv 2 IM 201s 100p a a PiePie 5 BMVis 10 0usfdiv 25 0MSis _40 08 ot BE 7 0mv 3 159 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Defining Spectral Math Waveforms 3 160 The math capabilities of the instrument include spectrum analysis of a wave form This section describes a spectral analyzer that allows you to control the analysis intuitively with time domain and frequency domain controls These controls merge the time domain controls with the frequency domain controls to provide a complete spectral analyzer Signals may be represented by their characteristics in both the time and the frequency domain By combining and transforming source waveforms into spectral math waveforms you can simultaneously view signal characteristics in both domains This spectral analyzer provides a complete set of controls and features that allow you to make time and frequency domain measurements without the need to learn extensive details about FFT algorithms m Frequency Domain Controls You can operate the spectral analyzer using traditional spectrum analyzer controls You can set the center frequen
74. drive is preinstalled at the factory You can secure data separate from the instrument with the removeable hard drive To remove the hard drive follow these steps 1 Verify that the instrument is powered off 2 Set the instrument so its bottom is down on the work surface and its rear panel is facing you See Figure 1 3 on page 1 13 Note if you have option FHD installed on your instrument the front panel should be facing you instead of the rear panel 3 Loosen the thumb screws that secure the hard drive to the drive tray 4 Grasp the hard disk drive assembly by the thumb screws and pull until the handle is exposed Grasp the handle and pull the hard drive assembly straight out of the instrument Remove the hard disk drive Figure 1 3 Removing the hard drive TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 13 Installation Reinstalling the Removable Hard Drive To reinstall the hard drive follow these steps See Figure 1 4 on page 1 14 1 Verify that the instrument is powered off 2 Leaving the cover handle extended push the hard drive assembly into place until it stops ensuring that it is straight Push the hard drive assembly firmly to ensure that the connector is seated properly 3 Slide the cover handle in until it stops It will be alsmost flush with the back panel 4 Finger tighten the two thumb screws to ensure that the removeable hard drive is properly seated Lin Tighten the RSS thumbscrews
75. eect eeee C 45 Table C 29 ANSI T1 102 masks ccc cece cee csececnees C 45 Table C 30 Ethernet masks 0 cece cece cece cece tenes C 45 Table C 31 SONET SDH masks ccc ce cee cscs cccceees C 46 Table C 32 Fibre Channel masks cece cece eee eeee C 46 Table C 33 Fibre Channel Electrical masks C 46 Table C 34 InfiniBand masks cece cece cece eee ceees C 47 Table C 35 Serial ATA masks ccc ccc cce cee cscceceees C 47 Table C 36 USB 1 1 2 0 masks cc cece cece cece eee eeee C 47 Table C 37 1394b masks cc cece cece cee eneesseecnees C 47 Table C 38 Rapid IO LP LVDS masks ceceeeeeeee C 47 Table C 39 Rapid IO Serial masks cece e eee eeeee C 47 Table C 40 IOF masks vccsc cise cee eae ken 6 aes bee ewee se C 48 Table C 41 PCI Express masks cc cee ccc ee ce cevees C 48 Table 42 SAS masks sescrcri edio trne inat Wie is elas oles ale davai C 48 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Table of Contents Table C 43 AMI trigger standards cece cece ee eeeee Table C 44 B3ZS trigger standards cece eee eeeeeee Table C 45 B6ZS trigger standards ec ee cece eeeee Table C 46 B8ZS trigger standards cece cece eeeee Table C 47 CMI trigger standards ccc ceeee evens Table C 48 HDB3 trigger standards e ccc eeeeeeeee Table C 49 MLTS3 trigger stan
76. eens Figure 1 3 Removing the hard drive cececeeeees Figure 1 4 Reinstalling the hard drive 0 cece eeeee Figure 1 5 Enabling your LAN and connecting to a network Figure 1 6 Setting up a dual display 0 0 ccc eeeeeee Figure 1 7 Drag area for Windows task bar 0e0ee0e Figure 1 8 Moving Windows desktop icons to the external monitor Figure 1 9 Universal test hookup for functional tests CH 1 shown Figure 1 10 Channel button location 00 cece ee eeee Figure 1 11 Setup for time base test cece ee eee eee Figure 1 12 Setup for trigger test 0 ccc cece cere eee Figure 3 1 Input and Acquisition Systems and Controls Figure 3 2 Setting vertical range and position of input channels Figure 3 3 Varying offset moves the vertical acquisition window On the waveform sistent ie oA Miwa esa aes Figure 3 4 Horizontal Acquisition window definition Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate forall Channels ass icsierses 8 ale ie eieeae Be ale deere is Ole Boies eRe ale deere Figure 3 6 Roll mode cc cece cece cece cece e cece eens Figure 3 7 Aliasing 20 0 0 ccc cece cece cece reece ene eens Figure 3 8 Digitizer configuration 0 cece cece eens Figure 3 9 Digital acquisition sampling and digitizing Figure 3 10 The waveform record and its defining parameters Figure 3 11
77. establish the following directions m TCrossl mean the horizontal mean of the left crossing point at TCross m TCross1 jgma the horizontal standard deviation of the left crossing point at TCross1 m TCross1 p the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at TCross1 m PCross1 mean the vertical mean of the left crossing point at PCross T2 Values The T2 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions m TCross2mean the horizontal mean of the right crossing point at TCross2 m TCross2sigma the horizontal standard deviation of the right crossing point at TCross gt m TCross2p p the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the right crossing point at TCross DCD Values The duty cycle distortion DCD values are horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point at 50 of the eye height These areas are used to establish the DCD p the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at half the height of the eye A 8 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Measurements Annotations Table A 2 describes the annotations for each measurement Table A 2 Supported measurements and their definition Measurements Amplitude measurement annotations Annotation descriptions Amplitude High Low RMS Max Min Pk Pk Cycle RMS
78. explicitly turn off histograms This allows you to continue collecting histogram data even when you turn off the histogram display To Start and Reset Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the Histogram Counting default settings for histograms Overview To start and reset histogram counting Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must have a waveform displayed Open histogram 2 From the toolbar touch the Meas button and then touch setup window the Histogram button to display the Histogram setup window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 137 Measuring Waveforms Overview Set display and reset histogram source and type Set histogram display options 3 138 To start and reset histogram counting Cont Related control elements and resources 3 P Select either the Source Ch Math or Ref tab and then select the waveform source for the histogram Touch either Histogram Mode Horiz or Vert to start PE histogram counting and display the histogram data m Horiz Displays a horizontal histogram that shows how time varies in the histogram box m Vert Displays a vertical histogram that shows how your vertical units vary in the histogram box Off Turns off histogram counting and display Note This control turns on histogram counting and data display You can only display one type of histogram at a time Touch Rese
79. for the selected source Choose Default to use the default system color white for reference waveforms Choose Inherit to use the same color for the reference waveform as the original waveform Choose Default to use the default system color red for math waveforms Choose Inherit to use the same color for the math waveform as the waveform the math function is based on 3 111 Displaying Waveforms Table 3 5 Customizable display elements Cont Display attribute Menu name Waveform Display Interpolation Disp Waveform Intensity Display Trigger Level Marker Disp Trigger T Display Disp Date and Time Display Disp Set Date and Time Utilities 1 3 112 Appearance Access Options Entry Appearance Choose from Sin x x or Linear interpolation Appearance Toggle AutoBright On to set the brightness maximum to the value of the most frequent event Toggle AutoBright Off to let the brightness depend on the trigger Appearance rate creating a display like an analog instrument Touch Record View or FastAcq WfmDB and use the keypad or multipurpose knobs to adjust the intensity of waveforms Objects Choose a Short level marker at the right side of the graticule a Long level marker the width of the graticule or Off for no trigger level marker Display Trigger T Objects Display Date and Time Objects Set Date and Time Toggle on and off the display of a T at the trigger point
80. from the A Main trigger alone or from a sequential trigger that uses both the A Main and B Delayed triggers See Triggering with Horizontal Delay On on page 3 88 for more information Read the following topics they provide details that can help prevent false steps in setting up to trigger on your waveforms Trigger Sources In most cases it makes sense to set separate trigger sources for the A Main and B Delayed triggers Trigger Types When using sequential triggering both the A trigger and B trigger events can be set independently to be any one the following types Edge Glitch Width Timeout Runt Transition Window Setup Hold Pattern or State Except for Pattern and State all of these types can be logic qualified for the A or B trigger event or for both If Comm and or Serial options are installed A triggers can also be set to Comm and or Serial types Comm and Serial trigger cannot be logic qualified nor are they available with B triggers Triggering with Horizontal Delay Off Figure 3 23 compares the sequential trigger choices A Only Trig After Time and Trig on ntt Event when horizontal delay is off Each illustration shows where pretrigger and posttrigger data is acquired relative to the trigger event TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Pretrigger record Posttrigger record A Main Only i lt __ _ _ Waveform record __ _ gt A trig
81. glitch or runt pulse triggering and with triggering based on the width slew rate or timeout period of a pulse You can logic qualify by up to two logic inputs any of these trigger types Applications include such tasks as unattended monitoring for and capturing of a power supply glitch or GO NO GO slew rate testing of operational amplifiers m Advance trigger types support digital signal capture with triggering based on a logic or binary pattern on the state of a logic pattern at the time clocked and on data that violates setup and hold times relative to a clock These trigger types cannot be logic qualified This instrument provides all of these trigger types for both A and B triggering allowing you extensive latitude in defining both trigger events in the sequence in order to capture complex signals See Sequential Triggering on page 3 85 for more information TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 59 Triggering NOTE Runt glitch width transition timeout and window pulses are recognized when the instrument sees the trailing edge of the pulse The instrument then triggers or if the trigger is logic qualified checks the logic status of the other channels If the logic qualifying signals are present a trigger is generated Due to this timing there is a chance that the pulse and the logic qualifying signals were present at the same time but not when the instrument checks for them You can check the advance
82. graticule and waveform either use Copy in the Edit menu after selecting Image in the Copy Setup menu or if you want to build a bitmap file select Export in the File menu after selecting Full Screen bitmap in the Select for Export menu For additional information see Exporting and Copying Waveforms on page 3 213 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 231 Data Input Output To Date Time Stamp You can display the current date and time on screen so that they appear on Hardcopies _hardcopies that you print To date and time stamp your hardcopy do the following steps Overview To date time stamp hardcopies Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Dad To display the date and time 3 The instrument must be powered on From the toolbar touch Disp and select the Objects tab Touch Display Date Time to toggle it on Trigger Level Marker Short Long Ott Display Date Time On Display Trigger T To set the date 4 From the menu bar touch Utilities and select Set Time Utiites Help Buttons and time amp Date to display the Set Time and Date control window Tek Secure Erase Set Time amp Date GPIB Cenfiguration 5 Touch Hour Minute or Second and use the multipur E Sah pose knobs keypad or arrow buttons to enter the time Eza g pee ee Tie 6 Touch Year Month or Day and use the multipurpose m an un SARA knobs keypad or arrow buttons to enter the date A paunch 7
83. have m The correct power cord for your geographical area m The compact discs that include copies of the software installed on the instrument and additional support software that may be useful to you the Operating System Restore Product Software and Optional Applications Software Store the product software in a safe location where you can easily retrieve it NOTE The certificate of authenticity Windows licence agreement is attached to the rear of your instrument This certificate proves your ownership of the Windows operating system in your instrument Without this certificate you might purchase a new Windows license if the hard disk in your instrument requires rebuilding or replacement m All the standard and optional accessories that you ordered Fill out and send in the customer registration card TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 5 Installation Checking the Environment Requirements Site Considerations A Read this section before attempting any installation procedures This section describes site considerations power requirements and ground connections for your instrument The instrument is designed to operate on a bench or on a cart in the normal position on the bottom feet For proper cooling at least three inches 7 62 cm of clearance is required on both sides of the instrument and the bottom requires the clearance provided by the instrument feet If you operate the instrument wh
84. i control window m Using the menu bar select Vertical and then Label Vertical Horiz Acq Vertical Setup Zoom Controls Display on off Pasition Scale Offset m From the Label control window select the waveform that you want to label using the Source buttons Label m From the Label control window touch Label and Bco use your keyboard or the pop up keyboard to create a label for your waveform Position the label relative to the waveform using XPos Y Pos f xen re Odiv 3 iv s idiv the multipurpose knobs your keyboard or the pop up keyboard 224v Save the 6 Touch the Save Wmf to Ref x Save button to save your waveform toa waveform Data in the existing reference will be oma uno S OE ae reference overwritten mE Save Wim to File Delete Wim Filg NNa A Scale Label joy s save Delete Horz Pos TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 207 Data Input Output Overview Save the 7 waveform to a file Select a 8 destination Select directory 9 and name file 3 208 To save a waveform Cont To save the waveform to a file touch the Save Wfm to File Save button or to save all active waveforms to files touch the Save all Wfms to Files Save button The Save Reference Waveform As window lists all available waveforms allows for browsing to a destination directory saving to file and allows you to name the waveform file Use the Save in
85. is a bell shaped function equal in length to the gate duration For most windows this function tapers to zero at both ends of the gate region Before computation of the spectral transform the window is multiplied sample by sample by the input data in the gate region The window function affects the shape of the spectral analyzer response in the frequency domain The window functions affect the ability to resolve frequency in the output spectrum and can affect the accuracy of the magnitude and phase measurements Figure 3 48 shows how the time domain record is processed TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Source waveform Waveform data points Point by point multiply ae Window function J L Hanning nN Waveform after 7 Zero fill windowing With windowing Figure 3 48 Windowing the time domain record Accurate magnitude measurements require that the input source waveform be stationary within the gate region This means that waveform parameters such as frequency and amplitude do not change significantly as a function of time within the gate region that is input to the spectral analyzer Also the gate width must be greater than or equal to the period of the start frequency of the span of the spectral analyzer that is there must be at least one cycle of the harmonic being measured within the gate region m Choice of a window Your choice of window function will de
86. offset component The instrument integrates this offset along with the time varying portions of your waveform Even a minor division of offset in the source waveform may be enough to ensure that the integral waveform saturates clips especially with long record lengths 3 152 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Define a Math Waveform Use the procedure that follows when defining a math waveform Remember to ensure that the sources you use exist Acquisitions should be running or the channels should already be on and reference waveform sources should contain saved waveforms and so on These sources do not have to be displayed to be used Overview To define a math waveform Related control elements and resources All channel and reference Waveforms and automatic ZA measurement scalars that you will use in your math waveform must be available channels and references Prerequisites 1 contain data measurement scalars are defined and so on a See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Display the 2 From the toolbar touch the Math button to display the Math math control Define Math control window window Select a math 3 Select the Math x tab for the math waveform that you Saymi EEE waveform want to define Be sure to touch Display to toggle it on RINE DetineE Expression Spectral Analysis so that the waveform displays EA pom
87. screen contents Graticule to export a bitmap of only the graticule area m Waveform to export waveform data m Measurements to export measurement data From the menu bar select File and then select Export Setup to display the Export Setup control window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 m See page 3 24 for acquisition setup m See page 3 43 for trigger setup File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Reference Waveforms Instrument Setup Recall Default Setup Page Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Export Setup Se lt port a Full Screen bitmap Expor Graticule bitmap 1 030709_101546 set Measurements 2 C TekScope EMCSetup set Minimize Crem Shutdown File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Reference Waveforms Instrument Setup Recall Default Setup Page Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Export Setup Select for Export Export 1 030709_101546 set 2 C TekScope EMCSetup set Minimize Ctrl M Shutdown 3 215 Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Setup to export 5 Select the Images tab to display the Images control Ea export Seton ba images window gi Waveforms Measurements EA Palette Image F before Exporting 6 In the Palette window select Color or Blac
88. system and the vertical system Delay measurement A measurement of the time between the middle reference crossings of two different waveforms Delay time The time between the trigger event and the acquisition of post trigger data Digitizing The process of converting a continuous analog signal such as a waveform to a set of discrete numbers representing the amplitude of the signal at specific points in time Digitizing is composed of two steps sampling and quantizing TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Display system The part of the instrument that shows waveforms measurements control windows status and other parameters Dragging The act of changing your touch panel selection by moving your finger without removing it from the screen The selection that is activated is the last one that you were touching before removing your finger Dual Graticule A display with two graticules Each one is half the height of the single graticule Edge Trigger Triggering occurs when the instrument detects the source passing through a specified voltage level in a specified direction the trigger slope Enhanced Bandwidth A digital signal processing filter applied on the digitized data stream from an input channel that reduces its risetime it may extend its bandwidth on some models and does flatten its response and corrects phase linearity Since these filters are matched across channels response is better matched
89. the Appearance tab Select between YT and XY display formats YT This format is the conventional instrument display format It shows a signal voltage the vertical axis as it varies over time the horizontal axis XY This format displays a the data of one channel versus another on the two axes of the display XY the data is triggerable and the individual X and Y waveform records are available This mode is particularly useful for studying phase relationships When you set the VERTICAL POSITION and Vertical Offset to center the display in YT mode the XY display is at center screen and each division of display in YT mode produces a division of display in XY mode When you choose the XY format channels are assigned to the axis and displayed as part of an XY pair If only one source in an XY pair is displayed the instrument automatically turns on the other source to complete the XY pair Moreover once XY is on selecting either source in a pair turns the pair on turning either waveform of a pair off removes both sources from the display XY format is a dot only display although it can have persistence Vector style is not available for XY format In display XY histograms measurements math cursors zoom and waveform database are not allowed The HORIZONTAL controls still control the timebase sample rate and so forth but the changes are not reflected in the horizontal axis as in YT display format because the Y axis is di
90. the mask touch the Alignment Autoset Setup s and the signal6 button Display Alignment Autoset Autofit Contig Config Contig Lock Mask Hit to Wim Count The signal is aligned with the mask If you need to minimize the number of mask hits on each acquisition touch Autofit This display assumes that the autoset undo preference is off or that you touch Close to close the Autoset Undo control window Mase Op leerence PasstalGeip 7 Fasu al Kesit Type ANSI T1 102 1993 R1999 Display Alignment Fib 3 Chan Lles EE Ea mo wa aay oom E E nc mg Eg Select the 8 In this example we are using the default source Ch 1 Source Tolerance source Source ch Math Fer Channel fez 4 Change the 9 Set the Mask Margin Tolerance to the percentage of margin ce Tolerance tolerance used in the mask test this example uses the default OFF AES m OFF to test the signal to the selected mask ES standard Margins On with greater than 0 to expand the size of the mE mask segments making the test harder to pass ma ES On with less than 0 to reduce the size of the mask segments making the test easier to pass C 24 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Creating a new mask cont Control elements and resources Setup pass fail 10 Select the pass fail test controls this example uses the de
91. the mask to reflect changes in the horizontal or vertical settings of the instrument This control is also on the main mask setup window In the Masks tab touch the Autoset button to have the instrument automatically adjust instrument settings to align the waveform to the mask based on the characteristics of the input signal Autoset is done on the first waveform acquired after touching the Autoset button If the Autoset Undo preference is On the instrument will display an Autoset Undo window Touch the Undo button to return to the previous settings or touch the Close button to remove the window The Autoset Config button opens a configuration window that lets you set the vertical horizontal and trigger autoset parameters activate autofit or autoset choose the autoset mode return to the default autoset configuration or return to the Mask Setup control window Related control elements and resources Source Tolerance ANSI X 3 230 1999 NCITS1235D Rev11 FC2126 Optical 2 125 Gb s None FC133 Optical 132 8 Mb s FC266 Optical 265 62 Mb s FC531 Optical 531 25 Mb s FC1063 Optical 1 0625 Ghis FC1063 Optical Draft Rey 11 FC2125 Opt Autofit Mask display configuration Lock Mask to Waveform Highlight Hits Config Config Autofit Mask Autoset configuration Vertical Horizontal Trigger Autorit Autoset Scale Seale Level Once Position Defaults Positio
92. then adjust the Horizontal Scale To quickly rescale a portion of a channel waveform so that it expands to fill the 10 divisions on screen touch and drag across the segment of the waveform that you want to see in greater detail Then select Zoom 1 On Zoom 2 On Zoom 3 On or Zoom 4 On from the list to magnify the highlighted waveform segment Note The instrument displays the box enclosed area on the waveform magnified in the graticule Both vertical and horizontal zoom functions are available Zoomed waveforms can be aligned locked and automatically scrolled See Setting MultiView Zoom Controls on page 3 105 for more information The next procedure describes setting up and controlling MultiView Zoom Related control elements and resources Horizontal reference z 1 1 f i l g Pesiton 522 Factor 2 Zoom 20n Zoom 30n Zoom 40n Histogram Vertical Histogram Horizontal idiv 125GSis 200ps pl HEE 40 0mv Measurement Gating Zoom off Cancel See Setting MultiView Zoom Controls on page 3 105 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Setting MultiView Zoom Controls Using with Waveforms To Zoom Waveforms Overview Prerequisites To zoom waveforms 1 The instrument must be installed and operating Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls and triggering set up The instrument can expand or
93. time sampling rate TDS6804B 12 GHz bandwidth and 40 GS s real time sampling rate TDS6124C 15 GHz bandwidth and 40 GS s real time sampling rate TDS6154C Enhanced Bandwidth capability that when enabled applies Digital Signal Process DSP filters that can extend the bandwidth and flatten the bandpass Enhanced Bandwidth has three components magnitude correction through the bandpass phase linearity correction through the bandpass and bandwidth extension on some models Record lengths up to 64 000 000 samples depending on model and option Up to 2 0 DC vertical gain accuracy Four input channels each with 8 bit resolution auxiliary trigger input and output Sample envelope peak detect high resolution waveform database and average acquisition modes TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 1 Product Description Product Software 1 2 m Full programmability with an extensive GPIB command set and a message based interface m Trigger types for both A and B Event amp Delayed B Event include Edge Glitch Runt Width Transition Time Timeout Pattern State Setup Hold and Window All except Edge Pattern and State can be Logic State qualified by up to two channels Trigger sensitivity is up to 4 divisions at 9 Hz Trigger jitter is as low as gt 1 1 ps RMS You can trigger on a glitch or runt of less than approximately 100 ps Powerful built in measurement capability including histograms automatic measureme
94. to adjust the zoom factor and position of the magnified waveform Note As you change the zoom factor or move the unmagnified waveform relative to the box the instrument alters the magnified display accordingly to include only the waveform portion within the box As you change the zoom factor or move the magnified waveform the instrument scales or moves the box relative to the unmagnified waveform so that the box encloses only the magnified portion of the waveform If multiple waveforms are displayed the zoom position for all waveforms is not 0 0 or zoom lock is not on the magnified display may not match what is shown enclosed in the zoom box To select the waveform that you want to change select the channel Ch Math or reference Ref number for the waveform that you want to change or touch its level marker with the mouse or touch screen TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources MultiView Zoom 2a00Gn 400psipt 40 0mV 25G f 3 107 Displaying Waveforms Overview To zoom waveforms Cont Control elements and resources Set up 6 To display the Zoom setup window touch Setup in the MultiView controls window Select the tab for the zoomed Toon Zoom2 Zoom waveform area that you want to set up Zoomi Moiznta venen Erg Position Position m magle SAR Position Note To reduce the Zoom setup window to the cont
95. to predefined values for dBm see next step Note You can adjust the scale and position by first touching the waveform handle and then using the multipurpose knobs to adjust the scale and position To set the reference level touch Level and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the reference level Note Reference level is the value at the top of the display screen It only applies to magnitude waveforms Adjusting the reference level positions the waveform with respect to the top of the display but does not change the position of the waveform with respect to its ground reference To set the reference level offset touch Level Offset and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the offset Note Offset determines where zero dB is in the output waveform Changing offset moves the waveform with respect to its ground reference When the input is equal to the offset it will display as zero dB in the output TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Reference Level 20 048 Level Offset 223 6mV Reference Level k G Level Offset 223 6mY m Reference Level am Level Offset G EE 3 187 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a spectral math waveform Cont Set the phase 13 Select the Phase tab 3 188 scale 14 15 16 To select the vertical scale factor touch Degre
96. using serial pattern triggering to trigger on your serial pattern data signals see Appendix C in the User Manual NOTE The instrument will attempt to acquire lock once If the input data is disrupted removed or heavily distorted the instrument may not acquire lock or may lose lock If the recovered clock is not locked to the incoming data the waveform display will not be stable Once the input data is available press the PUSH SET TO 50 knob to force the instrument to reacquire lock TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 95 Triggering 3 96 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual y Displaying Waveforms This instrument includes a flexible customizable display that you can control to display the waveforms that you acquire Acquisition system Display Waveform transform system Horizontal timebase TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 97 Displaying Waveforms Using the Waveform Display 3 98 4 Horizontal reference The waveform shown below is displayed as part of the User Interface UT application The UI application takes up the entire screen of the instrument and the graticule takes up most of the UI application Some terms that are useful in discussing the following example display File Edit Vertical Horiz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math App Utilities Help Buttons Tek Run 03 Feb 05 13 40 33 Sample Hee Position 50 0
97. you want to trigger Push the ADVANCED button and select the Mode tab If you have already set up E mail on Event touch the E mail on Trigger button to send e mail on a trigger event based on your setup You use this button to toggle E mail on Trigger off If you have not yet set up E mail on Event touch Setup under E mail on Trigger to open the E mail on Event Control Window Control elements and resources INTENSITY l STOP TRIGGER gt A gt B Event Mode Trigger Mode E mail on Trigger TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To E mail on trigger Additional trigger parameters Cont Control elements and resources Check Send E mail on Trigger Event in the window and set the e mail parameters as you want them For assistance touch Help on the toolbar to display help on the E mail on Event Control Window After configuring the e mail return to the Trigger Mode window and set E mail on Trigger button On whenever you want to send e mail on a trigger event based on your E mail on Event setup Note E mail on Trigger will switch to Off automatically when the Message Limit number of messages that you have configured have been sent Advanced Triggering This subsection describes the advanced trigger types of this instrument which support triggering on a variety of signals m Advance trigger types support pulse capture with
98. 00 Trigger time of the reference frame Time difference between the reference and selected frames C E E Ka zon n 400usidiv 125kS s 8 Ops pl BE 40 0mv Figure 3 15 FastFrame time stamp TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 41 Acquiring Waveforms 3 42 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual ee y Triggering To properly acquire data that is to use the instrument to sample a signal and digitize it into a waveform record that you want to measure or otherwise process you need to set up the trigger conditions This section provides background on and the procedures for using the basic elements of triggering source holdoff mode and so on This section covers the following topics m The Pinpoint Triggering System which provides a brief description of the instrument triggering system m Triggering Concepts which describes some basic principles of triggering and the following trigger elements type source coupling holdoff mode and so on m Triggering from the Front Panel which describes how to use the front panel triggering controls each of which is common to most of the trigger types the instrument provides m Additional Trigger Parameters which describes how to access common trigger functions in the Trigger control window m Advanced Triggering which describes trigger types that you can use to isolate specific signal phenomena m Sequential Trig
99. 000 ext To Save Your Setup Use the procedure that follows to save a setup to one of ten internal locations the instrument hard disk a CD RW drive USB 2 0 memory device or third party storage device Overview To save your setup Control elements and resources _ Prerequisites The instrument must be powered up 2 Setup the instrument controls as you want them saved as part of a recallable setup For help in making your setup check the references at right and other sections in this chapter specific to the setup you wish to make m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 m See page 3 24 for acquisition setup m See page 3 43 for trigger setup TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 201 Data Input Output Overview Display the 3 setups control window Save the setup 4 Name your 5 setup To save to a file 6 3 202 To save your setup Cont From the toolbar touch Setups and select the Save Setups tab of the Setups control window Touch the number of the setup in which you want to save your setup Data in the existing setup will be overwritten Name your setup file by either Accepting the name that appears in the name field Double clicking in the name field and using the keyboard window to enter a new name replacing the default file name Note You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name field Clicki
100. 00C Series User Manual 3 73 Triggering Triggering ona Window Use this procedure to trigger the instrument when the input signal enters or leaves a window set by an upper or lower threshold level Overview To trigger on a window threshold violation Control elements and resources Select window 1 Push the front panel ADVANCED button p NGOER triggering ae A Event If A gt B Seq j E Event Mode AWindow Acquire 2 On the Trigger Setup control window select the A Event Source Window Trigger Window Event Ea i Y Enter window Window Y as Upper Level Select eow tab and touch Select 3 Touch Window Lower Level 600 0mV Select the 4 To specify which channel becomes the trigger source Source Window Trigger Window Event source touch Source and select the source from the list OHIERY Ener TION Che Ch3 Cha Lower Level 600 0mv Set the 5 The upper and lower threshold levels define the voltage source Window mios Window Event thresholds limits of the window To set the threshold levels touch 7 a Upper Level or Lower Level and use the multipurpose S knobs or pop up keypad to set the values Lower Level 3 74 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger on a window threshold violation Control elements and resources Qualify window 6 To qualify the window trigger select from these Trigger trigger drop down list combinations Note that the Trigger con
101. 0mH2 T Res BW 25 0mHz Center Freq 6 C3 Freq Span Res BW 25 0mHz Center Freq a12 5mH2 Freq Span a25 0mez t Res BW Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a spectral math waveform Cont Set the time Time domain controls of the spectral analyzer determine the domain controls sample rate and record length of the acquisition Front panel controls also affect the sample rate and record length but not in the same way These controls allow you to change the duration on the acquisition without changing the sample rate This allows you to control the acquisition in a way that is analogous to the frequency domain span and center frequency controls in a spectral analyzer 23 From the Spectral Analysis Setup menu touch Resolution and adjust the time interval between data samples of the input waveform Note Resolution is the inverse of Sample rate Adjust resolution to adjust sample rate Resolution will also cause a change in record length such that the duration is kept constant at the value selected by the Duration control 24 To adjust the number of seconds over the duration of the acquired waveform record length touch Duration and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to adjust the duration Note Changing duration also changes the record length 25 To set the gate position touch Gate Pos and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to adjust the gate position
102. 18 To allow changing time and frequency domain controls for one math waveform to change the same controls for another math waveform touch the Track Time Freq Domain Controls buttons to toggle them on or off 19 To select the window type touch Window Type and select from the list See Using Windows to Filter on page 3 170 for a description of the available FFT windows Rectangular Best type of window for resolving frequencies that are very close to the same value Best type for measuring the frequency spectrum of nonrepetitive signals and measuring frequency components near DC Hamming Hanning Blackman Harris Kaiser Bessel and Flattop2 These window are based on cosine series Each has a different RBW and spectral leakage characteristics Use the window which best highlights the features you want to observe in the spectrum Gaussian Best localization in both time and frequency Tek Exponential Best for impulse testing It sets the zero phase reference to the 20 position in the time record allowing the test to use more of the instrument record length The bullet Choice of a window on page 3 171 provides in depth information on choosing the right window for your application TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Create Mag Phase Go Track Time Frequency Domain Controls Mahi Math2 Math Math Window Type Gaussian Y Rectangular
103. 25 Optical Draft Rev 11 2 125 Gb s Table C 33 Fibre Channel Electrical masks FC266E Elec 265 6 Mb s FC1063E Norm Delta Transm FC1063E Abs Gamma Transm FC2125E Norm Beta Transm FC2125E Abs Delta Transm FC2125E Abs Gamma Recv FC4250E Abs Delta Transm FC4250E Norm Delta Transm 0C1 STMO OC3 STM1 0C12 STM4 0C48 STM16 51 84 Mb s 155 52 Mb s 622 08 Mb s 2 4883 Gb s FC531 Optical 531 2 Mb s FC531E Elec 531 2 Mb s FC1063E Norm Gamma Transm FC1063E Abs Beta Recv FC2125E Norm Delta Transm FC2125E Abs Gamma Transm FC4250E Abs Beta Recv FC4250E Abs Gamma Recv FC4250E Norm Gamma Transm TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 34 InfiniBand masks 2 5 Optical 2 5 Gb s 2 5 Electrical 2 5 Gb s None Table C 35 Serial ATA masks G1 Tx 1 5 Gb s G1 Rx 1 5 Gb s G2 Rx 3 0 Gb s None G2 Tx 3 0 Gb s Table C 36 USB 1 1 2 0 masks None HS T3 480 Mb s Table C 37 1394b masks None 800b T1 983 0 Mb s 1600b T2 1 966 Gb s Table C 38 Rapid IO LP LVDS masks None Drv 1 5 Gb s Ext Drv 1 0 Gb s Rev 750 Mb s 400b T1 491 5 Mb s 800b T2 983 0 Mb s 1600 Optical 1 966 Gb s Drv 500 Mb s Drv 2 0 Gb s Ext Drv 1 5 Gb s Rev 1 0 Gb s Table C 39 Rapid IO Serial masks None TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 400b T2 4
104. 3 25 Reset all B 9 Reset histogram counting 3 137 Reset histograms B 12 Reset statistics B 12 Reset zoom factors zoom menu 3 109 Resolution 3 15 3 161 B 6 Resolution bandwidth 3 164 3 190 Restore help B 16 Right click map 2 11 Rise time A 3 B 12 Glossary 14 Rising edge A Trigger control window 3 80 3 82 RMS A 3 B 11 Glossary 14 Roll mode auto B 6 illustrated 3 22 untriggered 3 22 untriggered with single sequence 3 22 using 3 27 Run application B 2 RUN STOP 3 24 3 36 Run stop B 6 B 8 Run Stop button only 3 21 Runt setup B 8 Runt trigger 3 60 B 7 Glossary 14 A Trigger control window 3 67 how to set up 3 67 3 96 how to setup 3 84 S S N Ratio C 41 C 51 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual S N ratio A 5 B 12 Sample 3 18 3 24 Sample acquisition mode Glossary 14 Sample interval 3 15 Glossary 14 defined 3 30 Samples number of 3 21 Sampling 3 31 Glossary 14 modes B 6 process defined 3 29 process illustrated 3 29 3 34 Sampling and acquisition mode 3 31 Save format export 3 214 Save waveform B 1 Saving a setup 3 199 Saving a waveform 3 205 Scale 3 101 horizontal B 6 vertical 3 151 B 1 B 4 Scaling and positioning 3 4 Screen B 11 Screen text 3 111 B 9 Glossary 14 Second monitor setup 1 14 Select for copy B 3 Select for export B 2 Select input coupling 3 6 Select slope 3 71 Select the input signal channel 3 6 Select waveform interpolati
105. 3 56 to select the trigger mode 3 52 to select the trigger slope 3 50 to select the trigger source 3 51 to select the trigger type 3 50 to set holdoff 3 55 to set level 3 50 to set mode and holdoff 3 66 3 69 3 70 3 73 3 77 3 79 3 81 3 83 to set the trigger coupling 3 52 to set thresholds 3 78 3 85 to set to 50 3 51 to set trigger when 3 78 to set up B Triggering 3 93 to single trigger 3 58 to trigger based on transition time 3 71 to trigger on A Main only 3 91 to trigger on a glitch 3 65 to trigger on a pattern 3 78 to trigger on a runt pulse 3 67 to trigger on a state 3 80 to trigger on B After Time 3 91 to trigger on B Events 3 92 to trigger on setup hold time violations 3 81 transition trigger 3 61 trigger and horizontal delay summary 3 90 Index 21 Index trigger based on pulse timeout 3 76 trigger based on pulse width 3 69 trigger coupling 3 47 trigger holdoff 3 46 trigger location and level from display 3 54 trigger modes 3 46 trigger on a pattern 3 77 Trigger on a window 3 74 trigger sources 3 45 3 86 trigger status from acquisition readout 3 53 trigger status from trigger status lights 3 53 trigger types 3 45 3 86 triggering concepts 3 44 triggering from the front panel 3 49 triggering with horizontal delay off 3 86 triggering with horizontal delay on 3 88 triggering with Reset 3 89 using sequential triggering 3 86 widt
106. 3 61 Triggering Table 3 2 Pattern and state logic AND Clocked AND If all the preconditions selected for the s logic inputs are TRUE then the instrument triggers NAND Clocked NAND If not all of the preconditions selected for the logic inputs are TRUE then the instrument triggers OR Clocked OR If any of the preconditions selected for the logic inputs are TRUE then the instrument triggers gt NOR Clocked NOR If none of the preconditions selected for the logic inputs are TRUE then the instrument triggers 7 1 For state triggers the definition must be met at the time the clock input changes state 2 The definitions given here are correct for the Goes TRUE setting in the Trigger When menu If that menu is set to Goes False swap the definition for AND with that for NAND and for OR with NOR for both pattern and state types 3 The logic inputs are channels 1 2 3 and 4 when using Pattern triggers For State triggers channel 4 becomes the clock input leaving the remaining channels as logic inputs State Trigger A state trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function cause the function to be TRUE or at your option FALSE at the time the clock input changes state When you use a state trigger you define m The precondition for each logic input channels 1 2 and 3 m The direction of the state change for the clock input channel 4 m The Boolean logic function
107. 4 Off Measurement Gating control window you use to define the portion of the waveform you want your measurements taken between Reset Histograms Resets histogram counting Enables a horizontal histogram Enables a vertical histogram Turns off histograms Displays the Waveform Histogram setup window you use to set histograms on your waveforms TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 8 Measure menu commands Cont Annotation Submenu Standard Detailed Off Meas 1 Meas 2 Meas 3 Meas 4 Meas 5 Meas 6 Meas 7 Meas 8 Masks Commands Function Allows you to select the type of measurement annotations turn measurement annotations off or to select the measurement that you want to annotate Table B 9 lists the commands available from the Masks menu optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series on the menu bar Table B 9 Masks menu commands Menu Mask Setup Mask Type Source Tolerance Setup Pass Fail Setup Pass Fail Results Mask On Mask Controls Mask Configure Mask Edit Setup Mask Edit Controls TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Submenu Display AutoSet Autofit Function Displays the Mask Setup window that you use to create mask waveforms Displays the Type tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to select the type of mask Displays the Source tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to select the source of mask Disp
108. 6 configuration B 15 remote communication 3 233 Graticule 3 98 B 2 B 3 Glossary 6 100 zoom B 7 50 50 zoom B 7 80 20 zoom B 7 area 3 98 measurements 3 119 size button 3 101 split 3 108 style 3 111 3 116 B 9 zoom B 7 Graticules 3 101 Grid graticule 3 116 B 9 Ground coupling Glossary 7 GroupDelay 3 188 H Hamming window 3 170 3 172 3 176 3 189 Hanning window 3 170 3 172 3 177 3 189 Hardcopy Glossary 7 Hardcopy formats 3 229 H bars B 11 Help how to get 3 10 on window B 16 Help menu B 16 about TekScope B 16 contents and index B 16 customer feedback B 16 help on window B 16 restore help B 16 technical support B 16 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Hi Res 3 18 acquisition mode Glossary 7 High A 1 Glossary 7 High level B 11 High low method 3 121 Histogram 3 127 limit controls 3 139 mean 3 127 measurements B 12 setup window 3 137 Histogram counting resetting 3 137 starting 3 137 Histograms 3 36 3 136 3 144 Hits in box A 3 B 12 Holdoff B 8 A Trigger 3 55 trigger 3 46 Holdoff trigger Glossary 7 Horiz B 12 Horiz acq run stop B 6 Horiz acq menu acquisition mode B 6 autoset B 5 delay mode on B 6 equivalent time B 6 FastFrame controls B 6 FastFrame setup B 6 horizontal acquisition setup B 5 interpolated real time B 6 position scale B 6 real time only B 6 resolution B 6 roll mode auto B 6 sampling modes B 6 zoom controls B 5
109. 6 17 Pass Fail Test Test Summary Chi Y Status Passed Total Hits 0 Failed Wfms 0 Setup Figure 3 37 Pass Fail mask testing For detailed information on using Serial Mask Testing to test your signals for compliance to electrical standards see the TDS6000B Option SM Serial Mask Testing and Option ST Serial Triggering User Manual TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Once you have acquired waveforms or taken measurements on waveforms the instrument can mathematically combine them to create a waveform that supports your data analysis task For example you might have a waveform obscured by background noise You can obtain a cleaner waveform by subtracting the background noise from your original waveform note that the background noise you subtract must be identical to the noise in your signal Or you can integrate a single waveform into an integral math waveform as shown below Source waveform 1 Math waveform 1 With spectral analysis you can analyze waveforms in the frequency domain The interface is similar to a dedicated spectrum analyzer relieving you of the burden of knowing the details of the underlying algorithms see Figure 3 38 S i Curst Pos i i 72 5MHz Normal waveform of an gt mn impulse response Gata Mie Mane v Center Freq FFT waveform of the gt Hpt Fi p 7 Freq Span magnitude
110. 90 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering To Trigger ona Sequence Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to trigger on a sequence For more information display online help while performing the procedure Overview To trigger on a sequence Control elements and resources _ Prerequisites The instrument must be installed with a signal connected to an input channel Acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired h To trigger on From the toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq a main only tab of the Trigger control window 2 Touch A Only to turn off sequential triggering To trigger on To set the time base to run after an A trigger a trigger B after time delay and a B trigger from the toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq tab of the Trigger control window 2 Touch Trig After Time 3 To set the trigger delay touch Trig Delay and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the time 4 If using B Edge trigger type set the B trigger level by touching B Trig Level and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the level 5 If using any other trigger type see To set up B triggering on page 3 93 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 91 Triggering Overview To trigger on 3 92 B events To trigger on a sequence Cont
111. 91 5 Mb s 8006 Optical 983 0 Mb s Drv 750 Mb s Ext Drv 500 Mb s Ext Drv 2 0 Gb s Rev 1 5 Gb s RIO Serial RIO Serial 1 25 Gb s 2 5 Gb s FS 12 Mb s HS T1 480 Mb s HS T2 480 Mb s HS T4 480 Mb s HS T5 480 Mb s HS T6 480 Mb s 4006 Optical 491 5 Mb s 1600b T1 1 966 Gb s Drv 1 0 Gb s Ext Drv 750 Mb s Rev 500 Mb s Rev 2 0 Gb s RIO Serial 3 125 Gb s C 47 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 48 Table C 40 IOF masks None SFI SPI 5 TC Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TC Clock 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Clock 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Data 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Data 3 125 Gb s VSR 0C192 STM64 1 24416 Gb s Table C 41 PCI Express masks None Table C 42 SAS masks None SAS IR AASJ 1 5 Gb s SAS IR 3 0 Gb s SAS CR AASJ 3 0 Gb s SAS IR 1 5 Gb s SAS CR AASJ 1 5 Gb s SAS CR 3 0 Gb s SAS XR AASJ 3 0 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TC Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TC Data 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Data 3 125 Gb s TFI 5 2 488 Gb s PCI Express Transm PCI Express Recv 2 5 Gb s 2 5 Gb s SAS CR 1 5 Gb s SAS XR AASJ 1 5 Gb s SAS XR 3 0 Gb s SAS SATA 3 0 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Clock 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Clock 3 125 G
112. B 15 Interpolated real time B 6 Interpolation 3 32 3 112 3 113 B 9 Glossary 8 Introduction to this manual xv J Jitter 6 sigma A 4 B 12 Index 10 pk pk B 12 pk pk measurement A 4 RMS A 4 rms B 12 Jitter 6 sigma C 41 C 51 Jitter Pk Pk measurement C 41 C 51 Jitter RMS C 41 C 51 JPEG file format 3 214 K Kaiser Bessel window 3 170 3 172 3 177 Key features C 2 Knob Glossary 8 multipurpose 3 133 Glossary 10 resolution Glossary 8 trigger MAIN LEVEL 3 48 L Label B 1 B 4 B 14 Label the waveform 3 207 LAN enabling 1 13 LAN connection 1 13 Level A Trigger control window 3 66 3 70 3 77 trigger 3 48 Level presets 3 56 A Trigger 3 57 Line trigger input 3 45 3 51 Linear 3 114 B 9 Linear interpolation 3 33 3 113 Glossary 8 Logic pattern setup B 8 Logic pattern trigger B 7 Logic qualified trigger 3 84 Logic state setup B 8 Logic state trigger B 7 Logic trigger 3 62 definitions 3 62 pattern Glossary 9 state 3 61 3 62 Glossary 9 Logic triggering 3 59 Logic A Trigger control window 3 80 3 81 logic 3 78 pulse 3 65 Logic main trigger menu pulse 3 71 3 76 Low A 2 Glossary 9 Low frequency compensation 3 142 Low level B 11 Low method 3 121 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index Magnitude spectrum B 14 Magnitude verses frequency 3 160 Main trigger menu polarity 3 67 3 69 pulse 3 71 3 76 Set to 50 3 51 slope 3 71 state
113. C 8 Fibre Channel masks cccceccecsccsceees C 36 Table C 9 Fibre Channel Electrical masks 06 C 36 Table C 10 InfiniBand masks cece cece cece eee nees C 37 Table C 11 Serial ATA masks 0 ccc eee cece eee eee C 37 Table C 12 USB 1 1 2 0 masks ccc cece cece eee cceceees C 37 Table G 13 1394 masks 950226 is iereis eee nie heen oO wie a s eel eae dera le C 37 Table C 14 Rapid IO LP LVDS masks ceceeeeeeee C 37 Table C 15 Rapid IO Serial masks ce eee eeeee C 37 Table C 16 IOF masks cece cece cece cece cent eens C 38 Table C 17 PCI Express masks ccc ceeeececcecevees C 38 Table C 18 SAS masks ccc cece eee e cece cece ee eeeee C 38 Table C 19 AMI trigger standards cee cee eee eeeee C 39 Table C 20 B3ZS trigger standards c eee e cece eeeee C 39 Table C 21 B6ZS trigger standards cee ee eee e wees C 39 Table C 22 B8ZS trigger standards ccc e cece eeeee C 39 Table C 23 CMI trigger standards c cee ceeeeceeees C 39 Table C 24 HDB3 trigger standards ec cece ee eeeee C 40 Table C 25 MLT3 trigger standards ec cece eeeeeee C 40 Table C 26 NRZ trigger standards c cece cece ee eeece C 40 Table C 27 Supported communications measurements and their definition sess eor wv he ss iw Red Wee ea Wee ees ee ON C 41 Table C 28 ITU T masks ce ccc ccc ccc
114. Continue Reboot your instrument to enable the new option s Attach the option configuration label s on the rear panel of the instrument to indicate that the option s is installed on this instrument TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 3 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Serial Mask Testing Functions Accessing Serial Mask Testing Functions Serial Mask Testing provides three sets of functions optical and electrical serial mask testing communications triggering and automatic communication signal measurements This section describes how to access these functions To access the Serial Mask Test functions touch the Masks tool bar button The instrument displays the Masks control window as shown in Figure C 1 Source Tolerance Pass Fail Setup PassiFail Results Type ANSI X3 230 1999 NCITS1235D Rev11 Display Alignment Fibre Channel Autoset Autofit FC2125 Optical 2 126 Gb s ANSIT1 102 Fibre Chan Elec f f Config Contig Contig Lock Mask Hit to Wim Count o M Figure C 1 Masks control window Table C 1 describes the Masks control window tab functions Refer to the Mask Testing beginning on page C 8 of this manual as well as the online help for more information about these functions Table C 1 Masks control window functions Tab Function Mask Set the mask type communications standard polarity mask on off and autofit autoset alignment parameters Source Set t
115. Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 168 To turn on a real or imaginary spectrum touch the Math button the Define Edit Expression Editor button and then select the Freq tab Touch either the Real or the Imag menu items to enter an expression Then touch the Ch tab and one of the channel buttons Touch apply Using the Phase Controls You can set the vertical units to degrees radians or seconds of group delay You select these choices by touching the Math button the Spectral Analysis Setup button and then selecting the Phase tab Select the desired scale type from Degrees Radians or Group Delay Phase Reference Position Phase is a relative measurement that must have a time domain reference point The phase value is specified with respect to this phase reference position For the spectral analyzer the phase reference position is the 50 position of the gate that is the middle of the gate interval of the data that is input to the spectral analyzer This is true for all window functions except for the Tek Exponential window This window has the reference point at the 20 position of the gate Phase Unwrap The spectral analyzer produces phase values from z to m radians or 180 to 180 degrees However when you perform impulse response testing and the phase is continuous then phase values outside these ranges may occur The spectral analyzer then wraps the data with disconti nuities in the display from 180 to 180 degrees Pha
116. Display Disp Access Entry Graticule Style Objects Display Persistence Appearance Display Style Appearance Screen Text Screen Text Colors Colors Colors Colors Colors Colors TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Options Choose from Full Grid Cross hair and Frame styles Choose from No Persistence Off Infinite Persistence and Variable Persistence Modes Reset the persistence display Set the Variable Persistence time Display the persistence control window Choose Dots to display each waveform as a series of dots Choose Vectors to display vectors or lines between the dots Choose Intensified Samples to display actual samples as bright dots Enter text that you can display and position on screen Also see Label the waveform on page 3 207 Choose Normal to use system colors for best viewing Choose Green to display variable persistence waveforms in shades of green Choose Gray to display variable persistence waveforms in shades of gray Choose Temp temperature to display variable persistence waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in warmer colors reds Choose Spectral to display variable persistence waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in blue shades Choose User to use custom palette colors for the selected source Choose User Palette Edit to display the window in which you can set custom hue lightness and saturation
117. Exporting waveforms 3 213 Ext ratio B 12 Ext ratio dB B 12 Ext ratio B 12 External reference B 15 External signals B 15 Extinction Ratio C 41 C 51 Extinction ratio A 4 Extinction Ratio C 41 C 51 Extinction ratio A 4 Extinction Ratio DB C 41 C 51 Extinction ratio dB A 4 Eye base A 4 diagram A 6 height A 4 top A 4 width A 4 Eye Base C 41 C 51 Eye base B 12 Eye Height C 41 C 51 Eye height B 12 Eye Top C 41 C 51 Eye top B 12 Eye Width C 41 C 51 Eye width B 12 F Fall time A 1 B 12 Glossary 6 Falling edge A Trigger control window 3 80 3 82 FALSE A Trigger control window 3 78 3 81 Fast acquisition to select the format 3 34 to set display format 3 33 to set the display readout options 3 117 Fast Fourier transforms description 3 160 FastFrame 3 35 3 121 3 147 controls B 6 FastFrame time stamp illustrated 3 41 interactions 3 36 RUN STOP 3 36 select the FastFrame and time stamps selection controls 3 40 select the frame to view 3 38 select the reference frame 3 40 set frame count 3 37 set frame length 3 37 setup B 6 time stamping frames 3 39 Index 8 to lock the reference position frames 3 41 to set FastFrame mode 3 37 turn readouts on or off time stamps 3 39 using FastFrame acquisitions 3 36 view multiple frames 3 38 FastFrame mode using 3 37 FastFrame setup horizontal menu 3 37 3 41 FFT math waveform automated measurem
118. Mag or Phase to select a predefined magnitude or phase spectral analysis waveform Selecting a predefined spectral waveform turns on display of the waveform See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Define a Spectral Math Waveform Overview Prerequisites Display the math control window Select spectral analysis setup Select a spectral waveform Use the procedure that follows when defining a spectral math waveform Remember to ensure that the sources you use exist Channel sources must be acquiring or have acquired data These sources do not have to be displayed to be used To define a spectral math waveform 1 All channel and reference Waveforms and automatic measurement scalars that you will use in your math waveform must be available channels and references contain data measurement scalars are defined and so on From the toolbar touch the Math button to display the Define Math control window Touch Spectral Analysis Setup and then select the Create tab to display the Spectral Analysis Setup control window Touch Math x and select the math waveform that you want to create from the list Touch Magnitude to create a magnitude spectral waveform or touch Phase to create a phase spectral waveform Touch the channel number that contains input data for the spectral analyzer
119. Max High Histogram High reference Mid reference Low reference Low Histogram Low Min Max Figure A 1 Levels used to determine measurements TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual A 5 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported High The value used as the 100 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot High is also used to help derive the HighRef MidRef MidRef2 and LowRef values Low The value used as the 0 level in amplitude measurements such as Peak and Overshoot Low is also used to help derive the HighRef MidRef MidRef2 and LowRef values HighRef The waveform high reference level used in such measurements as fall time and rise time Typically set to 90 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 122 MidRef The waveform middle reference level used in such measurements as Period and Duty Cycle Typically set to 50 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 122 LowRef The waveform low reference level Used in fall and rise time calcula tions Typically set to 10 You can choose how this level is set see Reference Levels Method on page 3 122 Mid2Ref The middle reference level for a second waveform or the second middle reference of the same waveform Used in two waveform time measure ments such as the Delay and Phase measurements You can choose how this level is set see
120. S6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview Set vertical acquisition window Set horizontal acquisition window To set up signal input Cont 5 Use the vertical knobs to scale and position the waveform on screen Positioned vertically Scaled vertically 1h 1 gt Dragging the waveform J handle also positions the waveform 6 Touch Vert to display the Vertical control window To change the offset touch the Offset control and turn the multipurpose knob to adjust the offset 1 gt 7 Use horizontal knobs to scale and position the waveform on screen and to set record length Dragging the reference icon also positions the waveform Scaled horizontally Positioned horizontally The Resolution knob sets the record length See discussion on page 3 15 If required to stabilize the display push LEVEL to set the trigger level to 50 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources VERTICAL POSITION cH POSITION CHD POSITION CH3 POSITION A xzaRg zZ zZ SCALE a Sv SCALE a zZ SCALE SCALE Chan 3 Chan 4 aD Pos
121. Select the Data Destination channel Source data range Waveform Detail and Data Ordering used when exporting waveforms Measurements Select the Data Format and type of Measurements used when exporting measurements Full Screen bitmap Graticule bitmap Select from the list what you want to export to a file or use with other applications Waveform data Measurements data Exports the full screen graticule waveform or measurement to a file or other application Recalls loads a recent setup file menu name is replace by the names of setup files Minimizes the instrument application displaying the Windows desktop Shutdowns the instrument TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Edit Commands Table B 2 lists the commands available from the Edit menu on the menu bar Table B 2 Edit menu commands Menu Submenu Function Undo Last Autoset Undoes the last autoset Copy Copies the full screen graticule waveform or measurement to the clipboard for use with other applications Select for Copy Full Screen bitmap Select from the list what you want to copy to the clipboard Graticule bitmap Waveform data Measurement data Copy Setup Displays the Copy Setup window that you use to set up and copy images waveforms and measurements Images Select the Palette Color GrayScale or Black amp White View Full Screen or Graticules Only Image Normal or InkSaver Mode or
122. Serial Trigger controls C 32 To set the instrument to trigger on a user defined serial data stream do the Related control elements and resources AB Seq BEV Adge gt Acquire Source Edge Trigger Coupling ger Type ci Y mpm 7 j Level 7 Salt axm af Set 50 Siopa B nnm Force Trigger mey a B Event Mode ASerial Acquire Clk Src Data Src Standard Serial Pattern Dataltevel Roxy chiv Sa jf 224 0mV Coding Bit Rate R cik NNI NRZ 155 5Mb s Serial Pattern Isb FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFF Editor Format Hex TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview source Select serial 5 trigger coding and standard Select clock 8 source polarity and level y View the current serial trigger pattern TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 4 Gad 0 Serial trigger setup cont Related control elements and resources Select data 3 Touch the Data Src button to select the serial data source Select from channel 1 through channel 4 Clk Src Data Src Chi Touch the Data Level field and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the serial data stream data threshold level Serial Pattern Data Level ay 277ml The Coding button always shows NRZ code type Data Src Chi Coding NRZ Standard OC3 STM1 YF Bit Rate 155 5Mb s Touch the Standard button and select the appropr
123. Slope The direction at a point on a waveform You can calculate the direction by computing the sign of the ratio of change in the vertical quantity Y to the change in the horizontal quantity The two values are rising and falling Statistical Measurement An automated measurement that is derived from color graded waveform data and is based on histograms computed at the crossing levels A statistical measurement can be selected only in color graded display mode Tek Secure This feature erases all waveform and setup memory locations setup memories are replaced with the factory setup Then it checks each location to verify erasure This feature finds use where this instrument is used to gather security sensitive data such as is done for research or development projects TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 15 Glossary Glossary 16 Time base The set of parameters that let you define the time and horizontal axis attributes of a waveform record The time base determines when and how long to acquire record points Timeout trigger A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the instrument does NOT find a pulse of the specified polarity and level within the specified time period Trace The visible representation of an input signal or combination of signals Identical to waveform Trace Expression The definition of what the trace displays It can include one or more channels combined arithmetically and modified by
124. TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Saving a User Mask to To save a mask to a folder on the instrument disk do the following procedure Disk Overview Saving a user mask to disk Control elements and resources Access the 1 From the button bar touch Masks and select the Masks tab Mask Setup window Touch the User Mask button Mask Edit control window Save the user 4 Touch the Mask Save button mask to disk The instrument opens the Save Mask As dialog The default save location is in the TekScope Masks folder 5 Enter the mask name in the File Name field The default save type is User Mask Files msk 6 Touch Save to save the mask to disk TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Touch the Edit User Mask button The instrument displays the Mask Elements Mask Values Segment Horizontal As Vertical Save in Masks Sd Pa a Ev Examples a coax 1 msk mymask Lmsk E s L File name HARE E Save astype User Mask Files msk pad Cancel F Autoincrementfile name Help C 19 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Recalling a User Mask From Disk Overview Access the 1 Mask Setup window Recall the user 4 mask from disk C 20 Recalling a user mask From the button bar touch Masks and select the Masks tab Touch the User Mask button Touch the Edit User Mask button
125. TDS6000C Series User Manual System Overview Maps Process Overview Map Process Overview Reset Abort Power on Power down Arm Implement setup Acquire pretrigger points Stop condition Trigger accepted Acquire posttrigger points Waveform record complete Waveform available TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Process Block Description 1 The instrument starts in the idle state it enters this state upon power up upon receiving most control setting changes or upon finishing acquisition tasks 2 Control settings are implemented as they are requested When you toggle the RUN STOP control to RUN the instrument starts the hardware 3 The instrument acquires samples until the pretrigger portion of the waveform record channel being acquired is filled 4 The instrument then begins waiting for a trigger Acquiring continues to take place keeping the pretrigger points current until triggering criteria are met or a trigger is forced Auto trigger mode only and the instrument accepts a trigger 5 The instrument acquires samples until the posttrigger portion of the waveform record channel being acquired is filled 6 If averaging enveloping or waveform database is on the record becomes part of the multi acquisition record that these modes produce The process loops back to step 3 above to acquire additional records until the number of acquisitions requ
126. The instrument remains in the serial pattern data editor window Touch the Cancel button to cancel any changes since the last Apply action and return to the serial pattern trigger control window Touch the OK button to apply the current serial pattern data to the serial trigger and return to the serial pattern trigger control window Supported Mask Types and Standards C 34 Related control elements and resources Editor Format msb Serial Pattern Isb Binay 1001 XX VX VX KK 20001 200020001 00X 200X 200X 20001 000 00K 0X XX01 So es x oe Format msb Serial Pattern Isb HeY DD F 0000 CBAE 0042 ea Ea Holo E E 2 Tables C 4 through C 17 list all supported mask types and standards NOTE The standards available for an instrument depend on the options bandwidth and configuration of that instrument TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 4 ITU T masks None 32Mb 97Mb DS1 Rate 32 064 Mb s 97 728 Mb s 1 544 Mb s DS2 Rate Sym DS2 Rate Coax DS3 Rate E1 Sym Pair 6 312 Mb s 6 312 Mb s 44 736 Mb s 2 048 Mb s E1 Coax Pair E2 E3 E4 Binary 0 2 048 Mb s 8 448 Mb s 34 368 Mb s 139 26 Mb s E4 Binary 1 STM1E STM1E 139 26 Mb s Binary 0 155 52 Mb s Binary 1 155 52 Mb s Table C 5 ANSI T1 102 masks None DS1 DS1A DS1C 1 544 Mb s 2 048 Mb s 3 152 Mb s DS2 DS3 DS4NA DS4NA 6 312 Mb s 44 736 Mb s 139 26 Mb s Max Output 139 26 Mb s
127. Time is divisions of displacement of the cursor from its source trigger point times the source time div 8us 2us Ops 3 472kHz Waveform cursors measure both voltage and time Each cursor is in effect both a vertical and horizontal cursor You can select the style of the cursors These waveform cursors cannot be moved off the waveform Note that Screen cursors are the same as waveform cursors except Curs1 Pos o 48s Curs2 Pos that the cursors can be moved off the waveform MAI vi 101V Ie V2 970 omv 1 98V 6 875kV s t1 136 8us t2 151 2us At 288 Ous WAt 3 472kHz TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Cursors can measure channel reference and math waveforms You must set the source of each cursor explicitly in the Cursor Setup control window Using Cursors Cursor operation is easy you move the cursors on screen and read the results in the cursor readouts The following key points will help you use the cursors effectively Cursor Types The cursor types are described in Table 3 6 on page 3 130 There are two cursors displayed for all types Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 You can move cursors with the multipurpose knobs or the cursor position controls in the Cursor Setup control window Curs1 Pos 40 0m y Curs2 Pos e 0 0 2 divisions at 20 mv div He 20 0mV 2 Figure 3 33 Horizontal cursors measure amplit
128. To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see the descriptions Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 When you select the type Setup Hold the instrument uses one channel as a data channel the factory default setting is Ch1 another channel as a clock channel default is Ch2 and triggers if the data transitions within the setup or hold time of the clock Setup Hold Trigger on page 3 62 describes how setup hold triggers work To use setup and hold triggering do the following procedures Control elements and resources A gt B Seq B Event Mode A Eveni Trigger Type SetupHold Y Soloct ASetupHold gt Acquire Setup Hold Trigger Setup Time Ck 1 0ns ok R Sach N Data Source Chi W Data Level iwy Hold Time 500 0ps Clock Source Ch2 v Clock Edge wa GY Clock Level 3 81 Triggering Overview Define the data source Define the clock Set the data and To set the transition levels that the clock and data must cross clock levels to be recognized by the instrument 3 82 source and edge To trigger on setup hold time violations Cont 3 To select the channel that is to contain the data signal touch Data Source and select the source from the list Note Do not select the same channel for both the data and clock sources 4 To select the channel that is to contain the clock signal and the edge to use to clock touch Clock Source and select the sour
129. Toggle on and off the display of the system date and time Set the date and time using the Set Time and Date setup window that is displayed The Menu Names refer to the menus found in the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the instrument screen TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Normal and Persistence Displays Use the display persistence to control how waveform data ages m Off style displays waveforms without persistence each new waveform record replaces the previously acquired record for a channel You can choose to display normal waveforms as vectors which displays lines between the record points or dots vectors off which displays the record points only You can also choose an interpolation mode See Interpolation on page 3 113 m Variable Persistence style accumulates the waveform record points on screen and displays them only for a specific time interval Previous waveform data continuously fades from the display as new waveform records acquire m Infinite Persistence style accumulates the data record points until you change some control such as scale factor causing the display to be erased Waveform data builds up as new data records acquire Persistence style is only available for live waveforms waveforms with data that is being updated reference waveforms are static and do not use persistence Math waveforms use persistence if their sources are live waveforms Interpolation When d
130. Touch Set time and date now to set the time and date Stree date now To get the 8 Touch Get Current Time to get the current time from the Get Current current time 3 232 Windows operating system Time TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Remote Communication Remote communication is performed through the GPIB interface Consult the online Programmer Guide for help with establishing remote communication and control of the instrument To access the Programmer Guide locate the Product Software CD that was shipped with the instrument Install the CD in the personal computer that you want to use typically your instrument controller Follow the directions in the CD booklet You can install the guide in the instrument but that may not be convenient because it will cover the instrument screen For information on connecting the instrument to a network to enable printing file sharing internet access and other communications functions see Connect ing to a Network on page 1 15 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 233 Data Input Output 3 234 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual MyScope Creating MyScope Control Windows Overview Select from menu TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual To create a new MyScope control window MyScope allows you to create custom control windows that include only the controls that you use regularly Instead of switchi
131. User Manual Tektronix TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Digital Storage Oscilloscopes 071 1658 02 This document applies to firmware version 1 0 and above www tektronix com Copyright Tektronix Inc All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supercedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc TekConnect MyScope and VocalLink are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc TekVISA FastFrame Pinpoint and MultiView Zoom are trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support m In North America call 1 800 833 9200 m Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Warranty 2 Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from the date of shipment If any such product proves defective during this warranty period Tektronix at its option either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor or will pro
132. XGA OUT IEEE s 488 PORT CEE TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual ee Ae Reference EES Acquiring Waveforms Before you can do anything display print measure analyze or otherwise process to a waveform you must acquire the signal This instrument comes equipped with the features that you need for capturing your waveforms before further processing them according to your requirements The following topics cover capturing signals and digitizing them into waveform records Signal Connection and Conditioning How to connect waveforms to the instrument channels how to scale and position the channels and timebase for acquiring waveforms m Setting Acquisition Controls How to choose the appropriate acquisition mode for acquiring your waveforms how to start and stop acquisition m Acquisition Control Background Background information on the data sampling and acquisition process m Using FastFrame Using FastFrame to capture many records in a larger record and then view and measure each record individually Storage Acquisition Channel Display inputs 7 system Waveform transform system P Trigger Horizontal Auxiliary O time base trigger input N7 17 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 1 Acquiring Waveforms NOTE This section describes how the vertical and horizontal controls define the acquisition of live waveforms These controls also define how a
133. a large screen instrument SCOPE ONLY 5 S lt p Lp display XGA OUT a oe O dip HHHHHHHHH GPIB IEEE STD 488 PORT o Pj Network ect etwor j 2A ONS AUX IN EXT REF IN REF OUT Figure 1 1 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 7 Installation Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information Item Monitor Printer Rackmount Other Powering On the Instrument Description If you use a nonstandard monitor you may need to change the Windows display settings to achieve the proper resolution for your monitor To set up a dual display see page 1 16 Connect the printer to the EPP enhanced parallel port connector directly If your printer has a DB 25 connector use the adapter cable that came with your printer to connect to the EPP connector For information on printer usage see Printing Waveforms on page 3 228 Refer to the Rackmount Installation Instructions for information on installing the rackmount kit Refer to the Readme file on the Product Software CD for possible additional accessory installation information not covered in this manual Follow these steps to power on the instrument for the first time power to the product N CAUTION Connect the keyboard mouse and other accessories before applying 1 8 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation Rear panel Front panel Tektronix
134. a lype Clock Y TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Communication triggering cont Related control elements and resources Select comm 4 Touch the Coding button and select the appropriate code type trigger coding for your signal from the list The code selected determines which Coding and standard standards are available as well as other parameters such as AM Y trigger threshold and pulse form Standard 5 Touch the Standard button and select the appropriate signal standard from the list The standard selected determines the bit E1 2i rate Bit Rate 2 048Mbis 6 The Bit Rate field shows the bit rate for the selected standard Touch the Bit Rate field and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the serial data stream bit rate for nonstandard Bit Rate amp bit rates 2 048M bs Note Changing the bit rate means the instrument is not triggering in accordance with the standard The Standard type changes to Custom when you change the bit rate value Select comm 7 Touch the Type button to select the signal type Select from trigger type Data Clock and R Clk recovered clock Recovered clock is only available for NRZ coded signals Data or clock sets the instrument to trigger on a data stream or clock signal on the input source respectively Refer to Recovered Clock R Clk Key Points on page C 31 for information on the Recovered Clock
135. a measurement or limit the measurement to a segment of the waveform By default the instrument takes each automatic measurement over the entire waveform record but you can use measurement gates and zoom to localize each measurement to a section of a waveform see To Localize a Measurement on page 3 128 Select Measurement Sources Select from these measurement sources channel reference and math waveforms Take Measurements on a Frame In FastFrame measurements are taken only on the displayed frame Using Automatic Read the following topics they provide the details that can help you set up Measurements automatic measurements so that they best support your data analysis tasks Measurement Selection The instrument takes automatic measurements of the following categories Amplitude Timing More Histogram and Comm optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Check Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported for a listing of the measurements that you can choose Number of Measurements The instrument can take and update up to eight measurements at one time You can apply measurements to any combination of sources described below You can take all eight measurements on Ch1 for example or you can take measurements on Ch1 Ch4 Math1 Math4 Ref1 Ref4 or a histogram Measurement Sources All channel reference and math waveforms can serve as sources for automatic measurements Some measurements such as delay and phase requir
136. a user mask to disk Recalling a user mask from disk Editing a user mask Creating a new user mask Mask testing key points general and optical TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Prerequisites Access the Mask Setup window Select a mask Mask Test Setup To set the instrument to perform mask tests do the following procedure test signal source Select the mask type To mask test a waveform Related control elements and resources _ Connect the instrument to the source signal or save the source signal to a math or reference waveform memory location From the button bar touch Masks The instrument displays the Mask control window Autoset Autofit contig Contig Config Lock Mask Hit to wim Count Select the Source tab and then the channel math or reference tab and then select the waveform source to use as the mask test source You can only mask test one waveform at a time Channel aA To specify the mask Type select the Masks tab Touch the appropriate button in the Type field Touch the More button to display further selections la Fibre Channel The window lists mask types and standards that are available on E your instrument which depends on the bandwidth options and PiRreR Chanel configuration of your instrument Selecting a mask type and standard adjusts the instrument horizontal vertical and trigge
137. able type from the Pattern type window See Table 3 2 on page 3 62 for definitions of the logic functions Touch the Help button while in the Trigger setup window to access a context sensitive overview of the Logic controls and their set up Sequential Triggering Control elements and resources Trigger if Glitch Trigger if Glitch Trigger if Glitch Loge V Pattern m In applications that involve two or more signals you may be able to use sequential triggering to capture more complex events Sequential triggering uses the A Main trigger to arm the trigger system and then uses the B Delayed trigger to trigger the instrument if a specific condition is met You can choose one of two trigger conditions TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 85 Triggering Using Sequential Triggering 3 86 m Trig After Time After the A trigger arms the trigger system the instrument triggers on the next B trigger event that occurs after the Trigger Delay Time You can set the trigger delay time with the keypad or the multipurpose knobs m Trigger on n Event After the A trigger arms the trigger system the instrument triggers on the nt B event You can set the number of B events with the keypad or the multipurpose knobs NOTE The traditional delayed trigger mode called Runs After is served by Horizontal Delay You can use horizontal delay to delay acquisition from any trigger event whether
138. ach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so on Histogram is the best setting for examining pulses See Figure 3 31 on page 3 122 m Histogram mean Calculates the mean value using all values either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Histogram mean is best for examining eye patterns signals 19 To select the reference level units touch Units Absolute or Percentage m Absolute Sets the units to absolute values in user units m Percentage Sets the units as a percentage of the High Low range 20 To set the reference levels touch HighRef Mid Ref Low Ref or Mid2 Ref and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the levels TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Reference High Ref 90 0 Mid Ret Percentage 50 0 Low Ret pira 3 127 Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements Cont Take a 21 From the Measurement setup control window touch the snapshot of measurements For further 23 assistance To Localize a Measurement Overview Prerequisites 3 128 22 24 Snapshot button Comm Snapshot button if the Comm tab is selected to display a window of all single waveform measurements or Comm measurements optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Note Snapshot measurements are taken on the selected waveform The
139. ai Pos Neg To specify which channel becomes the trigger source me RA EPEE touch Source and select the source from the list Trigger Type SEE A Width Y ee Je 4 i a Upper Limit moc Lower Limit 500 0ps To specify the polarity of the pulse touch Pos positive ESEE se aE or Neg negative from the window TrigoerNvee jeer T naan on 5 evel 4 44 Pos looks at positive going pulses Sa Somo Pemon m Neg looks at negative going pulses i tower Limit TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 69 Triggering Overview Trigger based on pulse width Cont Control elements and resources Set to trigger To set the range of widths in units of time the trigger source when will search for and to specify whether to trigger on pulses that are outside this range or within this range do the following steps B Event AWigth Acquire 5 Touch Pulse Width and select from the list Source Pulse Width Pulse Width Chi Y er Type m Inside triggers on pulses that fall within the Wore Re specified range ena ain Outside triggers on pulses that are outside the range Pulse Width To set the range of pulse widths in units of time touch pulse Width ae Upper or Lower Limit and enter the values with the m i multipurpose knob or keypad o Upper Limit jE 500 0ps Lower Limit x 500 0ps fi m Upper Limit is the maximum valid pulse width the e trigger so
140. al Analysis Setup button Then select the Mag tab Then select the desired scale type from Linear dB or dBm 3 166 Linear When the spectrum is linear magnitude the vertical units are the same as the source waveform Usually this is volts However it may also be watts or amperes dB This sets the vertical scale of the magnitude spectrum to dB Use the Reference Level Offset to set what vertical position in the magnitude spectrum will be zero dB The following equation applies dB 20 toe 4 Ref If the input units are watts the the following equation applies dB 1010e 4 Ref Where X is a complex data point in the spectrum and Ref is the Reference Level Offset value dBm This selects dB as described in the above equation but it also sets the Reference Level Offset to a value that is equivalent to 1 mW of power into 50 Q Therefore if the input units are volts then the value is set to 223 6 mV If the input units are amperes then the value is set to 40 uA If the input units are watts then the value is set to 1 mW Reference Level This sets the vertical position of the displayed spectrum Its value is the magnitude at the top of the display screen When this control is adjusted the spectral waveform along with its zero reference marker move vertically on the screen see Figure 3 45 This control does not change the spectral data TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveform
141. al keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields Select the Auto increment file name check box to save a series of files without typing in a new name each time For more information see Using Auto Increment File Name on page 3 200 9 If not selected select set in the Save as type field as the type of file to save Setup files are always type set Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at set Save your setup 10 Touch the Save button to save the setup file To cancel without saving touch the Cancel button _ For further 11 For more help on saving setups touch the Help assistance button in the toolbar to access contextual help on screen TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources Save Instrument Setup As ee a x Save in Setups x e ef Far File name 030709_130553 il Save as type Setup Files set X Cancel I Auto incrementtile name Help Access to virtual keyboard Base file name 030709130553 E coun 0 E Save as type Setup Files set X Cancel W Auto incrementfile name Help 3 203 Data Input Output To Recall Your Setup Use the procedure that follows to recall a setup to the instrument Remember that recalling a setup replaces the existing se
142. al math waveforms Use the procedure To Take Automated Measurements on page 3 123 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 183 Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Select a Predefined Swept Sine Wave Analysis Many applications of the spectral analyzer require swept sine wave input The following equation determines the maximum sweep speed of the sine wave generator for a given span and resolution bandwidth _ freq span K r RBW T minimum time to sweep the sine over the requested span freq span frequency span of interest RBW resolution bandwidth K 2 dB BW in bins for the window function in use as shown in Table 3 10 on page 3 172 K 2 for a Gaussian window Use the procedure that follows to select a predefined spectral math waveform Related control elements and resources Spectral Math Waveform Remember a channel source must be acquiring or have acquired data This source does not have to be displayed to be used Overview To select a predefined spectral math waveform Prerequisites 1 Display the 2 math control window Select a 3 predefined spectral analysis math waveform 3 184 All channel and reference Waveforms and automatic measurement scalars that you will use in your math waveform must be available channels and references contain data measurement scalars are defined and so on From the toolbar touch the Math button to display the Define Math control window Touch
143. alf of the sample rate Where one end of the span goes to DC or Nyquist depending on which direction the center frequency is adjusted the span decreases to allow the center frequency to go further in the direction it is being adjusted If you are unable to increase the center to the desired value then increase the sample rate using either the sample rate or resolution controls You may also change sample rate by using the HORIZONTAL SCALE knob on the instrument front panel m Resolution Bandwidth RBW This is the 3 dB down bandwidth of the spectral analyzer frequency response to a sine wave input The resolution bandwidth is affected by two parameters m Different window functions produce different filter response shapes in the spectrum and result in different resolution bandwidths m The gate width of the input data affects the resolution bandwidth RBW Gate width has units of seconds The resolution bandwidth directly controls the gate width but the numerical value is entered in units of Hz Therefore the time domain gate markers move as you adjust the RBW control Window Bin Width Gate Width RBW Where the Window Bin Width is the resolution bandwidth in units of bins It depends on what window function is used The gate width is in units of seconds Figure 3 44 demonstrate the effects of adjusting center frequency and span Center frequency is a horizontal position control for the spectrum Span is a horizontal scale c
144. alling a Setup This instrument can save a number of different instrument setups for later recall limited only by the space you have to store the setups By saving and recalling different setups you can switch from setup to setup without having to first manually record your settings and then manually set them This capability is helpful when you want to m Save and recall a setup that optimizes the instrument for displaying and analyzing a certain signal m Save a series of setups to help automate a procedure through recall of a sequence of saved setups as part of performing the procedure Export a setup for sharing with a second instrument The Save Setup and the Recall Setup control windows provide for including and viewing comments with your saved setups You can store information readable upon recall that describes each setup you save and its intended application If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name setup files The Save and Recall Setup windows include the Virtual Keyboard When you touch or click a setup name the instrument displays a keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the setup path name setup file name and comment The instrument excludes the following items when saving setups m Waveforms in Ch1 to Ch4 and references Refl Ref4 Control settings scale position and so on are saved but not the waveform data Upon recall of the
145. alue Set the timer 5 To set the timeout timer touch Timer and use the see ae aa ma a multipurpose knob or keyboard to set the time Triooer Tyee ME T Timeout Level rs Timer s Salact 260 0mV ry 500 0p gt Mag Trigger When Stays High Stays Low Either 3 76 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview Set the level Logic qualify the trigger To set mode and holdoff Trigger based on pulse timeout Cont Control elements and resources 6 To set the Level touch Level and use the multipurpose MSCE Asa knobs or keypad to set the timeout trigger level ere eel Note You can set the level to a value appropriate to oie eux either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch Level EN and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL i Sis Low Ete To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger n on page 3 84 Pattern Ch3 px 12V 1 2 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 Trigger on a Pattern When you select the type Pattern the instrument will trigger when the inputs to Overview Prerequisites Trigger on a pattern om the logic function that you select cause the function to become TRUE or at your option
146. amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources ia Export Setup xj Images Waveforms Measurements Prompt for Filename M before Exporting Displayed Measurements Numeric zl e pation ane Export Measurements Snapshot Histogram Data CSV Data Format z Numeric Text Measurements Displayed Measurements Measurements Snapshot Histogram Data CSV Export Cancel Help 3 219 Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Export your file 21 To export the file from the menu bar select Export Fie Edt vertical Horiz acq Trig Display Reference Waveforms r Instrument Setup Recall Default Setup Page Setup Print Preview Print Ctrl P Export Setup Select for Export k You can also attach the front panel PRINT button to Export Then pressing the PRINT button will export 1 030709_101546 set 2 2 C TekScope EMCSetup set your file Do the following to attach the PRINT button to T ae Export Shutdown m From the menu bar select File and then select Export Setup to display the Export Setup control window fy Prompt for filename m Touch Set Print button to Export before exporting Set Print button to ME Ree 22 The Export window lists all available waveforms allows for browsing to the destination directory naming the file x and selecting t
147. ample a signal with frequency component of 500 MHz would need to be sampled at a rate faster than 1 Gigasamples second to represent it accurately and to avoid aliasing The following tips may help you eliminate aliasing on a signal m Turn on Waveform Database mode to capture more data m Try adjusting the horizontal scale for proper waveform display m Try pushing the AUTOSET button m Try switching the acquisition to Envelope mode Envelope searches for samples with the highest and lowest values over multiple acquisitions and can detect faster signal components over time m Turn on PeakDetect acquisition mode If the waveform becomes an envelope aliasing was occurring TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 23 Acquiring Waveforms To Set Acquisition Modes Overview Prerequisites To select an acquisition mode Select the acquisition mode Set waveform count average and envelope only Set the stop mode 3 24 1 Use the procedure that follows to set the data acquisition mode and specify acquisition start stop methods For more information display online help when performing the procedure To set acquisition modes Instrument must be powered up with horizontal and vertical controls set up Triggering should also be set up Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from the Horiz Acq setup window Touch an Acquisition Mode button to set the acquisition mode choose from the follo
148. ampling Real Time Only prevents the very fast horizontal scale settings from being selected m Interpolated Real Time limits the instrument to real time sampling If the instrument cannot accurately get enough samples for a complete waveform it will interpolate Note The instrument will use the interpolation method selected in the display menu to fill in the missing record points either linear or sin x x interpolation The default method is sin x x See Interpolation on page 3 32 for a discussion of interpolation TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources Hi Res Envelope WimDB Fast Acquisitions p p Sampling Modes Real TimeOnly 3 25 Acquiring Waveforms To Start and Stop Use the procedure that follows to start and stop acquisition Acquisition Overview To start and stop acquisition Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The horizontal and vertical controls must be set up Triggering should also be set up See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup To start 2 Make sure all the channels to be acquired are turned on INTENSITY acquiring use channel buttons see To Set Up Signal Input on eS page 3 6 if needed Then push the RUN button to begin acquiring To stop 3 Push the RUN STOP button to stop acquisition INTENSITY acquiring Acquisition will also stop if triggering ceases while in EX Norma
149. amplitude Typically the most negative peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage NegativeWiath o NegativeDutyCycle Period x 100 Voltage measurement Measured over the entire waveform or gated region _ Low Min NegativeOvershoot Amplitude x 100 Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse Voltage measurement The absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region Timing measurement The amount one waveform leads or lags another in time Expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one waveform cycle Timing measurement Time it takes for the first complete signal cycle to happen in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of frequency Measured in seconds Timing measurement of the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Positive Width O Parad O0 PositiveDutyCycle TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 1 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Positive Overshoot Positive Width _f Ri
150. and the displayed waveform m The vertical volts per division that you set determines the vertical size of the acquisition window allowing you to scale it to contain all of a waveform amplitude or only part Figure 3 2 on page 3 13 shows two vertical acquisition windows that contain the entire waveform but only one window contains the entire waveform in the graticule on screen NOTE Amplitude related automatic measurements for example peak to peak and RMS will be accurate for vertical windows like those shown in Figure 3 2a and b because neither waveform is clipped that is both waveforms are acquired But if signal amplitude were to extend outside the vertical acquisition window the data acquired is clipped Clipped data causes inaccurate results if used in amplitude related automatic measurements Clipping also causes inaccurate amplitude values in waveforms that are stored or exported for use in other programs If the digitizers are over driven measurements may not be ments are not accurate To prevent shock verify voltage levels before touching the circuit If the scale of a math waveform is changed so that the math waveform is clipped it will not affect amplitude measurements on that math waveform TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m The vertical position adjusts the acquisition and therefore the display of the acquired waveform relative to the vertical acquisition window Figure 3 2b
151. as limits 1 22 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Incoming Inspection NOTE Do not make changes to the front panel settings that are not called out in the procedures Each verification procedure will require you to set the instrument to certain default settings before verifying functions If you make changes to these settings other than those called out in the procedure you may obtain invalid results In this case repeat the procedure from step 1 When you are instructed to press a front panel button or screen button the button may already be selected its label will be highlighted If this is the case it is not necessary to push the button Check Vertical Operation Equipment required One BNC cable One 015 1018 00 SMA male to BNC female adapter TDS6000B or TDS6000C Digital Storage Oscilloscope Prerequisites None 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 1 9 to the channel input you want to test beginning with CH 1 NOTE Connect the FAST EDGE output labeled PROBE COMPENSATION on some TDS6000B instruments to the channel input using a SMA cable and adapters 3 Turn off all channels If any of the front panel channel buttons are lighted push those buttons to turn off the displayed channels See Figure 1 10 4 Select the channel to test Push the channel button for the channel you are
152. ase is set to a value that exceeds the effective sample rate of the instrument The instrument has two interpolation options linear or sin x x interpolation Linear interpolation calculates record points in a straight line fit between the actual values acquired Sin x x computes record points in a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that curve Intensity Display brightness Knob A rotary control Knob Resolution The amount of change caused by each click of a knob Live Waveforms Waveforms that can update as the acquisition system updates them Channel waveforms are live waveforms reference waveforms are not Math waveforms are live if they contain live waveforms in their expressions Ch1 Refl defines a live math waveform Refl Ref2 does not TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Logic state trigger The instrument checks for defined combinatorial logic conditions on channels 1 2 and 3 on a transition of channel 4 that meets the set slope and threshold conditions If the conditions of channels 1 2 and 3 are met then the instrument triggers Logic pattern trigger The instrument triggers depending on the combinatorial logic condition of channels 1 2 3 and 4 Allowable conditions are AND OR NAND and NOR Low The value used as 0 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are n
153. astrrame source of the reference frame Touch Frame and use the Selected Frame multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the atid reference frame Source SetU 3 40 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview Time stamping frames Cont Control elements and resources To lock the 10 Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from reference the Horiz Acq control window Touch FastFrame Setup position to display the FastFrame Setup control window Ee frames Note You can also get the FastFrame Setup control a window by touching the Set Up button on the Selection bea Controls window 11 Touch either Frame Tracking Live or All to lock the e uann mime Frame aha reference and position frames together When the EE o S E pe frames are locked they maintain the same relative Rec Length ER Frame Hoszeg distance from each other when either frame is adjusted IEE Multiple Frames Readouts Frame Count m Live locks together the channel and math waveforms All reference waveforms are locked together but they are separate from the channel and math waveforms All locks together all channel math and reference waveforms adjusting one waveform adjusts all waveforms SEIGnT FY 27 Jun 2608 75 27 50 6328 573 150235 ty a MMT i 1 Trigger time of the selected frame fRetCh1 F1 27 Jun 2003 15 27 50 658 573 156 335 T ec Lengi A 00 00 00 000 000 000 0
154. asurements 3 119 cursor types 3 130 3 131 Index 14 cursor units depend on sources 3 133 cursors are display limited 3 131 cursors ignore the selected waveform 3 131 cursors treat sources independently 3 132 customize measurements 3 120 display measurement statistics 3 125 display the calibration instructions 3 140 display the cursor controls window 3 134 enable amp position the gates 3 129 FastFrame 3 121 gates 3 121 gating 3 129 graticule cursor and automatic measurements 3 119 high low method 3 121 histogram 3 121 3 127 histogram counting 3 137 histogram counting stays on 3 137 histogram mean 3 122 3 127 histogram measurements 3 139 histogram size 3 137 horizontal cursors 3 130 horizontal histogram view and measurement data illustrated 3 136 indep cursor 3 135 low frequency compensation 3 142 math waveforms 3 121 max 3 125 mean 3 125 measure part of a waveform 3 121 measurement gating 3 129 measurement selection 3 121 measurement sources 3 121 min 3 125 min max 3 122 3 127 multipurpose knobs 3 133 noise 3 122 number of measurements 3 121 open histogram setup window 3 137 optimizing measurement accuracy 3 139 paired cursors 3 130 reference levels method 3 122 reference level calculation methods 3 123 references 3 121 relative reference 3 122 remove measurements 3 124 see statistics on measurement results 3 120 select a cur
155. at you input to each channel using the following subsystems Input Channels Conditions the input signal primarily through the use of analog hardware before the signal is converted to digital form m Trigger System Recognizes a specific event of interest on the input trigger signal and informs the Timebase of the occurrence of the event Recovered clock and data signals are optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Digital Storage Oscilloscope TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 2 3 System Overview Maps Timebase System Tells the Acquisition system to start an acquisition cycle that is to convert from analog to digital In more general terms synchronizes the capturing of digital samples in the Acquisition system to the trigger events generated from the Trigger system Acquisition System Performs the actual A D conversion and storing of digital samples DSP Transformation System Performs a variety of transformations or operations beginning with the most fundamental data element s in the system the Channel Waveform s Waveform math operations automatic measurements spectral waveforms and histogram generation are examples Input Output Systems Provides output and sometimes input of instru ment data elements in a form suitable to the user and also provides user input control The process overview that follows describes each step in the top level cycle of instrument operation 2 4 TDS6000B amp
156. at you use to set the GPIB talk listen mode and the bus address Displays the server status window that allows you to turn the server on and off Choose the source and polarity of the AUX OUT signal Choose the internal or an external clock reference Whenever you change the reference you must perform a signal path compensation see page 3 139 Displays a window that you use to perform signal path compensation and if in service mode instrument calibration Displays a window that you use to run instrument diagnostics and view the diagnostic status and error log If errors are displayed refer the instrument to qualified service personnel B 15 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 12 Utilities menu commands Cont Multipurpose Knobs Deassign Multipurpose Deassigns the multipurpose knobs from their current function Knobs Momentary Readouts Set the multipurpose knob readouts to display momentarily always or never Always Show Readouts Never Show Readouts Readout Setup Displays and allows you to set the time the momentary readouts are displayed User Preferences Displays a window that you use to enable prompts before the instrument performs requested actions autoset autoset undo default recall setup overwrite delete setup or delete reference waveform set keypad trigger level defaults select whether horizontal scale or sample rate is held constant when you change record length and select the type of measureme
157. ate than graticule measurements Since you position cursors wherever you want them on the waveform they are easier to localize to a waveform segment or feature than automatic measurements You can measure time or amplitude or both Vertical cursors measure time or distance on screen horizontal cursors measure voltage or amplitude and waveform and screen cursors measure both Table 3 6 expands on these definitions Table 3 6 Cursor functions types Cursor function Parameter measured Horizontal cursors measure amplitude volts watts Each cursor measures with respect to m V1 Level Cursor 1 with respect to its source ground level Horizontal cursors Vertical cursors Lt Waveform and Screen cursors 3 130 m V2 Level Cursor 2 with respect to its source ground level m AV Level Cursor 2 Level at Cursor 1 Level is cursor displacement from the source ground times the source volts div Note that the two cursors may have different sources and therefore can have different volts div settings Cursor readout Curs1 Pos 151v Curs2 Pos 1 49 IGI vi 1 51V 1 49V 3 0V V2 AV Vertical cursors measure distance time in seconds or bits Each fj cursor measures with respect to 71 Time Cursor 1 with respect to the trigger point Curs1 Pos 436 8us T2 Time Cursor 2 with respect to the trigger point m AT Time Cursor 2 Time Cursor 1
158. ating and using math waveforms 3 145 Cross hair graticule 3 116 B 9 Crossing A 4 B 12 C 41 C 51 Cursor 3 129 controls B 11 measurements 3 119 3 130 3 192 mode B 11 position 3 134 B 11 sources 3 134 style 3 135 tracking 3 135 type 3 134 B 11 types 3 131 units 3 133 Index 4 Cursor controls window 3 134 Cursor measurements 3 192 Cursor readout V bars 3 192 Cursors 3 130 Glossary 3 using 3 131 with derivative waveforms 3 151 3 159 with FFT waveforms 3 183 3 192 Cursors menu cursor controls B 11 cursor mode B 11 cursor position B 11 cursor setup B 11 cursor type B 11 h bars B 11 independent B 11 screen B 11 track B 11 v bars B 11 waveform B 11 Custom control window 3 235 Customer feedback B 16 Customize measurements 3 120 Customizing the display 3 110 Cycle area A 1 B 12 Glossary 3 Cycle Distortion C 41 C 51 Cycle distortion A 5 B 12 Cycle mean A 1 B 11 Glossary 3 Cycle RMS A 1 B 11 Glossary 3 D Data controlling input and output 3 199 Data input output 3 199 all settings are retained 3 200 avoiding setup waveform mismatches 3 200 begin your chart 3 223 bitmap file format 3 214 copy your file 3 227 copying waveforms 3 213 delete a reference waveform file 3 212 delete the file 3 213 delete the reference 3 211 display the reference control window 3 206 3 209 3 211 display the setups control window 3 202 3 204 disp
159. ave a setup that displays a math waveform that is the inverse of reference 1 when you recall the setup if the reference is empty the math and reference waveforms are not displayed Using Auto Increment Auto increment file name in the Save As and Export dialog boxes enables saving FileName numerous files without entering a file name each time To auto increment file names select Auto increment file name on the dialog box as shown in Figure 3 59 3 200 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Save Instrument Setup As Save in Gl Setups cf Ely Base file name 030709_130553 HE conb Save as type Setup Files set Cancel M Auto increment file name Help Figure 3 59 Auto increment file name feature Enter a Base file name and touch Save For the initial save the default count is 000 Your first file is saved as Basefilename count ext where ext is the file extension On subsequent saves the instrument searches for the highest numbered file name and increases the number by one as in Basefilename001 ext For example if you save a series of rise time data files you can use Risetime as the base file name Your first file is saved as Risetime000 ext The next file will be Risetime001 ext and so on If Count reaches 999 it is suggested that you change the base file name to Basefilename1 for example Risetime1 on the next save Your next file will then be saved as Risetime1
160. b s TFI 5 3 1104 Gb s SAS XR 1 5 Gb s SAS SATA 1 5 Gb s SAS IR AASJ 3 0 Gb s TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Supported Communication Trigger Codes and Standards Tables C 43 through C 50 list all supported communication trigger standards Note that HDB3 B3ZS B6ZS and B8ZS are considered to be subsets of the AMI code set NOTE The communications trigger standards available for an instrument depend on the bandwidth and or configuration of that instrument Table C 43 AMI trigger standards Custom 32Mb 97Mb DS1 32 064 Mb s 97 728 Mb s 1 544 Mb s DS1A DS1C DS2 DS2 Rate Sym 2 048 Mb s 3 152 Mb s 6 312 Mb s 6 312 Mb s DS2 Rate Coax DS3 E E2 6 312 Mb s 44 736 Mb s 2 048 Mb s 8 448 Mb s E3 STS 1 Table C 44 B3ZS trigger standards Custom DS3 STS 1 44 736 Mb s 51 84 Mb s Table C 45 B6ZS trigger standards Custom DS2 DS2 Rate Sym 6 312 Mb s 6 312 Mb s Table C 46 B8ZS trigger standards Custom DS1 DS1C DS2 Rate Coax 1 544 Mb s 3 152 Mb s 6 312 Mb s TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 47 CMI trigger standards Custom DS4NA E4 139 26 Mb s 139 26 Mb s STM1E STM 0 CMI STS 3 155 52 Mb s 155 52 Mb s 51 84 Mb s Table C 48 HDB3 trigger standards Custom E1 E2 2 048 Mb s 8 448 Mb s E3 STM 0 HDBx DS1A 34 368 Mb s 2 048 Mb s 51 84 Mb s Tabl
161. because the delta amplitude readout Av must account for the different amplitude scale settings of the sources To do so the Av readout displays the results of v2 v1 60 mV 300 mV 240 mV automatically accounting for the different scales of the cursor sources NOTE If a cursor readout does not seem correct check the source of each cursor in the Cursor setup dialog box Each cursor readout relates to the amplitude and time base settings of its source Vertical Cursors Measure from the Trigger Point Remember that each vertical cursor measures the time from the trigger point to itself This relationship is shown in Figure 3 34 on page 3 132 Cursor readout tn Delay A Horizontal reference 0 First point in record Trigger point of cursor source L JN J y y AU F Horizontal divisions x sec div Cursor Figure 3 34 Components determining Time cursor readout values TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Note that a vertical cursor readout includes and varies directly with the Time to First Point component which varies directly with the horizontal position set for the timebase To see the amount of time to the first point set Horizontal DELAY to 0 0 and set Horizontal Ref to 0 Now the Horizontal position readout shows the time following the first point and adding this value to the cursor readout yields the c
162. been modified or integrated with other products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TEKTRONIX RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Table of Contents General Safety Summary ccc cece cece cece ence cece Environmental Considerations cccccecccccccccccesces Preface Sini aas ka a oa Dede OAS ED ie Saari WA SEE About This Manual 0 0 00 ccc ccc ce cece eee aAa Related Manuals and Online Documents 0 0 00 c cee eee Getting Started Product Description cc cece cece eee eee e eee eees Model Key Features uineet henge a E Hongda eee tadecis Product Softwares athean die dute ebb alee nate ade yds ast wee Deiat eg Software Upgrade s 4 00 b dec ede gtd wae ae Ad kidd ad reg tenes Installation 4 lt i2s55 8 ab 65s ee dGWIO NEOUS REM eda Unpacking sec went y ant een Wad ee
163. c Pos Width Neg Width Period Freq Delay More Area measurement Cyc Area annotations Phase Burst Wid 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the high and low ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the high and low ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 3 horizontal arrows on the mid ref indicating the start mid and end time End arrows point toward each other and the mid arrow points toward the positive part of the cycle In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 3 horizontal arrows on the mid ref indicating the start mid and end time End arrows point toward each other and the mid arrow points toward the negative part of the cycle In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows fa
164. c Measurements on page 3 119 Touch the Help button in the menu bar for more information To display the measurement touch Display to toggle it to on Read the results in the measurements readout TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources HOJE Amp 1 96V Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Take cursor measurements For further assistance To use math waveforms Cont You can also use cursors to measure math waveforms Use the same procedures found under Taking Cursor Measure ments on page 3 130 9 From the toolbar touch the Cursor button to display the cursors and the cursor control window 10 Select the Math tab and touch the numbered button for the math waveform that you want to measure 11 Select the cursor type by touching either the H Bars V Bars Waveform or Screen buttons for more information see Taking Cursor Measurements starting on page 3 130 12 Turn the multipurpose knobs to position each cursor on the math waveform to measure the feature that interests you 13 Read the results in the cursor readout The cursor readout is displayed under the multipurpose readouts or in the upper right corner of the graticule area Note Amplitude measurements on a derivative waveform are in volts per second and volt seconds for an integral waveform measurement _ 4 Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access
165. c Qualify a Trigger on page 3 84 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 Control elements and resources Glitch Width Less Than Greater Than Source Glitch Width Accept Y Glitch Trigger T ov l n CEE a Level 2 J O He Width 3 2 0ns af Trigger if Logic Y Pattern See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering To Trigger ona Runt Pulse When you select the type Runt the instrument will trigger on a short pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first To set up for runt triggering do the following procedures Overview To trigger on a runt pulse Control elements and resources Select runt 1 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of triggering the Trigger control window and touch Select _AEvent f A gt BSeq B Event Mode A Runt Acquire 2 Touch Runt jaca a xe Reta ee n Upper Level Lower Level 800 0mV Select the 3 To specify which channel becomes the pulse trigger et keanan GS Ever eee z Source unt Trigger Runt source source touch So
166. cae Pass long term drift Allow the oscilloscope to warm up 20 minutes before running SPC Run SPC wrenever the ambient temperature does not change to Pass use the following steps to of the oscilloscope has changed by more than 5 C or once a week if the three most sensitive ranges are used Calibrate calibrate the instrument SPC will be adversely affected by input signals with AC components ary probes or input signals before running SPC SPC can take up nutes to run Note Signal Path Compensation is the only calibration e that is accessible to users Calibrate the 4 Touch Calibrate to start the calibration Calibration may aes instrument take several minutes Calibration is complete after Working is no longer displayed in the Calibrate button and Running is no longer displayed in the Status readout Calibrate Check the 5 The calibration status should be Pass If not recalibrate calibration the instrument or have the instrument serviced by status qualified service personnel For further 6 Touch the Help button to access the online assistance assistance 3 140 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms To Connect the Probe To compensate or calibrate probes you must connect the Probe Calibration and Calibration Fixture Deskew Fixture to the instrument use the procedure in the manual that came with the deskew fixture Tektronix part number 067 0484 xx Deskew Fixture Tektroni
167. ce Screen Tet Objects vim Coors J Persistence Intensity m Format AutoBright Record View T Wfm DB View 75 0 Waveform Display Infinite Time 500 0ms s Persistence Infinite Variable ott Time 500 0ms Interpolation Sint Linear TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview Set display styles Cont Select a 6 From the the Display setup control window see right persistence choose a persistence mode mode m Infinite Persistence to make data persist indefinite ly Waveform displays accumulate data as new waveform records acquire resulting in a build up of data in the displayed waveforms m Variable Persistence to make data persist momentarily but also decay New waveform displays accumulate data as new waveform records acquire but with continuous replacement of the oldest data If you select Variable Persistence set a time at which the oldest data fades away Off to make data display for the current acquisition only m Reset to restart the accumulation of data Continue with 7 For more ways to customize the display see the next next procedure procedure TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Persistence Infinite Variable ott Reset Time 500 0ms onrars See Customize Graticule and Waveforms on page 3 116 3 115 Displaying Waveforms Customize Graticule and Wavefo
168. ce Dependencies Math waveforms that include sources as operands are affected by updates to those sources m Shifts in amplitude or DC level of input sources that cause the source to clip also clips the waveform data supplied to the math waveform m Changes to the vertical offset setting for a channel source that clips its data also clips the waveform data supplied to the math waveform m Changes to the acquisition mode globally affects all input channel sources thereby modifying any math waveforms using them For example with the acquisition mode set to Envelope a Chl Ch2 math waveform will receive enveloped channel 1 and channel 2 data and therefore will also be an envelope waveform 3 148 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Clearing the data in a waveform source causes a baseline ground to be delivered to any math waveform that includes that source until the source receives new data Expression Syntax You build math waveforms using the Define Edit Expression control window To help you create valid math waveforms this window blocks most illegal entries by disabling any window element that would create an invalid entry in the math waveform expression The syntax that follows describes valid math expressions which can be quite complex in excess of 100 characters long lt MathWaveform gt lt Expression gt lt Expression gt lt UnaryExpression gt lt BinaryExpress
169. ce from the list Do not select the same channel for both the data and clock sources 5 To select the edge to use to clock select either Pos or Neg from the Clock Edge window 6 Touch Data Level and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the data level 7 Touch Clock Level and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the clock level Note You can set the levels to a value appropriate to either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch either the Data Level or Clock Level and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL The instrument uses the clock level that you set to determine when a clock edge occurs The instrument uses the point the clock crosses the clock level as the reference point from which it measures setup and hold time settings Control elements and resources B Event Mode ASetupHold gt Acquire Data Source chi Y ch2 cha ES Ch2 Y Clock Level 14V Setup Hold Trigger Setup Time Ck 5 ck Ag as hv TK B Event Mode A SetupHold gt Acquire Data Source Chi Y Setup Hold Trigger Setup Time Ck ne ok AE ery Hold Time as CK 500 0ps Data Level Trigger Type SetupMold Select aves B Event Mode A SatupHold gt Acquira Data Source Chi Y Data Level G n Setup Hold Trigger Setup Time Ck Ck Ey wa ieee Trigger Type SetupHold Y Select 502 0ps Clock Source Ch2 v Clock Level C Ea TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Ma
170. cing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 2 horizontal arrows pointing toward each other at their own mid refs indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 4 horizontal bars indicating the highs and lows None 2 horizontal arrows facing each other at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low 3 horizontal arrows indicating the crossing positions and 4 horizontal bars indicating the highs and lows 2 horizontal arrows at the mid ref indicating the start and end time In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the high and low TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 2 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Histogram Wim Ct None seni am Hts in Box None Peak Hits 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the peak hits Median 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the median bin Max 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the max bin Min 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the min bin Pk Pk 2 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the min and max bins Mean 1 vertical or horizontal bar indicating the mean bin Std Dev 3 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 1 standard deviation U 1 3 vertical or
171. create a user mask from a defined mask do the following procedure Overview Creating a user mask from a defined mask Control elements and resources Access the 1 From the button bar touch Masks and select the Mask mask setup Masks tab window The instrument displays the Mask control window D Revil j Display m j a Select the mask 2 Touch the appropriate button in the Type field to select a mask Masks type and type Touch the More button to display further selections apps standard Fibre Channel ANSI T1 102 Fibre Chan Elec Ethernet U k More 3 Select a standard from the drop down list The control window lists mask types and standards that are IC Source available on your instrument which depend on the bandwidth ANSI X3 230 1999 NCITS1295D Rev11 options and configuration of your instrument as FC2126 Optical 2 1 None FC133 Optical 132 8 Mb s FC266 Optical 265 62 Mbs FC531 Optical 591 25 Mb s FC1063 Optical 1 0626 Gb s FC1063 Optical Draft Rey 11 FC2125 Opt TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 15 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Creating a user mask from a defined mask cont Control elements and resources Copy the cur 4 Touch the User Mask button Type rent mask ITU T Fibre Channel ANSIT1 102 Fibre Chan Elec Ether net 5 Touch the Copy Current Mask to User Mask button The UsesiDetiediMask instrument copies the current mas
172. ct a 6 Select the Time Freq Meas or Var tabs to display the function available functions 7 Touch a function button to enter the function in the math expression Select an operand for the function to operate on 8 Use the Home and arrow buttons to move within the math expression Use the Bksp backspace button to delete portions of the expression 9 Touch Apply to apply your new math expression to the math waveform 3 154 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a math waveform Cont Related control elements and resources Math Averaging Apply 10 Touch Avgs to display the Math Averaging control averaging window The controls in the window apply to the math ee waveform defined by the expression math2n Math3 n 2 Math4 n 2 Editor Spect Setup Close 11 Select one of the Math x n controls and set the J number of averages using the multipurpose knobs or I keypad This number of averages affect math waveforms if the Avg function is used 12 Touch Close to close the window touch Editor to open eae a the Define Edit Expression window touch Setup to open Sap ew the math control window or touch Spect to open the Spectral control window Finished 13 Once you have defined the math expression to your satisfaction Touch the the apply button Then touch the OK button to dismiss the dialog box Se
173. ct setup for 3 From the menu bar select Edit and then select Copy Fle Edt vertical Horiz Acq Trig copy Setup to display the Copy Setup control window Tek Copy Ctrl C Select for Copy 3 224 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview Setup to copy images Setup to copy waveforms To save a waveform Cont 4 Select the Images tab to display the Images control window In the Palette window select Color or Black amp White for the color palette of your copied images In the View window select whether you want to copy the Full Screen or Graticules Only In the Image window select whether you want to copy using Normal or InkSaver Mode Select the Waveforms tab to display the Waveforms control window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources 5 Copy Setup x Images Waveforms Measurements Palette Image Color Normal Black amp White InkSaver Mode Enhanced View Data Format Full Screen ERAUL Graticule s Only Bitmap F Readouts Below Graticule Copy Cancel Help ai Copy Setup x Images Waveforms Measurements l Waveform Data Range Data Destination Sampl ples 1 to f Spreadsheet C Save Samples between Cursors C Save Samples in Zoom Area f1 X Source arn Channel 1 gt Number of Samples 5000 FastFrame Data Range Frames 1 aD amp
174. cted Frame Frame feforence trame Selection Source Tracking thi Y panis a Eon Mseti Frame Count pri Readouts z Set frame 4 Touch Rec Length and set the number of samples per Sie cae menor eee Source Tracking Source s length frame thi Live Tema Record length is the number of samples in each EEUN ii an m gear acquisition aie Frames Readouts Set frame 5 Touch Frame Count and enter the number of frames to TR hoo aan a ea count acquire per waveform record shu at Frame count is the number of acquisitions to store in the tunsi EN EN acquisition memory of the channel If the product of the Multiple Readouts Frames record length and the frame count exceeds the available EA zE memory the instrument will reduce the record length or frame count in size such that the product will fit the amount of memory available TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 37 Acquiring Waveforms Overview Select the frame to view To view multiple frames 3 38 To set FastFrame mode Cont 6 10 In the Frame Viewing controls touch Source and select the source of the frame you want to view In the Frame Viewing control touch Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the specific frame you want to view The frame that you select appears on the display In the Frame Viewing controls touch Multiple Frames to toggle it to On In the Frame Viewing control t
175. cts positive spike widths less than the specified glitch time Glitch negative trigger Triggering occurs if the instrument detects negative spike widths less than the specified glitch time Glitch either trigger Triggering occurs if the instrument detects either positive or negative spike widths less than the specified glitch time GPIB General Purpose Interface Bus An interconnection bus and protocol that allows you to connect multiple instruments in a network under the control of a controller Also known as IEEE 488 bus It transfers data with eight parallel data lines five control lines and three handshake lines Graticule A grid on the display screen that creates the horizontal and vertical axes You can use it to visually measure waveform parameters TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Ground GND coupling Coupling option that disconnects the input signal from the vertical system Hardcopy An electronic copy of the display in a format useable by a printer or plotter Hi Res acquisition mode An acquisition mode in which the instrument averages all samples taken during an acquisition interval to create a record point That average results in a higher resolution lower bandwidth waveform This mode only works with real time non interpolated sampling High The value used as 100 in automated measurements whenever high ref mid ref and low ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measure
176. currently testing The button lights and the channel display comes on Instrument under test CE mide o a s D A j SMA cable from FAST EDGE output to CH 1 input Figure 1 9 Universal test hookup for functional tests CH 1 shown TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 23 Incoming Inspection Channel buttons c WERTICAL POSTION 6H y POSTION 6 amp 4 5 POSITION fyg POSITION H3 19 JQ A A A A zZ VW We VW SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE EA Figure 1 10 Channel button location 5 Set up the instrument m Push the front panel AUTOSET button This sets the horizontal and vertical scale and vertical offset for a usable display and sets the trigger source to the channel that you are testing Touch the Vert button and then touch Offset Confirm that the Ch1 Offset is 0 V 6 Verify that the channel is operational Confirm that the following statements are true m Verify that the vertical scale readout and the waveform amplitude for the channel under test without a probe are as shown in Table 1 2 Table 1 2 Vertical settings Setting TDS6604B TDS6804B TDS6124C TDS6154C Scale 100 mV 100 mV Waveform amplitude 3 divisions 4 4 divisions m The front panel vertical POSITION knob for the channel you are testing moves the signal up and down the screen when rotated m Turning the vertical SCALE knob counterclockwise for th
177. cy span and resolution bandwidth directly Time Domain Controls The spectral analyzer has time domain controls for the acquired waveform These controls set the time duration and the resolution time between samples You can easily set the required sample rate and record length Gating Controls These controls are the bridge that connect the time domain to the frequency domain You can perform spectral analysis on a gated region of the input waveform This gating also determines the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer Window Functions There are eight different window functions that shape the filter response of the spectral analyzer m Magnitude Versus Frequency You can choose to display data in dB or linear mode You may display the real or imaginary parts of the spectral magnitude only Ref level offset and reference level controls give complete control over the vertical position and offset of the spectrum The log zero dB ref level may be dialed in manually or set to dBm with a single button touch m Phase Versus Frequency You can display phase data as a function of frequency in radians or degrees You can zero the noise phase for magnitudes below a threshold level Finally you can select Phase unwrap and d0 do group delay m Spectral Averaging You can turn on averaging in the frequency domain for phase and magnitude waveforms TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Multip
178. d The database is 200 lines by 500 columns with a 64 bit counter for each pixel location You can use color graded displays based on counts to highlight waveform activity Parametric measurements derived from the database use statistical techniques to produce more stable accurate results If you select Infinite Persistence the counts accumulate continuously TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Samples sets the minimum number of samples required to complete a single acquisition sequence and the minimum number of samples required to complete a mask test If not using display persistence samples sets the minimum number of samples that is required to release the waveform to the display Similar to FastFrame selecting RunStop will cause the waveform to be displayed with what has been acquired so far The actual number of samples acquired is determined by the Samples setting the selected Record Length and if in equivalent time acquisitions the actual number of samples acquired in an acquisition For example in real time acquisition mode with the entire trace displayed if the Record Length is set to 5000 points and Samples is set to 5001 points then two acquisitions are required and 10000 points are acquired If Samples is set to 5000 points one acquisition is required and 5000 points are acquired If Samples is set to 4999 points one acquisition is required and 5000 points are acquired For Single Sequenc
179. d buttons to navigate Delete Reference Waveform ES x directory to the directory of the file to delete Lookin Ea wavetorns 6 ca m Find your file 6 Select the file type in the Files of type drop down list to force the file listing to only include these types Use Fenm ME E wfm for waveforms Files of type Waveform Files wim x Cancel Help Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set to wfm for waveforms Access to virtual keyboard 7 Choose your waveform file by clicking an existing name in the file list Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields 3 212 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To clear references Cont Control elements and resources Delete the file 8 Touch the Delete button to Delete the file To cancel without deleting a file touch the Cancel button Cancel Help o For further 9 For more help on deleting files touch the Help button assistance to access contextual online help Exporting and Copying Waveforms This instrument also supports export of waveform data to a file The instrument can export waveforms images and measurements in several formats You can also copy waveform
180. d length scale resolution sample rate duration delay reference point and zoom Acquisition You can set the acquisition mode enable roll mode equivalent time interpolated real time equivalent time and FastFrame on instruments with these features Zoom Controls Displays the Zoom control window you use to set the position and scale of zoomed waveforms Autoset Automatically sets up the front panel controls based on the characteristics of the input signal and default selections Undo Last Autoset Undoes the last autoset TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual B 5 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 4 Horiz Acq menu commands Cont Menu Run Stop Delay Mode On Roll Mode Auto Sampling Modes Position Scale Resolution Acquisition Mode FastFrame Setup FastFrame Controls Zoom Setup Function Displays the Run Stop control window that you can use to start and stop acquisitions control a single sequence of acquisitions and display the acquisition status Toggles horizontal delay mode on and off Toggles roll mode on and off on instruments with this feature When on the instrument automatically enters roll mode at slower horizontal scale settings Real Time Only Sets the sampling mode to real time Interpolated Real Time Sets the sampling mode to real time The instrument automatically uses interpolated real time sampling when the sample rate is too fast to acquire enough samples using real
181. d region of the source waveform is transformed by the spectral analyzer to a spectral waveform This may be a phase or magnitude waveform The horizontal units are always Hz The vertical units depend on whether phase or magnitude is selected The frequency domain controls for the spectral waveform are span center and resolution bandwidth The spectrum normally appears on the display fit to a screen width of 10 divi sions m Span The span is the stop frequency at the end of the spectral waveform minus the start frequency at the beginning of the waveform The span control maximum value is equal to the current sample rate divided by two There fore if you are unable to increase the span to the desired value and if you want to keep the same source waveform duration go to the timebase controls and increase the sample rate using the resolution control Or if you want to also decrease the source waveform duration adjust the sample rate control If you decrease the sample rate the span setting may decrease if necessary to keep the span less than the sample rate divided by two TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 163 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Center This is the frequency at the center of the spectral waveform Center is equal to the start frequency plus one half of the span The adjustment range depends on the sample rate and the current span setting Remember that the span must always be in the interval of zero to one h
182. d the areas from which values are taken that are used to calculate measurements PTop TCross TCrosso we PCross A PBase Eye Aperture Figure C 5 Eye diagram and optical values C 42 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering P Values The P values include the mean and standard deviation of the vertical location of PTop and PBase These areas are used with a specified sample size to statistical ly measure the following values m PTopmean the mean value of PTop m PToPsigma the standard deviation of PTop m PToppk pk the vertical peak to peak deviation of PTop m PBasemean the mean value of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasegioma the standard deviation of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasepk pk the vertical peak to peak deviation of PBase 1 The Eye Aperture defaults to the center 20 of the interval from TCross to TCrossp T1 Values The T1 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the leftmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions m TCrossl mean the horizontal mean of the left crossing point at TCross m TCross1 jgma the horizontal standard deviation of the left crossing point at TCross 1 m TCross1pk pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at TCross1 m PCross1 mean the vertical mean of the left crossing point at PCross
183. d trigger status in the readout The readout indicates the trigger type and then shows sources levels or any other parameters that are important for the particular trigger type Figure 3 20 shows an example readout for the state trigger type 2 0us div 250MS s_ 4 0ns pt HXX AND Trigger type State Ch 1 2 3 Inputs High Don t Care Don t Care Ch 4 Input Rising Edge Logic AND Figure 3 20 Example advanced trigger readout Read the following topics they provide details that can help prevent false steps in setting up to trigger on your waveforms Glitch Trigger A glitch trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse narrower or wider than some specified time It can trigger on glitches of either polarity Or you can set the glitch trigger to reject glitches of either polarity Runt Trigger A runt trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a short pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first You can set the instrument to detect any positive or negative runt pulse or only those wider than a specified minimum width Width Trigger A width trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse that is inside or optionally outside some specified time range defined by the upper limit and lower limit The instrument can trigger on positive or negative width pulses 3 60 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Transition Trigg
184. dards c cee eeeeeees Table C 50 NRZ trigger standards cccceeeeeevees Table C 51 Supported communications measurements and their definition TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 49 C 49 C 49 C 49 C 50 C 50 C 50 C 50 C 51 xi Table of Contents xii TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual a a General Safety Summary To Avoid Fire or Personal Injury Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to this product or any products connected to it To avoid potential hazards use this product only as specified Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures While using this product you may need to access other parts of the system Read the General Safety Summary in other system manuals for warnings and cautions related to operating the system Use Proper Power Cord Use only the power cord specified for this product and certified for the country of use Connect and Disconnect Properly Do not connect or disconnect probes or test leads while they are connected to a voltage source Ground the Product This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord To avoid electric shock the grounding conductor must be connected to earth ground Before making connections to the input or output terminals of the product ensure that the product is properly grounded Observe All Terminal Ratings To avoid fire or shock hazard obser
185. data to the clipboard for use with other applications By exporting a waveform you can use it with other analysis tools such as spreadsheets or math analysis applications Waveforms export as a series of comma separated values CSV which are amplitudes without units There is no timing information but data is placed in the file in sequence from the first sample in the waveform record to the last Because the waveforms are exported as CSV without timing and scaling information the instrument does not import these waveforms directly If you intend to recall a waveform later save it see the procedure To Save Your Waveform on page 3 206 instead of exporting it You may also choose to copy a waveform and paste it directly into an application such as Microsoft Word or Excel If so select your waveform and then select Copy in the Edit menu TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 213 Data Input Output File Formats To make exported files more useful you may select a file format usable by your analysis tools m Numeric creates files txt in a numeric format usable by text and word processors m Text creates files txt in a text format usable by text and word processors m Bitmap creates files bmp in a bitmap file format usable by many graphic programs m JPEG creates files jpg in a compressed image format usable by many graphic programs m PNG creates files png in a compressed image format that is nonlo
186. dditional trigger parameters Cont Control elements and resources _ If the Menu Bar is not displayed touch the Menu button to display the Menu Bar Touch Utilities and select User Preferences to display the User Preferences control window Select the Keypad Defaults tab Select a Trigger Level and adjust the Trigger Level preset using the multipur pose knob or keypad Select a Keypad Label and change the label of the preset using the keypad Push the ADVANCED front panel button to display the trigger control window Select the A Event or B Event tab and select the Edge trigger type To force the instrument to immediately acquire one waveform record even without a trigger event touch the Force Trigger button Forcing a trigger is useful when in normal trigger mode and the input signal is not supplying a valid trigger By touching Force Trigger you can quickly confirm that there is a signal present for the instrument to acquire Once that is established you can determine how to trigger on it push PUSH TO SET 50 check trigger source setting and so on The instrument recognizes and acts on Force Trigger even when you touch it before the end of pretrigger holdoff However the button has no effect if the acquisition system is stopped TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Unites Help Buttons Tek Secure Erase Set Time amp Date GPIB Configuration LAN Server Status Ex
187. defined math waveform Creates a predefined math waveform Creates a predefined math waveform Displays the Spectral Math Setup control window that you use to create spectral math waveforms Creates a predefined magnitude spectral math waveform Creates a predefined phase spectral math waveform Displays the Spectral Math controls window that you can use to control your spectral math waveform Displays the Math Averaging controls window that you use to set up averaging in math waveforms Displays the Math Equation Editor setup window that you use to create math waveforms Application Commands Table B 11 lists the commands available from the applications menu Table B 11 Application menu commands Menu Restore Application Installed application 1 Installed application 2 Function Restores the minimized window of the currently running application Starts an installed application TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Utilities Commands Table B 12 lists the commands available from the Utilities menu Table B 12 Utilities menu commands Menu Submenu Tek Secure Erase Set Time amp Date GPIB Configuration LAN Server Status External Signals Instrument Calibration Instrument Diagnostics TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Function Erases all setup and reference memory Displays a menu that you use to set the instrument date and time Displays a control window th
188. description of each Optimizing Measurement Accuracy The procedures given here will increase the accuracy of the measurements that you take This instrument can compensate itself and the attached probes optimizing the internal signal path used to acquire the waveforms you measure Compensation optimizes the capability of the instrument to take accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature To Compensate the To compensate the instrument so that it can take accurate measurements based on Instrument the ambient temperature use the procedure that follows Overview To compensate the instrument Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Instrument should be powered on Allow a 20 minute warm up Remove all input signals See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and Power on the Instrument on page 1 8 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 139 Measuring Waveforms Overview To compensate the instrument Cont Related control elements and resources calibration Instrument Calibration ee instructions Spee External Signals Instrument Diagnostics N Multipurpose Knobs Display the 2 From the menu bar select Utilities and then select ERE User Preferences Option Instalation Check the calibration status The calibration status should be Pass If the status is Calibration Instructions RA Warm up wait until the status changes If the status S e a a
189. dge triggers as well as a variety of advanced triggers you can use Triggered waveform Untriggered waveforms Figure 3 16 Triggered versus untriggered displays The trigger event establishes the time zero point in the waveform record All points in the record are located in time with respect to that point The instrument continuously acquires and retains enough sample points to fill the pretrigger portion of the waveform record that part of the waveform that is displayed before or to the left of the triggering event on screen When a trigger event occurs the instrument starts acquiring samples to build the posttrigger portion of the waveform record displayed after or to the right of the trigger event Once a trigger is recognized the instrument will not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete and the holdoff time has expired TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Trigger Sources The trigger source provides the signal that triggers acquisition Use a trigger source that is synchronized with the signal you are acquiring and displaying You can derive your trigger from the following sources m Input channels are the most commonly used trigger sources You can select any one of the four input channels The channel that you select as a trigger source wil
190. dividing the BW in bins by the gate duration in seconds This is also referred to as resolution bandwidth RBW m Coherent gain The gain factor normally associated with different window functions is correctly scaled into the magnitude spectrum output Therefore the magnitudes in the output spectrum do not change as different windows are selected m Scallop Loss This is the magnitude error of an FFT when the frequency of the observed signal is exactly half way between two frequency samples of the spectrum when the interpolation ratio due to zero fill of the FFT is one The spectral analyzer FFT length is controlled so that zero fill is always in effect This essentially eliminates scallop loss because zero fill in the time domain causes interpolation in the frequency domain This results in accurate magnitude measurements for all window functions TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Frequency bins Figure 3 49 Example of scallop loss for a Hanning window without zero fill m Nearest Side Lobe This is the difference in magnitude between the spectral lobe peak in the spectrum and the next side lobe that occurs due to energy leakage Different windows have different leakage characteristics The more narrow the resolution bandwidth of the window the more leakage in the spectrum m Zero Phase Reference This is the position in the time domain gate that is the reference point for phase in th
191. dow You can also read about setting up the various trigger types in the procedures that follow Just remember to select the B Event tab not the A when setting up B trigger types m To Trigger on a Glitch on page 3 65 To Trigger on a Runt Pulse on page 3 67 m Trigger Based on Pulse Width on page 3 69 m To Trigger Based on Transition Time on page 3 71 m Triggering on a Window on page 3 74 m Trigger Based on Pulse Timeout on page 3 76 m Trigger on a Pattern on page 3 77 To Trigger on a State on page 3 80 To Trigger on Setup Hold Time Violation on page 3 81 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 93 Triggering Ove 3 94 rview To Reset if 1 no B Trigger For further assistance To trigger on a sequence Cont 4 To set the trigger system to reset the sequence if a B trigger does not occur within certain constrains from the toolbar touch Trig and select the A gt B Seq tab of the Trigger control window Set the Trigger Reset Type in the pulldown menu The controls that are appropriate to your selection appear Note Selections for Reset type vary with the B trigger type that you select All B trigger types have the Timeout and None Reset types with the State and Transition types added for those B trigger types for which it is appropriate Set the time or specify the state or transition that forces reset To not reset set to None Touch the Help button in
192. drop down list and buttons to navigate to the directory in which to save your waveform To specify the file name in which to save your waveform you can m Use the default name and directory appearing in the File Path field m Rename the file by typing a new name into the File name field m Select the Auto increment file name check box to save a series of files without typing in a new name each time For more information see Using Auto Increment File Name on page 3 200 Control elements and resources Save Wim to Refi ora oo m Save Wim to File c a a Channel a A Scale Label 4 0 re Ly fj a Display Position w 0 0div Save all Wims to Files eS Save Reference Waveform As Save in Waveforms e c Er 9 030 709_102346 wim 9 030709_102351 wim ial al a 030709_102354 wfm a TOSW FM OOO wfm la TOSWwMa0 Lwin a TOSWfm002 wfm Save File name TOSWim wfm i Save as type Waveform Files vm X Cancel F Auto increment file name Help Save Reference Waveform As Save in GWeveoms ek Far Edit path and file name E conp E x Cancel Help Base file name TOSWim win Seve astype Waveform Files wim M Auto incrementfile name Access to virtual keyboard TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview Save your waveform For further assistance
193. e Radian or GroupDelay m Degree sets the phase units to degrees Phase is displayed using degrees as the scale where degrees wrap from 180 F to 180 F m Radian sets the phase units to radians Phase is displayed using radians as the scale where radians wrap from st to 7 m GroupDelay unwraps the phase spectrum and displays its negative derivative The topic Using the Phase Controls on page 3 168 provides in depth information on the setup for phase displays To specify whether to unwrap phase in a spectral analysis phase waveform touch Unwrap to toggle it on or off To set the level in dB that a magnitude in the spectrum must exceed to have its phase computed to reduce the effect of noise in your phase waveform touch Suppression Threshold and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the threshold level If the magnitude is less than the threshold then its phase is set to zero for an example see Figure 3 47 on page 3 169 The Suppression Threshold bullet on page 3 168 provides additional information on phase suppression TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Suppression Threshold 200 00B p Suppression Threshold emma Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Set time and frequency domain control tracking Select the window type To define a spectral math waveform Cont 17 Touch the Control tab
194. e te Amplitude Area Cycle Area JUL Burst Width a Cycle Mean yy Cycle RMS F p Delay Fall Time Frequency Fih High Definition Voltage measurement The high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region Amplitude High Low Area measurement Voltage over time measurement The area over the entire waveform or gated region in volt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative Voltage over time measurement The area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region in volt seconds Area measured above ground is positive area below ground is negative Timing measurement The duration of a burst Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region Timing measurement The time between the MidRef crossings of two different traces or the gated region of the traces Timing measurement Time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a High Ref value default 90 to a Low Ref value default 10 of its final value Timing measurement for the first cycle in the waveform or gated region The reciprocal of the per
195. e C 49 MLT3 trigger standards Custom 100Base TX 125 Mb s Table C 50 NRZ trigger standards C 50 Custom 2 5 IBand EFU FC133 2 5 Gb s 125 0 Mb s 132 8 Mb s FC266 FC531 FC1063 FC2125E 265 6 Mb s 531 2 Mb s 1 0625 Gb s 2 125 Gb s FC4250 FS USB G1 ATA G2 ATA 4 25 Gb s 12 Mb s 1 5 Gb s 3 0 Gb s G3 ATA GB Ethernet HS USB O0C1 STMO 6 0 Gb s 1 25 Gb s 480 Mb s 51 84 Mb s 0C3 STM1 0C12 STM4 0C48 STM16 0C48 FEC 155 5 Mb s 622 1 Mb s 2 488 Gb s 2 666 Gb s PCI Express RapidlO 500M RapidlO 750M RapidlO 1 0G 2 5 Gb s 500 Mb s 750 Mb s 1 0 Gb s RapidlO 1 5G RapidlO 2 0G RIO Serial 1G RIO Serial 2G 1 5 Gb s 2 0 Gb s 1 25 Gb s 2 5 Gb s RIO Serial 3G 400b 800b 1600b 3 125 Gb s 491 5 Mb s 983 0 Mb s 1 966 Gb s SFI SPI 5 2 5G SFI SPI 5 3 1G TFI 5 2 5G TFI 5 3 1G 2 5 Gb s 3 1 Gb s 1 488 Gb s 3 11 Gb s VSR 00192 XAUI 1 244 Gb s 3 125 Gb s TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Automatic Communication Signal Measurements Table C 51 lists the automatic communication signal measurements that are part of the Serial Mask Testing features Table C 51 Supported communications measurements and their definition Name Z TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Ext Ratio Extinction Ratio Extinction Ratio dB Eye Height Eye Width Crossing Eye Top Eye Base Jitter Pk Pk Jitter RMS Jitter 60 Noise Pk Pk Noise RMS S N Ratio Definiti
196. e Ken keypad to set each threshold E Muy Input Threshold Ch3 cha clk Define logic 5 To choose the logic pattern type you want applied to Pattern Type channels 1 through 3 touch an available type from the at Pattern Type window See Table 3 2 on page 3 62 for definitions of the logic functions for both pattern and state triggers 3 80 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger on a state Cont Set trigger 6 To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met when goes TRUE or when the logic condition is not met goes FALSE touch Trigger When Pattern and select False or True from the list For the simplest operation leave this control set to TRUE Setting the control to FALSE complements the output of the chosen pattern function for example from AND to NAND or NOR to OR Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types To set mode 7 and holdoff Control elements and resources Trigger if Logic State True W False Trug See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff To Trigger on Setup Hold Time Violations Overview Select setup 1 hold triggering TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual To trigger on setup hold time violations From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of the Trigger control window and touch Select 2 Touch Setup Hold setup
197. e To Use Math Waveforms on page 3 157 for more procedures For further 14 Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access assistance context sensitive help on math waveforms TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 155 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Operations on Math Waveforms This instrument supports many of the same operations for math waveforms that it provides for channel live and reference waveforms For example you can measure math waveforms with cursors This section introduces these operations m Vertical display scaling and positioning m Taking automatic measurements m Taking cursor measurements m Histograms on math waveforms Many of the same instrument tools that prove to be powerful adjuncts for displaying processing and analyzing other waveforms also work on math waveforms For example in addition to the operations listed above you can save math waveforms as references Independent horizontal scaling Each math waveform that you create derives its horizontal scale and position from the sources that you include in its math expression You can adjust these controls for the source waveforms and your adjustments will reflect in the math waveform as the sources update You can also magnify all waveforms including math waveforms using zoom Using Math Waveforms Basically you use the same techniques to work with math waveforms that work with channel waveforms Consider the Source Changes to source
198. e Ty Negative Tg Positive Ty gt Figure 3 21 Violation zones for Setup Hold triggering 3 64 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering To Trigger on a Glitch When you select the type Glitch the instrument will trigger on a pulse narrower or wider in width than some specified time To set up for glitch triggering do the following procedures Overview To trigger on a glitch _ Prerequisites The instrument must be installed with a signal connected to an input channel Acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired N Select glitch triggering From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of the Trigger control window and touch Select 3 Touch Glitch Trigger Type Glitch Y Soloct Select the 4 To specify which channel becomes the trigger source am o REE source touch Source and select the source from the list al eae aa l Select the 5 To specify the glitch polarity touch Pos positive Neg polarity and negative or Either from the Polarity window width m Pos looks at positive going pulses m Neg looks at negative going pulses m Either looks at both positive and negative pulses Source Chi A Level 6 To specify the width of the glitch touch Width and set the glitch width using the multipurpose knob or keypad TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Man
199. e and Mask Pass Fail Testing a sample is only counted if the sample would be displayed in the graticule area In Single Sequence all eligible samples in an acquisition are counted In Mask Test with infinite persistence on all acquisitions acquired in a batch are counted In nondisplay persistence the minimum number of samples for the waveform may include multiple batches of acquisitions In ET mode fewer samples are acquired per acquisition but more acquisi tions may be acquired in a batch Samples divided by the Record Length roughly indicates the number of waveforms in a batch of acquisitions Batch processing minimizes the overhead of displaying and processing other features such as measurements and histograms The higher the number of samples the greater the acquisition throughput and the potential for less frequent display updates Also consider how you want to control acquisition you have two main options settable from the Run Stop control window select Run Stop from the Horiz Acq menu m Run Stop Button Only Sets the instrument to start and stop the acquisition only when you push the Run Stop button available on the front panel or in the Run Stop control window If toggled to Run acquisition will start if a valid trigger occurs If toggled to Stop acquisition stops immediately TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 21 Acquiring Waveforms m Single Sequence In addition to the Run Stop Button which can a
200. e channel you are testing decreases the amplitude of the waveform on screen turning the knob clockwise increases the amplitude and returning the knob to the original scale setting returns the amplitude to that shown in Table 1 2 for that scale setting 7 Verify that the channel acquires in all acquisition modes From the Horiz Acq menu select Horizontal Acquisition Setup Touch the 1 24 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Incoming Inspection Acquisition tab in the control window that displays Touch each of the acquisition modes and confirm that the following statements are true see Using the Acquisition Controls on page 3 18 for more information m Sample mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen Note that there is a small amount of noise present on the square wave m Peak Detect mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise present in Sample mode peak detected m Hi Res mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise that was present in Sample mode reduced m Average mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise reduced m Envelope mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen with the noise displayed m Waveform Database mode displays an actively acquiring waveform on screen that is the accumulation of several acquisitions 8 Test all channels Repeat steps 2 through 7 until all four input channels are
201. e cy Soe Berens aM gree Bo Gua Ree 3 141 To Compensate Passive Probes 0 cece eee cece eee ee 3 142 Serial Mask TEAME oorpyn pE REEE EEE TREE gh hea we ea Hae 3 144 Creating and Using Math Waveforms eceeceeceees 3 145 Defining Math Waveforms 0 cece cee eee eee ene 3 146 Using Maths 434 tesiavcc ihn ates apts EAO tare rane dah Fe ar ae 3 147 To Define a Math Waveform 00 000 c eee cee eee eee 3 153 Operations on Math Waveforms 2 0 cece eee eee eee eee 3 156 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual iii Table of Contents Appendices Using Math Waveforms mio erris Ira sA ccc cc cee eee ee eee 3 156 T Use Math Waveforms cscs ire acacia net ae tare Wie ead ware Be ta erases 3 157 Defining Spectral Math Waveforms 0 c cee cee eee eee 3 160 Using Spectral Math Controls z is siensa 0 0 eee eee eee eee 3 161 Recognizing AliaSing 0 eect eens 3 182 To Select a Predefined Spectral Math Waveform 0 3 184 To Define a Spectral Math Waveform 0 000 c eee eee 3 185 SpectralMath Example it ih ciel ela AEAEE ERA wee eu eevee 3 193 Data Input Output ccc ccc ccc cect eee eee renee 3 199 Saving and Recalling a Setup 0 cee ee ee cece eee 3 199 Using Auto IncrementFile Name 0 0 c eee eee eee 3 200 ToSave Your Setup 15 esc5 deep erre Ne orei a aa O wheeled an 3 201 To Recall Your Setup errio nra ee
202. e help includes procedures for using instrument functions Online help includes a list of Options and accessories Quickly find the syntax of a command and copy the command if desired Read about communication error handling and other information on GPIB usage This guide is on the product software CD These documents consists of various connectivity and analysis tools that you can install and configure for your instrument For more information see the Analysis and Connectivity Support topic in the instrument online help TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual a a System Overview Maps The instrument is a highly capable waveform acquisition test and measurement system The following model provides background information on its operation which in turn may provide you insight on how the instrument can be used Functional Model Map Signal Processing Output amp Digital Signal Acquisition amp Transformation Storage Display amp UI Input channels Acquisition Amplitude system H 1 4 l scaling page 3 17 e Page 3 97 page 3 12 Trigger Timebase system system page 3 43 pages 3 98 3 145 L Recovered clock output i Recovered data output The model comprises four high level subsystems or processes embodying a variety of hardware and software functions and the data that connects them Digital Signal Acquisition System Acquires a waveform record from each signal th
203. e of a selected mask standard the instrument displays the message Consider system bandwidth when testing at this bit rate in the status area above the graticule TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 27 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Communication Comm Triggering Communication Triggering Overview Access the 1 trigger control window 2 Select a com munications trigger Select comm 3 trigger source C 28 Communication Comm triggering sets the instrument to trigger on industry standard communication signals This section describes how to access and operate the communication trigger features procedure Communication triggering From the button bar touch Trig and select the A Event trigger tab The instrument opens the Trigger Setup control window Touch the Comm button The instrument displays the Comm Trigger controls Touch the Source button to select the signal source channel Select from channel 1 through channel 4 To set the instrument to trigger on communication signals do the following Related control elements and resources Aig Acqure Source Edge Trigger Coupling s Force Trigger hi Y pa bY Level 24m d Set 50 EH Comm Acquire Coding Comm Trigger Upper Level AM Y 2 0mY Type Standard otaw Custom poster Leonel 2 0m Bit Rate 1 544 bis Pulse Form Ze ES ED Cs L Source
204. e of the waveform a channel math or reference waveform to export from the list 13 If you want waveform scale factors and time values included in your MathCad Mathlab files touch Include waveform scale factors if not checked only voltage vertical values are exported 14 Touch Data Ordering and select the data order top first bottom first or rotate from the list TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources Fa Export Setup Images Waveforms Measurements Waveform Data Range C Samples fi to fi Save Samples between Cursors Save SamplesinZoomArea gt All Data Destination Spreadsheet CSV v Source Channel la Number of Samples 5000 FastFrame Data Range Waveform Detail Data Ordering F Include waveform aT scale factors Baot xl Prompttor Filename F betore Exporting r Set Front Panel Print Button to Export Cancel Help Images Waveforms Measureme Data destination 5 C8 Spreadsheet CVF lag Channel 3 Channel 4 Math 1 Math 2 Waveform Detail Include waveform scale factors Data Ordering B ottom first Top first rotate 90 degrees To first x Bottom first rotate 90 degrees 3 217 Data Input Output Overview 3 218 To save a waveform Cont 15 Inthe Waveform data range window select the data to include in the exported files Samples to e
205. e output spectrum That is if a sine wave input has its peak at the zero phase reference position then it reads out as zero phase in the spectrum If the phase is to be correct when doing impulse response testing the impulse in the time domain must be located at this position in the gate interval m Coefficients These are used to generate the windows which are constructed from a cosines series For the Gaussian window the value of a is given instead of a set of coefficients You can find descriptions of cosine series windows in Handbook of Digital Signal Processing Engineering Applica tions by Elliot ISBN 0 12 237075 9 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 173 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Gaussian Window This is the default window function see Figure 3 50 It is unique in that the time domain shape of an exponential Gaussian function transforms into a Gaussian exponential shape in the frequency domain This window provides optimal localization in both the time and the frequency domain This is the filter shape most commonly used in spectrum analyzers Amplitude Time Frequency bins Figure 3 50 Time and frequency graphs for the Gaussian window 3 174 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms
206. e pattern type A Trigger control window 3 78 3 80 3 85 Defining and displaying waveforms 3 100 Degree 3 188 DELAY button 3 49 Delay B 12 measurement Glossary 4 mode on B 6 time Glossary 4 Delay time A Trigger control window 3 91 Delayed runs after time 3 49 Delayed trigger 3 49 how to set up 3 91 Delayed triggerable on events 3 49 Delete all refs B 1 Derivative math waveform 3 150 Index 5 Index applications 3 150 derivation of 3 150 procedure for measuring 3 151 3 159 record length of 3 150 Description key features 1 1 product 1 1 C 1 Deskew 3 141 B 4 Glossary 3 channels 3 141 vertical controls window 3 141 Diagnostics B 15 Differentiation of a derivative 3 150 waveform 3 149 Digitizing Glossary 4 process defined 3 29 Display customizing 3 110 3 111 date and time B 10 elements 3 98 persistence 3 111 B 9 settings 3 111 setup 3 114 B 9 style 3 111 B 9 styles 3 114 system Glossary 5 Display control 3 99 Display control window dots 3 113 infinite persistence 3 113 variable persistence 3 113 vectors 3 113 Display menu appearance B 9 color palette B 10 colors B 9 cross hair B 9 display date and time B 10 display persistence B 9 display setup B 9 display style B 9 Display trigger T B 10 dots B 9 frame B 9 full B 9 graticule style B 9 grid B 9 infinite persistence B 9 intensified samples B 9 linea
207. e personnel CAUTION To prevent getting moisture inside the instrument during external cleaning use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator Clean the exterior surfaces of the chassis with a dry lint free cloth or a soft bristle brush If any dirt remains use a cloth or swab dipped in a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution Use a swab to clean narrow spaces around controls and connectors Do not use abrasive compounds on any part of the chassis Clean the On Standby switch using a dampened cleaning towel Do not spray or wet the switch directly CAUTION Do not use chemical cleaning agents which might damage the plastics used in this instrument Use only deionized water when cleaning the front panel buttons Use a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution as a cleaner and rinse with deionized water Before using any other type of cleaner consult your Tektronix Service Center or representative TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual D 1 Appendix D Cleaning Flat Panel Display Cleaning D 2 A The display is soft plastic and must be treated with care during cleaning CAUTION Improper cleaning agents or methods can damage the flat panel display Do not use abrasive cleaners or commercial glass cleaners to clean the display Do not spray liquids directly on the display surface Do not scrub the display with excessive force Clean the flat panel display surface by gently rubbing the display with a clean r
208. e two sources For example delay would be used to measure an input from one measurement source for example C1 with respect to an output in another source C2 High Low Method The levels that the automatic measurement system derives as the High Top or Low Bottom for a waveform influence the fidelity of amplitude and aberration measurements You can select among the modes the instrument provides for determining these levels You can set the modes differently for each measurement m Histogram Sets the values statistically It selects the most common value either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level Since this statistical approach ignores short term aberrations overshoot ringing and so on Histogram is the best setting for examining pulses See Figure 3 31 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 121 Measuring Waveforms High Min Max High Mean High Histogram Mid reference Low Histogram Low Mean Low Min Max Figure 3 31 High Low tracking methods m Min max Uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses See Figure 3 31 m Histogram mean Sets the values statistically Using a histogram it selects the mean or average value d
209. easurements 3 119 Figure 3 30 Annotated display 0c cece cece eeeees 3 120 Figure 3 31 High Low tracking methods 0eeee0e 3 122 Figure 3 32 Reference level calculation methods 3 123 Figure 3 33 Horizontal cursors measure amplitudes 3 131 Figure 3 34 Components determining Time cursor readout values 3 132 Figure 3 35 Horizontal histogram view and measurement data 3 136 Figure 3 36 Probe calibration and deskew fixture 3 141 Figure 3 37 Pass Fail mask testing ccc ee eee eeceee 3 144 Figure 3 38 Spectral analysis of an impulse 6 3 145 Figure 3 39 Functional transformation of an acquired waveform 3 146 Figure 3 40 Derivative math waveform 0eeeeeees 3 150 Figure 3 41 Peak peak amplitude measurement of a derivative Waveform 6 inr ne o ssisk feark AeA E ere wee Ae ea 3 151 Figure 3 42 Duration and resolution control effects 3 162 Figure 3 43 Definition of gate parameters 00e eee 3 163 Figure 3 44 Effects of frequency domain control adjustments 3 165 Figure 3 45 Effects of adjusting the reference level 3 167 Figure 3 46 Effects of adjusting the reference level offset control 3 167 Figure 3 47 Example of the effects of setting the phase suppression threshold 0 ccc cc ccc ee cece ceecevees 3 169 Figure 3 48 Windowing the time domain record 3 171 Fi
210. edefined spectral math Waveform 3 184 to take automated measurements of a spectral math waveform 3 183 to take cursor measurements of a spectral math waveform 3 183 unwrap phase 3 188 using spectral math controls 3 161 using the frequency domain controls 3 163 using the gate controls 3 162 using the magnitude controls 3 166 using the phase controls 3 168 using the time controls 3 161 using windows to filter 3 170 window characteristics 3 170 3 172 window functions 3 160 windowing the time domain record illustrated 3 171 zero phase reference 3 172 3 173 Spectral math waveform aliasing 3 182 phase suppression 3 168 undersampling 3 182 zero phase reference 3 173 Spectral math waveforms See Spectral Math Split cursors 3 130 Spreadsheet file format 3 214 Standard deviation 3 125 B 12 Start histogram counting 3 137 State main trigger menu 3 80 3 81 State trigger 3 62 3 80 how to set up 3 80 Statistical measurement Glossary 15 Statistics 3 125 B 12 controls B 12 on measurement results 3 120 Index 19 Index Status calibration 3 140 Stddev A 3 T Technical support B 16 contact information xvii Tek Exponential window 3 170 3 172 3 181 Tek Secure 3 211 B 15 Glossary 15 Tektronix contacting xvii TekVISA 2 2 Temperature compensation 3 139 3 144 Temperature grading B 10 Termination B 4 Text file format 3 214 On screen 3 111 on screen B 9 Thresholds A Trigger contro
211. eeded as in fall time and rise time measure ments May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the minimum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found below the mid point Maximum Amplitude voltage measurement of the maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Mean Amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform Measurement An automated numeric readout that the instrument provides directly from the displayed trace in real time without operator intervention Measurement Parameter One of several controls that the instrument operator can exercise over the automated measurement process Measurement Statistics The accumulation of a history of individual measurement readouts showing the mean and standard deviation of a selected number of samples TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 9 Glossary Glossary 10 Measurement Tracking The process of automatically adjusting the measurement parameters to reflect changes in the trace Mesial The middle point of a range of points The middle measurement point between proximal and distal points for timing measurements and the intermediate height between baseline and topline for amplitude measure ments Minimum Amplitude voltage measurement of the minimum amplitude T
212. efinition Horizontal Scale Versus Record Length Versus Sample Interval Versus Resolution These parameters all relate to each other and specify the horizontal acquisition window Because the horizontal acquisition window must fit in the 10 horizontal division display for most cases you just set the duration of the horizontal acquisition window 10 divs x the scale setting as described in 1 below By also setting a record length in samples you indirectly set the resolution sample interval sample rate for the horizontal acquisition window waveform record The relationships between these horizontal elements for 10 division waveforms follow 1 Time Duration seconds 10 divs window size x Horizontal scale sec div TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms 2 Time Duration seconds Sample Interval seconds sample x Record Length samples where Time Duration is the horizontal acquisition window time duration and Sample Interval sec sample Resolution sec sample 1 Sample Rate samples sec In 2 above note that it is Sample Interval that varies to accommodate the window time duration and its scale setting and the Record Length setting as these latter two elements can be set by you These elements behave as follows m If Record Length or Time Duration vary Sample Interval varies to accom modate up to highest sample rate lowest sample interval highest resolution m If Sample
213. eform on Horz Pos fee so TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 209 Data Input Output Overview Recall a 4 reference waveform from a file Find the source 5 directory Select your 6 waveform 3 210 To recall your waveform Cont To display the Recall Reference Waveform window from the Recall Ref x from File window touch Recall The Recall Reference Waveform window allows navigation to directories lists waveform files in the directory and provides for selection of a waveform file Use the Look in drop down list and buttons to navigate to the directory which contains a waveform that you want to recall If not selected select wfm in the Files of type field to force the file listing to only include these types Use wim for waveforms Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see any other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set to wfm Choose your waveform file by either Clicking an existing name in the file list Clicking in the File name field and typing a new name replacing the default file name Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields Control elements and resources Save wim to Refi Fi Recall Refl from NNA Display Position O 0div Delete Wim Filq
214. ein eile Vie ae aioe eee User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Front Panel Map Quick Access to Most Often Used Features Display Map Single Graticule 0 cece cece eee eee Front Panel I O Map ccc cece cece cece cece eee e eee eees Rear Panel I O Map ccc cece ccc cc cece eee reece eees TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual xiii XV xvii xvii xviii PRP RRR mM BRR fl Ia PRR PR a eae ee oe PRR Re f ONNWNFmMBmanMsWOUOUWUODA ANH WNP I NNNNNNN 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 Table of Contents Reference Acquiring Waveforms cceceeeececeeee PETEERE E 3 Signal Connection and Conditioning 0 0 cece eee eee 3 Connecting and Conditioning Your Signals 005 3 To Set Up Signal Input 0 0 00 ee ee eee eee 3 To Autoset the Instrument 0 0 eee eee eee 3 To Reset the Instrument 00 ec cee eee 1 TO Get More Help eee pth ot a a a a eei 1 Input Conditioning Background 0 0 00 c eee eee eee 1 Setting Acquisition Controls 0 0 0 0 eee e eeri ea eee eee Using the Acquisition Controls 00 eee eee To Set Acquisition Modes 0 cee cee cee eee To Start and Stop Acquisition 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee To S t ROM Moge 0 iise ecopeiectpergie Beye Ett tIS E EA EPE AEEA Acquisition Control Background
215. elayed trigger system 3 49 edge 3 45 glitch trigger 3 60 horizontal position 3 48 logic qualify 3 84 logic trigger definitions 3 62 overview of 3 43 pattern trigger 3 61 posttrigger 3 44 pretrigger 3 44 runt trigger 3 60 select glitch triggering 3 65 select runt triggering 3 67 select setup hold Triggering 3 81 select the polarity 3 67 3 69 select the polarity and width 3 65 select the source 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 3 76 select timeout triggering 3 76 select transition triggering 3 71 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual select width triggering 3 69 sequential triggering 3 85 serial pattern triggering 3 46 3 95 set the data and clock levels 3 82 set the level 3 66 3 70 3 77 set the setup and hold times 3 83 set the thresholds 3 68 set the timer 3 76 set the transition time 3 72 set thresholds 3 80 set to trigger if width 3 66 set to trigger when 3 67 3 70 3 73 3 76 set trigger when 3 81 Setting mode and holdoff 3 75 setup hold trigger 3 62 slope and level 3 48 state trigger 3 62 the trigger event 3 44 timeout trigger 3 61 to check trigger status 3 53 to define a time qualified pattern trigger 3 79 to define new trigger level presets 3 57 to define pattern inputs 3 78 3 85 to define the logic 3 78 3 85 to e mail on trigger 3 58 3 59 to force a trigger 3 57 to logic qualify a trigger 3 84 to select a preset trigger level
216. ensure the instrument acquires the data that you want to display measure or otherwise process To ensure the best possible data for displaying and further processing do the following m Set the vertical scale to control the size of the vertical acquisition window for each channel to capture part or all of the vertical amplitude of the input signal When vertical scaling is set to capture only a fraction of the input signal range for increased detail the vertical offset control may be used to determine which portion of the input signal is captured by the vertical acquisition window m Set horizontal scale to control the size of the horizontal acquisition window to capture as much as you want of the input signal s Set the horizontal position to delay the window relative to a trigger and to control where in the input signal data stream that the horizontal acquisition window acquires For more background on acquisition window concepts see Input Conditioning Background on page 3 11 The instrument can automatically obtain and display a stable waveform of usable size Pushing the Autoset button automatically sets up the instrument controls based on the characteristics of the input signal Autoset is much faster and easier than a manual control by control setup The instrument can also be reset to its factory default settings Usage of some input conditioning controls or features may be limited when other control settings are in effect Vo
217. enter a value in time using the multipurpose knob or the keypad You can set holdoff from 250 ns minimum holdoff available to 12 s maximum available TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 55 Triggering Overview To select a preset trigger 3 56 level Additional trigger parameters Cont 1 Push the ADVANCED button select the A Event tab and touch either of the Trigger Type buttons Select a Trigger Type such as Edge that uses a level adjustment Select Level and touch the keyboard icon to display the keyboard Select either TTL ECL or USER m TTL fixes the trigger level at 1 4 V m ECL fixes the trigger level at 1 3 V m USER fixes the trigger level at the USER preset voltage When you set the volts div smaller than 200 mV the instrument reduces the TTL or ECL trigger levels below standard TTL and ECL levels This reduction occurs because the trigger level range is fixed at 12 divisions from the center At 100 mV the next smaller setting after 200 mV the trigger range is 1 2 V which is smaller than the typical TTL 1 4 V or ECL 1 3 V level Control elements and resources TRIGGER 4 ILD cith Width Runt ma Timeout Patten Y State SetupHold Transition Comm Serial TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To define new trigger level presets To force a trigger A
218. ents of 3 183 phase suppression 3 188 procedure for displaying 3 185 procedure for measuring 3 183 3 192 File formats 3 214 File menu 1 recent setup file B 2 delete all refs B 1 display on off B 1 export B 2 export setup B 2 full screen B 2 graticule B 2 instrument setup B 1 label B 1 measurements B 2 minimize B 2 page setup B 2 position scale B 1 print B 2 print preview B 2 recall default setup B 1 recall waveform B 1 reference setup B 1 reference waveforms B 1 run application B 2 save waveform B 1 select for export B 2 shutdown B 2 waveform B 2 Flat panel display cleaning D 2 Flattop2 window 3 170 3 172 3 179 Flexible control access 3 5 FORCE TRIG button 3 57 Frame graticule 3 116 B 9 horizontal menu 3 38 3 40 Frame count horizontal menu 3 37 Frame length horizontal menu 3 37 Frame horizontal menu 3 40 Frequency A 1 B 12 Glossary 6 Frequency domain controls 3 160 Front panel triggering 3 49 Full graticule 3 116 B 9 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index Full screen B 2 B 3 G Gate controls 3 162 Gated measurements Glossary 6 Gating 3 129 B 12 controls 3 160 Gaussian window 3 170 3 172 3 174 Glitch A Trigger control window 3 65 3 66 either trigger Glossary 6 negative trigger Glossary 6 setup B 8 Glitch trigger 3 60 B 7 Glossary 6 how to set up 3 65 how to setup 3 84 GPIB 3 233 Glossary
219. er A transition slew rate trigger occurs when the trigger source detects a pulse edge that transitions slews between two amplitude levels at a rate faster or slower than you specify The instrument can trigger on positive or negative transitions You can also think of transition triggering as triggering based on the slope change in voltage change in time of a pulse edge Window Trigger A window trigger occurs when the trigger source passes into or out of a window defined by two thresholds The trigger can be time or logic qualified Timeout Trigger A timeout trigger occurs when the trigger source does not detect an expected pulse transition If the pulse transition occurs prior to a specified timeout time the expected case then no trigger results Pattern Trigger A pattern trigger occurs when the logic inputs to the logic function that you select cause the function to become TRUE or at your option FALSE When you use a pattern trigger you define m The precondition for each logic input logic high low or do not care the logic inputs are channels 1 2 3 and 4 m The Boolean logic function select from AND NAND OR and NOR m The condition for triggering whether the trigger occurs when the Boolean function becomes TRUE logic high or FALSE logic low and whether the TRUE condition is time qualified The pattern and state logic choices are summarized in Table 3 2 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual
220. er time on the horizontal axis TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 17 Glossary Glossary 18 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index Index Symbols lt A Trigger control window 3 66 gt A Trigger control window 3 66 Numbers 1 recent setup file 1 B 2 100 Zoom B 5 50 50 Zoom B 5 80 20 Zoom B 5 A A event main trigger setup B 7 A Only trigger how to set up 3 91 A Only A Trigger control window 3 91 A Then B A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 91 3 92 A Trigger holdoff 3 55 level presets 3 56 3 57 trigger when 3 79 A Trigger control window 3 65 3 67 3 71 3 76 3 78 3 80 3 81 3 84 3 91 lt 3 66 gt 3 66 A Only 3 91 AND 3 78 3 80 3 85 Chi Ch2 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 3 76 3 78 3 80 3 82 3 85 clock source 3 82 data source 3 82 define inputs 3 78 3 80 3 82 3 83 3 85 define pattern type 3 78 3 80 3 85 delay time 3 91 either 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 falling edge 3 80 3 82 FALSE 3 78 3 81 glitch 3 65 3 66 3 84 level 3 66 3 70 3 77 logic 3 78 3 80 3 81 lower level 3 74 NAND 3 78 3 80 3 85 negative 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 NOR 3 78 3 80 3 85 OR 3 78 3 80 3 85 pattern 3 78 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual polarity and width 3 65 3 67 3 69 positive 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 pulse 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 3 76 rising edge 3 80 3 82 runt 3 67 3 84 set thresholds 3 78 3 80 3 85 se
221. ering NOTE The communications trigger standards available for an instrument depend on the bandwidth and or configuration of that instrument Table C 19 AMI trigger standards Custom 32Mb 97Mb DS1 32 064 Mb s 97 728 Mb s 1 544 Mb s DS1A DS1C DS2 DS2 Rate Sym 2 048 Mb s 3 152 Mb s 6 312 Mb s 6 312 Mb s DS2 Rate Coax DS3 E2 6 312 Mb s 44 736 Mb s 048 Mb s 8 448 Mb s E3 STS 1 Table C 20 B3ZS trigger standards Custom DS3 STS 1 44 736 Mb s 51 84 Mb s Table C 21 B6ZS trigger standards Custom DS2 DS2 Rate Sym 6 312 Mb s 6 312 Mb s Table C 22 B8ZS trigger standards Custom DS1 DSiC DS2 Rate Coax 1 544 Mb s 3 152 Mb s 6 312 Mb s Table C 23 CMI trigger standards Custom DS4NA E4 139 26 Mb s 139 26 Mb s STM1E STM 0 CMI STS 3 155 52 Mb s 155 52 Mb s 51 84 Mb s E 2 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 39 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 40 Table C 24 HDB3 trigger standards Custom E1 E2 2 048 Mb s 8 448 Mb s E3 DS1A STM 0 HDBx 34 368 Mb s 2 048 Mb s 51 84 Mb s Table C 25 MLT3 trigger standards Custom 100Base TX 125 Mb s Table C 26 NRZ trigger standards Custom 2 5 IBand EFU FC133 2 5 Gb s 125 0 Mb s 132 8 Mb s FC266 FC531 FC1063 FC2125E 265 6 Mb s 531 2 Mb s 1 0625 Gb s 2 125 Gb s FC4250 FS USB G1 ATA G2 ATA 4 25 Gb s 12 Mb s 1 5 Gb s 3 0 Gb s G3 ATA GB Ethernet HS USB 0C1 STMO 6 0 Gb s 1 25 Gb s 480 Mb s 51 84 Mb s OC3 STM1 0C12 STM4
222. erived using all values either above or below the midpoint depending on whether it is defining the high or low reference level This setting is best for examining eye patterns See Figure 3 31 m Noise Optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Tells the instrument if the noise measurement is at the top or the bottom of the eye diagram m Signal Type Optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Lets the instrument know if the signal to be measured is a pulse waveform or an eye diagram Reference Levels Method A second set of levels affect the fidelity of time related measurements the Hi Mid and Lo references For example the measurement system takes risetime measurements from the waveform edge that transitions from the Low to High reference levels You can set the calculation method for each measurement The instrument provides the following calculation methods refer to Figure 3 32 as you read about each method m Relative Reference Calculated as a percentage of the High Low range m Absolute Reference Set by absolute values in user units 3 122 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms High 50 mV High reference Mid reference 0 mV Low reference Low 50 mV Reference level calculation methods j a EO OF ee gt SS fo SER ONE of Figure 3 32 Reference level calculation methods The High and Low levels from wh
223. erpolation Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired It assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve Sin x x is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine waves Actually it is appropriate for general use although it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times especially if you use zoom and the waveform edges are undersampled TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Linear interpolation Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit It assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains NOTE When using either type of interpolation can set the display style so that the real samples are displayed intensified and interpolated samples are dimmed The instructions under Select the Display Style on page 3 114 explain how to turn on intensified samples To Set Display Format The instrument displays waveforms in one of two formats YT or XY Use the procedure that follows to set the display format TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 33 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To select the 1 format 3 34 To set display format To set the display axis format touch the DISP button and select
224. ervening B Events may occur the 100 ns limit is usually not a problem except when the B Event that triggers the oscilloscope immediately precedes the Reset Event Reset becomes TRUE B Event that triggers the scope First B Event after Reset Reset B Event 100 Nanosecond minimum ____ gt Figure 3 25 Reset trigger limitation TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 89 Triggering The flow diagram in Figure 3 26 summarizes all combinations of triggering and horizontal delay Wait for Trigger on A Only with Acquire horizontal delay off fs a ac Wait Trigger on A Only with user specified horizontal delay on horizontal delay time Reset Wait for B B trigger after delay with Wait user specified trigger horizontal delay off trigger delay time event Wait for B Wait B trigger after delay with trigger user specified horizontal delay on event horizontal delay time Wait the B trigger on events with user specified horizontal delay off number of Sa events Wait the Wait B trigger on events with user specified user specified horizontal delay on number of B trigger horizontal events delay time Tif Reset is set waiting on B event s only occurs until Reset condition you specify is satisfied At that point the Trigger system resets and the sequence restarts beginning with waiting for the A Event Figure 3 26 Trigger and Horizontal Delay summary 3
225. es and SS is seconds Use the Completion field buttons to set what the instrument does at the completion of a mask test Related control elements and resources Masks siF ail Test Notifications Failure Completion Stop Acq Beep Print Samples 46000 Fail Thresh 1 SRO SRQ Test Delay AUX Out AUX Out Of Wims 20 Fail Thresh E Test Delay Save Wim Log Date Completion Beep TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview To mask test a waveform cont Set mask test 18 Use the Polarity buttons to set mask and waveform polarity pass and fail Positive tests the positive waveform pulses Negative inverts the parameters mask and tests the negative waveform pulses Both tests the first cont half of the tested waveforms in positive polarity mode then tests the remaining waveforms in negative polarity mode 19 Toggle the Repeat button to On to set the instrument to repeat continue mask testing on the completion of each test TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources Polarity Positive Negative Both Pass Fail Test C 13 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Running a Mask Test Overview Prerequisites 1 Start the mask 2 pass fail test Stop the mask 4 pass fail test C 14 Running a mask test You must have set up t
226. ess Than or Transition Greater Than Eemmpz w La Source Transition Time Trigger Transition Chi Y Upper Level 1V m Less Than triggers when the transition time is less than the time you set Lower Level 800 0mV m Greater Than triggers when the transition time is greater than the time you set If you select Transition Greater Than and the instrument does not trigger it may be because the pulse edge is too fast rather than too slow To check the edge speed switch to edge triggering Then trigger on the pulse edge and determine the time the edge takes to travel between the levels set in the slew rate Thresholds menu The instrument cannot transition trigger on pulse edges that traverse between threshold levels in 600 ps or less Also to reliably transition trigger a pulse must have a width of 8 5 ns or more A pulse of less width may trigger on the wrong slope or not trigger at all Switch to edge triggering and check the pulse width if you can t transition trigger as expected Logic qualify 8 To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger vami the trigger on page 3 84 pattern To set mode 9 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger and holdoff types See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 TDS6000B amp TDS60
227. est supports your data analysis tasks How to Create You create math waveforms when you create a math expression You do so by applying numerical constants math operators and functions to operands which can be channel waveforms reference waveforms math waveforms or measurements scalars You can display and manipulate these derived math waveforms much like you can the channel and reference wave forms see Operations on Math Waveforms on page 3 156 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 147 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Some examples of typical math waveforms follow Table 3 8 Math expressions and the math waveforms produced To Normalize a waveform Source waveform 1 1 6 V Channeli 0 8 V Simulate ac coupling Source waveform T 50v Channel 1 1 0 V o Se Enter this math expression Ch1 Meas1 Meas2 where Ch1 is the waveform shown at left Meas1 Low of Ch1 Meas2 Amplitude of Ch1 Intg Ch1 Meas1 where Ch1 is the waveform shown at left Meas1 Mean or Cycle Mean of Ch1 and get this math waveform Normalized math waveform 1 00 V 0 00 V dc component removed before integration ac integration math waveform Sources Math Waveforms can incorporate the following sources m Channel waveforms m Reference waveforms m Measurements automated measurements that measure channel reference histogram or math waveforms m Math waveforms Sour
228. et the values for ov the upper and lower levels Upper Level i Note You can set the level to a value appropriate to Lower Level 800 0mV either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch Level and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL To use the Trigger Bar to set the threshold levels touch ZG S Gs om B the Disp button select the Objects tab and then touch BE Long to display the long trigger bar Uapentevel g play g trigg er Level The level settings determine the voltage component of slew meee rate Volts Second To finish specifying the slew rate ca transition time set the time component by doing the following steps 6 Touch Width and use the multipurpose knob or keypad Acvert _ see Se ME Eee MEd aeon Aen Source Transition Time Trigger to set the delta time value Trigger Type Sore ee Transition ae awk Upper Level Select 1x e aca Je Lower Level 800 0mV 3 72 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To trigger based on transition time Cont Control elements and resources Set to trigger The instrument compares the pulse edge of the trigger when source against the transition time slew rate set by the upper and lower threshold settings and the delta time set in the window To select whether to trigger on edges with transitions times slew rates faster than or slower than that set by these controls do the following step 7 Touch Transition L
229. etermine measurements A 5 Figure A 2 Eye diagram values cc cecececereeeees A 7 Figure C 1 Masks control window ccceeeeceeceees C 4 Figure C 2 Communication signal trigger functions C 5 Figure C 3 Communication measurement functions C 6 Figure C 4 Serial pattern trigger control window C 7 Figure C 5 Eye diagram and optical values 006 C 42 Figure C 6 Eye diagram and optical values 0005 C 52 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Table of Contents List of Tables Table 1 1 Additional accessory connection information 1 8 Table 1 2 Vertical settings cece cece cece eee eeee 1 24 Table 3 1 Additional resolution bits eee e cece eeee 3 19 Table 3 2 Pattern and state logic cece cece cece eee eens 3 62 Table 3 3 Defining and displaying waveforms 3 100 Table 3 4 Operations performed based on the waveform type 3 101 Table 3 5 Customizable display elements 02000 3 111 Table 3 6 Cursor functions types essessssssssesoosesoes 3 130 Table 3 7 Cursor units asees K cece cece EERE EEEN EE E 3 133 Table 3 8 Math expressions and the math waveforms produced 3 148 Table 3 9 Spectral analyzer controls sesssssssessesssss 3 161 Table 3 10 Window characteristics 0c ccc ce eee eeees 3 172 Table A 1 Supported measurements and their definit
230. etup window touch the Vertical or memen ee Horizontal Position or Factor controls to assign the 900 oaas multipurpose knobs to the factor and position _ Factor _ Factor controls m Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to change eee eee the zoom position and factor The knob readout som oodivs also displays the zoom position and factor You can fie TERT also use the up and down arrows to change the mm 6 to zoom factor Ba EW Reset zoom 10 To reset all Horizontal zoom factors to their defaults from the Zoom control window touch Setup 11 Touch Reset to reset the zoom factor and position TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 109 Displaying Waveforms Overview To Lock and Automatically Scroll Zoom Areas For further assistance To zoom waveforms Cont 12 To display the zoom Lock and Scroll setup window touch Setup in the controls window Select the Lock and Scroll tab 13 To select which zoom areas to lock touch Zoom 1 Zoom 2 Zoom 3 or Zoom 4 to toggle the areas you want to lock on check mark 14 To lock control of the zoom areas selected in the previous step touch Lock to toggle it on 15 To control the automatic scrolling of the selected zoom areas touch an AutoScroll control Forward Fast forward Reverse Fast reverse Jannu Stop 16 To change the scrolling speed touch Scroll Speed and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to change the scrolling speed 17 T
231. ew Zoom Controls 0 eee eee eee eee 3 105 Using with Waveforms ersa ti e a eee cece cece eens 3 105 To Zoom Waveforms 0 ee cece eee eens 3 105 Customizing the Display 0 0 0 e eee a ee eee 3 110 Using Display Controls ie riser e cece eee 3 110 Set Display Stylese ces e Sika hgh eS ee a Eee 3 114 Customize Graticule and Waveforms 0 0 e cee e eee 3 116 Measuring Waveforms ccccccccccccscccccccsscsceeees 3 119 Taking Automatic Measurements 00 ce eee cece eee eee 3 119 Using Automatic Measurements 00 0 3 121 To Take Automatic Measurements 0 00 0 c eee eee eee 3 123 To Localize a Measurement 0 0 cee cee eee 3 128 Taking Cursor Measurements 0 0 cece cece eee eee ene eee 3 130 USING CUO oo po Teyat pE E EE a EE hele e EET E 3 131 TO Set the Cursor SOULCES sea teratai as ere EEEIEE EE ERS 3 134 Taking HISTORINE eos o E EEEE le gee EOAR TEE 3 136 Using aai E E E Aree E SE 3 137 To Start and Reset Histogram Counting 0008 3 137 HistogramMeasurements 00 cece cece eens 3 139 Optimizing Measurement Accuracy 0 cece cece eee eee eee ee 3 139 To Compensate the Instrument 00 0 ec eee eee ee eee 3 139 To Connect the Probe Calibration Fixture 0000 3 141 To Calibrate Probes yur eae Ore ee Sere tls SES Areas a gre tls EE 3 141 To D skew Channels oropesa oreta i os er
232. ew este SR we eR ee C 1 Installing Optional Serial Mask Testing and Serial Pattern Trigger Functions C 3 Serial Mask Testing Functions 0 2 0 cece e eee eens C 4 Accessing Serial Pattern Trigger Functions 0 000 000 0080 C 7 Mask Testine 2 cache cre eid whee ee Ne De ke Rel eo KOve echt C 8 Communication Comm Triggering 0 cece eee eee C 28 Serial Pattern Trigger 0 eee eee eee C 32 Supported Mask Types and Standards 0 0 0 0 c ee eee eee C 34 Supported Communication Trigger Codes and Standards C 38 Automatic Communication Signal Measurements 04 C 41 Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements 0 002 e ee eee eee C 42 Supported Mask Types and Standards 0 eee eee eee C 45 Supported Communication Trigger Codes and Standards C 49 Automatic Communication Signal Measurements 00 C 51 Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements 0 0 2 e ee eee eee C 52 Appendix D Cleaning 0 ccc cece cece cece eee ee eee D 1 Exterior Cleanin Seyru carinis can Wena cen eOe bah toe a e acetals D 1 Flat Panel Display Cleaning 0 0 eee cece eee eee eee D 2 Glossary Index TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual v Table of Contents List of Figures vi Figure 1 1 Locations of peripheral connectors on rear panel Figure 1 2 Powering on the instrument ee
233. eye The base of the eye The peak to peak value for the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter PP TCrossipp The RMS value of the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter RMS TCrosstgigma 6 x Jitter RMS The peak to peak value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Noise Pk Pk PTOPok pk or PBASEpk pk The RMS value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Noise RMS PTopsigma or PBASEsigma TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 1 Comm measurements and their definition Cont Name Definition le S N Ratio Ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user S N Ratio PTop PBase PTopsigma Or PBaS sigma vay Duty Cycle Distortion The peak to peak time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the MidRef as a percent of the eye period DCD 100 x TDCD _p TCross2nean TCrossImean Quality Factor Ratio of eye size to noise g Quality Factor PTopmean PBaSemean PTO0Psigma PBasesigma Levels Used in Taking Amplitude Timing and Area Measurements Refer to Figure A 1 and the descriptions that follow to interpret the definitions of waveforms in categories Amplitude Timing and Area Low reference mid reference and high reference are the default reference levels and are adjustable High Min
234. f the product and its functions from several viewpoints m Reference comprises an encyclopedia of topics that describe the instrument interface and features and gives background and basic information on how to use them The online help onboard the instrument application describes the interface features and their usage detailed descriptions of all program ming commands are found in the Programmer Online Guide m Appendices provides additional information including cleaning information TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual xvii Preface Related Manuals and Online Documents This manual is part of a document set of standard accessory manuals and online documentation this manual mainly focuses on installation background and user information needed to use the product features See the following list for other documents supporting instrument operation and service Document name Description Online Help An online help system integrated with the User Interface application that ships with this product The help is preinstalled in the instrument Reference A quick reference to major features of the instrument and how they operate Programmer Online Guide An alphabetical listing of the programming commands and other information related to controlling the instrument over the GPIB Specification amp Performance Verification Provides the instrument s specifications testing equipment and performance verification procedures
235. faults Z Tolerance testing except Pass Fail Test Repeat is selected fot Wms failure E Completion 00 Stop Acq The number of samples or waveforms to test the Fail Thresh minimum number of waveforms to test and the delay before the test begins eee Notifications actions when the test fails or completes Polarity of the signal to test m Start the test and cause the test to repeat View the test 11 View the results of the pass fail test in this example there have _ fj ee ee results been no hits and the current test is passing paeron lis m Pass Fail Test Summary displays the number of Pongo J samples waveforms tested the total number of hits maoni failures and settings that you selected for the test i m Hits per segment displays the number of hits in each segment of the mask Pass Fail Test allows you to reset the test and to turn the test on and off _ Triggers set 12 When you turn on masks the instrument automatically sets up automatically the triggers To see the trigger settings used by this example do the following step Event If A gt B Seq B Event Mode A Comm Acquire Source Coding Comm Trigger Level From the button bar touch Trig The instrument selected Comm Trigger Tyee T RDI 660 0nv triggers the Ch 1 source HDB3 coding the Data type and the aa ae ee ae DS1A standard and set the bit rate and pulse form E m Loony Bit Rate 2 048Mb s Pulse Form For more 13 For
236. ffset Adjust the Ch1 Offset to 0 16 V TDS6000B Series 80 mV TDS6000C Series using the multipurpose knob 5 Set the Vertical SCALE to 100 mV per division 6 Verify that the main trigger system operates Confirm that the following statements are true m The trigger level readout for the A main trigger system changes with the trigger LEVEL knob m The trigger LEVEL knob can trigger and untrigger the square wave signal as you rotate it Leave the signal untriggered m Pushing the front panel trigger LEVEL knob sets the trigger level to the 50 amplitude point of the signal and triggers the signal that you just left untriggered Leave the signal triggered 7 Verify that the delayed trigger system operates a Set up the delayed trigger m From the Trig menu select A B Sequence This displays the A gt B Sequence tab of the trigger setup control window m Touch the Trig After Time button under A Then B m Touch the B Trig Level control in the control window b Confirm that the following statements are true m The trigger level readout for the B trigger system changes as you turn the lower multipurpose knob TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Incoming Inspection m As you rotate the lower multipurpose knob the square wave FAST EDGE signal can become triggered and untriggered Leave the signal triggered c Verify the delayed trigger counter m Set trigger mode to norm m Double touch the Tri
237. form record to the trigger point in percent of samples before the trigger When horizontal delay is off the trigger point and the horizontal reference are at the same point in the waveform record Sample interval First sampled and digitized point in record Trigger point gt Horizontal delay Record length gt pA Horizontal reference Horizontal position Figure 3 10 The waveform record and its defining parameters As Figure 3 10 shows the instrument acquires points in order from left to right When all the points in the waveform record have been sampled and digitized the waveform record is in acquisition memory and becomes available for display or use in math waveforms storage and so on For a control oriented discussion of the waveform record see Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 14 and Horizontal Scale vs Record Length vs Sample Interval vs Resolution on page 3 15 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Real Time Sampling The two general methods of sampling are real time and equivalent time This instrument uses both real and equivalent time sampling In real time sampling the instrument digitizes all the points it acquires after one trigger event see Figure 3 11 Always use real time sampling to capture single shot or transient events een e ea TE aias om EEEN Figure 3 11 Real time sampling E
238. formats are binary and hexadecimal Serial Pattern TOOT 200 OOK 200000 0 0K XK X00 2000 200K 20000000K XK XX Editor Close Format Bina C 33 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Serial trigger setup cont Edit the serial 11 trigger pattern 12 13 14 15 16 17 Apply serial 18 trigger pattern data 19 20 Touch the Editor button The instrument displays the Serial Trigger edit controls To enter the serial data pattern in binary format touch the Format button and select Binary To enter the serial data in hexadecimal format touch the Format button and select Hex The editor updates the keypad for the selected format Touch the Home button to move the insertion cursor to the right end of the pattern string Touch the left arrow or right arrow button to move the insertion cursor left or right in the pattern field You can also use the mouse or the keyboard arrow keys to move the insertion cursor Touch the Backspace button to erase the character to the left of the insertion cursor Touch the Clear button to erase all pattern data from the pattern field Touch the appropriate keypad character to enter a character You can also use the keyboard to enter binary or hexadecimal characters You can enter a maximum of 64 binary characters or 16 hexadecimal characters Touch the Apply button to apply the serial pattern to trigger the instrument
239. ftware products may be compatible but have not been tested by Tektronix If the instrument malfunctions after you install software you should uninstall the software and then reinstall the instrument application to restore proper operation Exiting the Instrument Application Before installing other desktop applications you should exit the instrument application Follow these steps to exit the instrument application NOTE If you are not using a USB keyboard and mouse you must power on the instrument after attaching your keyboard and mouse Connect a keyboard and mouse to the instrument While holding down the CTRL and ALT keys press the DELETE key Select Task Manager Se OF In the Applications tab select TekScope exe and then select End Process to stop the instrument application The instrument application will restart after you restart the entire system following the installation of the desktop application software Some options contain software that must be installed and or enabled To do the installation follow the specific instructions that come with the option Tektronix provides a key that you must enter one time to enable all the options that you have purchased for your instrument To enter the key select Option Installation in the Utilities menu and then follow the on screen instructions TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation Removing the Removable Hard Drive The removable hard
240. function 8 If Type is set to Clock the instrument displays the Polarity button Touch Polarity to set the clock signal polarity for the instrument to trigger on Pos itive or Neg ative clock edges e Select comm Depending on the code setting the instrument displays different A Pulse Form trigger pulse sets of Pulse Form buttons Touch the appropriate Pulse form form button to select a pulse form setting where each button means A AMI Isolated 1 Isolated 1 and eye diagram CMI 1 binary 1 0 binary zero 1 inverse of Pulse Form binary 1 and eye diagram E NRZ and MLT3 eye diagram only no buttons displayed ES TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 29 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Communication triggering cont Related control elements and resources Select comm 10 Depending on the code and standard setting the instrument trigger displays the Clock Level field with one or two threshold fields threshold levels Touch each Level field and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the comm signal threshold level values Comm Trigger 70 0m Lower Level 70 0m C 30 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Recovered Clock R Clk The following are key recovered clock R Clk points Key Points Recovered clock is a synchronous clock signal derived from the serial c
241. functions Trigger An event that marks time zero in the waveform record It results in acquisi tion and display of the waveform Trigger level The vertical level the trigger signal must cross to generate a trigger on edge trigger mode Vertical acquisition window The vertical range of the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires Vertical bar cursors The two vertical bars you position to measure the time parameter of a waveform record The instrument displays the value of the active moveable cursor with respect to the trigger and the time value between the bars Waveform The shape or form visible representation of a signal TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Waveform database mode An acquisition mode that processes and displays a larger sample of data The waveform database is a three dimensional accumulation of source waveform data over several acquisitions In addition to amplitude and timing informa tion the database includes a count of the number of times a specific waveform point has been acquired Waveform interval The time interval between record points as displayed XY format A display format that compares the voltage level of two waveform records point by point It is useful for studying phase relationships between two waveforms YT format The conventional instrument display format It shows the voltage of a waveform record on the vertical axis as it varies ov
242. fy must drive the logic function high TRUE for less than the time you specify Conversely the TRUE for More Than item requires the boolean function to be TRUE for longer than the time that you specify Note the position of the trigger indicator Triggering occurs at the point that the instrument determines that the logic function that you specify is TRUE within the time that you specify The instrument determines the trigger point in the following manner m t waits for the logic condition to become TRUE m t starts timing and waits for the logic function to become FALSE m t compares the times and if the time TRUE is longer for TRUE for more than or shorter for TRUE for less than then it triggers a waveform display at the point the logic condition became FALSE This time can be and usually is different from the time set In the figure the delay between the vertical bar cursors is the time the logic function is TRUE Since this time is more 5 2 us than that set in the TRUE for More Than item 2 us the instrument issues the trigger at that point not at the point at which it has been TRUE for 2 us TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 Pattern More Than
243. g Delay control to pop up a numeric keypad for that control m Touch the keypad to enter a trigger delay time of 1000 ms and then touch Enter m Verify that the trigger READY indicator on the front panel flashes about once every second as the waveform is updated on screen 8 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the equipment from the channel input and the FAST EDGE output Perform the Extended Diagnostics Extended diagnostics and self calibration perform a more detailed functionality check than the incoming inspection and Power on diagnostics NOTE Allow a 20 minute warm up before running the self calibration Disconnect any attached signal from the instrument Then select the Utilities menu Run the self calibration followed by the extended diagnostics by first selecting the Instrument Calibration see page 3 139 for additional information on signal path compensation and then the Instrument Diagnostics tabs Results of the tests display on their property pages Checking the Underlying To check the hardware and Windows software underlying the instrument UI user System Optional interface run the Checklt Utilities from the Windows Start menu 1 Minimize the instrument application before running the external diagnostics From the File menu select Minimize Touch Start then touch Programs in the Start Menu Finally touch CheckIt Utilities From the Go To menu select and run the tests you want to perform Check
244. ge Setup Time 8 0ns Is Hold Time Trigger if Logic Y Pattern See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 3 83 Triggering The instrument recognizes the violation and triggers at the clock edge E EE IE berber E EAEL BALS AASL SLA GE AA DA Data Ch1 transition occurs within 6 59 ns before the clock violating the hold time limit HS 500mV 2 Dely 6 592ns Wea Tl 8 0rs Maa s5nomv_ O 2 2 0rs Cursors measure the setup hold at oors l At 100 OMH2 J violation zone which equals setup time hold time 10 ns 10 0nsidiv 10 0GS s 100ps pt SUI Figure 3 22 Triggering on a Setup Hold time violation Logic Qualify a Trigger When you logic qualify a trigger type the instrument will trigger when the inputs to the logic function that you select cause the function to become TRUE or at your option FALSE To logic qualify a trigger do the following proce dures Overview Trigger on a pattern Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed and operating The acquisition system should be set to Run and the vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropriately for the signal to be acquired See page 3 17 for acquisiti
245. ge Envelope This section contains background information on the data sampling and acquisition process that can help you more effectively set up the acquisition window of each channel This section describes the following m The acquisition hardware m The sampling process sampling modes and the waveform record m Normal acquisition cycles Before a signal can be acquired it must pass through the input channel where it is scaled and digitized Each channel has a dedicated input amplifier and digitizer as shown in Figure 3 8 each channel can produce a stream of digital data from which waveform records can be ex tracted See Signal Connection and Condi tioning on page 3 2 for further description of scaling positioning and DC offsetting of channels TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Figure 3 8 Digitizer configuration Sampling Process Acquisition is the process of sampling the analog input signal of an input channel converting it into digital data and assembling it into a waveform record which is then stored in acquisition memory Sampling then is the process that provides a waveform record per trigger event see Figure 3 10 on page 3 30 The signal parts within the vertical range of the amplifier are digitized See Figure 3 9 5 0 V 5 0 V oV ov OV OV or 5 0V 5 0V Input signal Sampled points Digital values Figure 3 9 Digital acquisition sampling
246. ger _ _ __ source A trigger point Start posttrigger acquisition Trig After Time i lt Waveform record gt A trigger point A trigger source B trigger source lt Trigger delay time r B trigger point Start posttrigger acquisition on first B trigger after delay Trig on nth Event x Waveform record ____ A trigger point A trigger source B trigger source la v B trigger point Start posttrigger Waiting for nth event acquisition on nt B event where n 5 Figure 3 23 Triggering with Horizontal Delay off TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 87 Triggering Triggering with Horizontal Delay On You can use horizontal delay when you want to acquire a waveform record that is separated from the trigger event by a significant interval of time The horizontal delay function can be used with any trigger setup You can turn horizontal delay on and off from the front panel the Horizontal Acquisition control window and many of the Trigger control windows Figure 3 24 compares the sequential trigger choices A Only Trig After Time and Trig on nt Event when horizontal delay is on Each illustration shows where pretrigger and posttrigger data is acquired relative to the trigger event Pretrigger record Posttrigger record A Main Only with Horizontal Delay Waveform record _ gt A tr
247. gering which describes how to combine the A Main and B Delayed trigger systems to capture unique complex events m Comm Triggering which describes triggering on communications signals m Serial Pattern Triggering which describes triggering on serial data patterns The Pinpoint Trigger System This instrument can trigger on events of interest in high speed debug and validation applications Its Pinpoint trigger system provides trigger sensitivity up to 4 divisions at 9 GHz allowing capture of glitches approximately 100 ps wide and trigger jitter to less than 1 1 ps rms The Pinpoint trigger system also comes with a robust suite of advanced trigger types that is usable on both A and B triggers allows logic qualification of either the A or B trigger event by other channels and it adds Reset capability to at reset the trigger circuit after a specific number of events or a specific time Together these features support capture of events based on the most complex trigger event or sequence of trigger events TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 43 Triggering Triggering Concepts 3 44 The Trigger Event Acquisition system Horizontal timebase Display Wim transform system gt N Triggers determine when the instrument stops acquiring and displays a wave form They help create meaningful waveforms from unstable jumbles or blank screens See Figure 3 16 The instrument has simple e
248. gger mode requires a trigger to acquire ute exer a waveform f Cons ERED ARM m AUTO trigger mode acquires a waveform even if a D Gm CI HEADY trigger does not occur after a time out a Be aware that in AUTO mode the acquired waveforms tal TE nee may not be triggered aS Sey ce eS 3 52 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering To Check Trigger Status To see the state and setup of the triggering circuit use the trigger status lights readout and screen Overview To check trigger status Control elements and resources Trigger status 1 To quickly determine trigger status check the three TRIGGER from trigger sta status lights TRIG D READY and ARM in the Trigger tus lights control area SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE m TRIG D on the instrument has recognized a valid trigger and is filling the posttrigger portion of the Coma GEREY Ar Com cere CO READY waveform REJECT ae m READY on the instrument can accept and is a 5 oust EEL sg waiting for a valid trigger to occur EX m ARM on the trigger circuitry is filling the pretrigger portion of the waveform record m TRIG D and READY on valid A trigger recognized waiting for a delayed trigger When a delayed trigger is recognized the posttrigger portion of the delayed waveform will fill ARM TRIG D and READY off the digitizer is stopped Trigger status 2 To quickly determine the settings of some key trigger
249. gger parameters are accessible only through the Trigger control window m Holdoff m Trigger level presets m Force trigger m Single sequence m E mail on Trigger Use the procedures that follow to set up these additional trigger parameters For more information display online help while performing the procedure 3 54 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview Additional trigger parameters To set holdoff You can change the holdoff time to help stabilize triggering See Trigger Modes and Trigger Holdoff beginning on page 3 46 for a description of trigger holdoff To set holdoff do the following steps 1 Push the ADVANCED button and select the Mode tab Control elements and resources TRIGGER 4 SLD 2 Select Auto Time or Random BeEvent A Edge Acquire m The Auto holdoff varies with the horizontal scale and is equal to 5 divisions times the current time division setting Auto maintains a good value for multipurpose triggering Holdoff Triggers are ignored during Holdatt Acquisition Acquisition Trigger Holdoff m Time lets you enter a holdoff that may allow more nae COROT LA stable triggering than the Auto holdoff This time is 2500s nov used at all horizontal scale settings Close m Random selects a new random holdoff time for each acquisition cycle 3 To change the holdoff time when Time is selected select Trig Holdoff and
250. gure 3 49 Example of scallop loss for a Hanning window without zero fill esc ied inn Fe Wess a ie LS Se RE as Cae ee 3 173 Figure 3 50 Time and frequency graphs for the Gaussian window 3 174 Figure 3 51 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Rectangular window ccc ccc ec cece cee ee ee eevees 3 175 Figure 3 52 Time and frequency graphs of the Hamming window 3 176 Figure 3 53 Time and frequency graphs for the Hanning window 3 177 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual vii Table of Contents viii Figure 3 54 Time and frequency graphs for the Kaiser Bessel WINN OW io iaie aro se E AEN E wane ENE NEEN E 3 178 Figure 3 55 Time and frequency graphs of the Blackman Harris SWAN OW ira E Ea EE eevee EA A E N ENE N 3 179 Figure 3 56 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Flattop2 Window aese aaa iaa wean pedo vo wh era NE orate OENE NENE wrens tere 3 180 Figure 3 57 Tek Exponential window in the time and the frequency domains cece cece cece reece eee eeees 3 181 Figure 3 58 How aliased frequencies appear in a spectral waveform 3 183 Figure 3 59 Auto increment file name feature 6 3 201 Figure 3 60 Print window ccc cee ce cece cree eeeeees 3 228 Figure 3 61 Hardcopy formats cece cece cere eeees 3 229 Figure 3 62 Page setup window cccecececececeees 3 230 Figure 3 63 Print preview window ceceeeeceeceees 3 231 Figure A 1 Levels used to d
251. h 3 60 window trigger 3 61 Triggering from the front panel 3 49 True for less than main trigger menu 3 79 True for more than main trigger menu 3 79 TRUE A Trigger control window 3 78 3 81 TTL 3 66 3 72 3 77 3 82 A Trigger level 3 57 trigger level 3 56 c ndershoot Glossary 10 ndo autoset B 3 B 5 npacking 1 5 pdate software 1 3 pgrade software 1 3 RL Tektronix xvii ser files backing up 1 9 ser palette B 10 ser preferences B 16 SER A Trigger level 3 56 3 57 sing the acquisition controls 3 18 sing the waveform display 3 98 tilities menu AUX Out configuration B 15 external signals B 15 GPIB configuration B 15 instrument calibration B 15 instrument diagnostics B 15 multipurpose knobs B 16 option installation B 16 reference selection B 15 set time and date B 15 GGG GGG EARRAS Index 22 Tek Secure B 15 user preferences B 16 V Value count B 12 Value mean B 12 Variable persistence 3 114 3 115 B 9 display control window 3 113 Varying vertical offset 3 14 V bars B 11 Vectors 3 111 3 113 B 9 display control window 3 113 Verification incoming inspection procedure 1 19 Version number B 16 Vert B 12 Vertical acquisition window Glossary 16 acquisition window considerations 3 12 bar cursors Glossary 16 control window deskew 3 141 cursors 3 130 3 132 deskew 3 141 Glossary 3 Vertical menu attenuation B 4 bandwidth B 4 coupling B 4 deskew B 4 d
252. haracteristics that you are interested in The Blackman Harris has a low amount of energy leakage compared to the other windows The Hanning has the narrowest resolution bandwidth but higher side lobes Amplitude n requency bins Figure 3 53 Time and frequency graphs for the Hanning window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 177 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Amplitude Time 67 dB side lobe dB 0 ELSI E ETSI S E A E t r T 3 Frequency bins Figure 3 54 Time and frequency graphs for the Kaiser Bessel window 3 178 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Amplitude Time 92 dB side lobe i ii i ATT d i OURRE GER AL ct sue eesti Nita Frequency bins Figure 3 55 Time and frequency graphs of the Blackman Harris window m Flattop2 Window This window has the lowest scallop loss of any of the windows see Figure 3 56 It also has a wider resolution bandwidth but lower side lobe attenuation Also it is unique because the time domain shape has negative values TDS6000B am
253. he ae tenes ea dee wed dene a ie Checking the Environment Requirements 0 00 00000005 Connecting Peripherals cin conga gin Vea ve aes ewe Seale Powering On the Instrument 0 0 eee eee ee eee eens Shutting Down the Instrument 0 00 cece eee eee eee Backing Up User Files ne cnans needed aa hen eee A ee eas eh Installing Software wow sgn share hy 6 Aa es SE RG a eae en Removing the Removable Hard Drive 000 0 cece eee Reinstalling the Removable Hard Drive 000 000 ee eee Enabling or Disabling Your LAN and Connecting to a Network Setting up a Dual Display 0 0 cee eee eee eee eee Incoming Inspection cc cece cece cece eee eee eeeees SE MLC STS creat cits E esos pts Sa A asa Baers pete hay atone a eee tout pes UniCtrOnial LEStS fiasco sas arses as cipe N a dace es BANG Wi ciple Gav Ba lei ea gece AEA Check Vertical Operation 0 0 cece cee eee eee eee Check Horizontal Operation 0 eee eee cece eens Check Trigger Operation 0 0 eee ec eee eee ee eens Perform the Extended Diagnostics 0 0 cece eee eee eee Operating Basics Operational Maps ccc cece cece cece r cece erence ecees Documentation Map cece cece cece cece cece e erences System Overview Maps ccc eee e cece e rere ence cees Functional Model Map 0 eee eect ene e ree Process Overview Mapes i icerectina aw
254. he commands available from the Display menu Table B 6 Display menu commands Menu Display Setup Appearance Screen Text Objects Colors Display Style Display Persistence Waveform Interpolation Graticule Style TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Submenu Dots Vectors Intensified Samples Reset All No Persistence Infinite Persistence Variable Persistence Persistence Controls Sin x x Linear Full Grid Cross Hair Frame Function Displays the Display Setup window select the display appearance display screen text display screen objects and select colors Displays the Appearance tab of the Display Setup window select the display style persistence intensity format and interpolation Displays the Screen Text tab of the Display Setup window You can enter text that you can display and position on screen Changing the waveform position does not move screen text also see label Table B 3 on page B 4 Displays the Objects tab of the Display Setup window select the graticule style trigger level marker and date and time display Displays the Colors tab of the Display Setup window select the color of screen objects Choose Dots to display each waveform as a series of dots Choose Vectors to display vectors or lines between the dots Chose Intensified Samples to display actual samples as bright dots interpolated dots are blacked out Resets the display persistence Choose f
255. he eye period DCD sec 100 x TDCD _ TCross2nean TCroSs2mean Quality Factor Ratio of eye size to noise g Quality Factor PTopmean PBaSemean PTOPsigma PBasesigma Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements All eye diagram measurements are based on the power level the voltage level or the time locations of edges within each acquisition Figure C 6 shows an eye diagram and the areas from which values are taken that are used to calculate measurements PTop TCross TCrosso we PCross A PBase Eye Aperture Figure C 6 Eye diagram and optical values C 52 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering P Values The P values include the mean and standard deviation of the vertical location of PTop and PBase These areas are used with a specified sample size to statistical ly measure the following values m PTopmean the mean value of PTop m PToPsigma the standard deviation of PTop m PToppk pk the vertical peak to peak deviation of PTop m PBasemean the mean value of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasegioma the standard deviation of PBase within the Eye Aperture m PBasepk pk the vertical peak to peak deviation of PBase 1 The Eye Aperture defaults to the center 20 of the interval from TCross to TCrossp T1 Values The T1 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the leftmost crossing p
256. he file format a S o raai File name B0709 103949 bmp E Save as type Image files bmp sd Cancel I Auto incrementfile name Export Setup Help Select a 23 Use the Save in drop down list and buttons to navigate EEE xj destination to the directory in which you want to save the file Save in E mages ade 3 220 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Name the file 24 Select the file type in the Save as type drop down list to Edit path and file name force the file listing to only include these types Use dat for waveforms File name 20225 22232 Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily Sa see any other types of files in the current directory rine Sarre eka Otherwise leave it as set by the Export Setup control er window Access to virtual keyboard 25 Specify the filename in which to save your waveform You can m Use the default name and directory appearing in the File name field m Rename the file by typing a new name into the File name field m Select the Auto increment file name check box to save a series of files without typing in a new name Ee EE each time For more information see Using a X ip hd Auto Increment File Name on page 3 200 sees EE p E Sutoincrement ile name Export Setup Help Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon butt
257. he input waveform source Tolerance Set the mask margin tolerance values Pass Fail Setup Set the mask test pass fail parameters Pass Fail Results Display the pass fail test results Accessing Serial Mask Testing Communications Trigger Functions To access the Serial Mask Testing communication trigger functions do the following steps 1 Touch the Trig tool bar button The instrument displays the Trigger control window 2 Select the A Event tab TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering 3 Touch either of the Trigger Type buttons Select the Comm Trigger Type The instrument displays the communication signal trigger functions as shown in Figure C 2 ac B Event Mode A Comm Acquire Source Coding Comm Trigger Level Trigger Type EA mMm Y r 838 34mV comm Y es Lower Level t Select Daai e 83834m Bit Rate 1 544Mb s Pulse Form Figure C 2 Communication signal trigger functions Table C 2 describes the communication trigger functions Refer to the Mask Testing beginning on page C 8 of this manual as well as the online help for more information about these functions Table C 2 Communication trigger functions Menu Source Type Polarity Coding Standard Bit Rate Comm Trigger Upper Lower Level Pulse Form Function Sets the waveform data source Ch1 Ch4 Sets the waveform source type Data Clock or Recovered Clock
258. he instrument to perform mask testing as described in Mask Test Setup on page C 9 From the button bar touch Masks and select the Pass Fail Results tab The instrument opens the Pass Fail Results control window Touch the Pass Fail Test On Off button to turn on mask pass fail testing You can touch Reset prior to running tests to clear the Pass Fail Test Summary fields You can also use the Pass Fail Test button in the Pass Fail Setup control window The instrument begins mask testing and displays the test summary information in the Pass Fail Test Summary fields If a mask has more than three segments the window displays a horizontal scroll bar below the Hits per Segment field that lets you scroll the field to view other segment hit data Touch the Pass Fail test button to turn off mask pass fail testing Testing will also stop when the testing meets the parameters in the Pass Fail Setup control window To start and stop mask tests do the following procedure Control elements and resources est Summary 16000 Hits per segment Seg2 Pass Fail Test Pass Fail Test Summary Samples Tested 22000 outof 16000 Status Total Hits Passed 0 Source Chi Hits per segment Source Seg1 Seg2 Ch1 0 0 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Creating a User Mask from Refer to Mask Key Points on page C 26 before creating or editing a mask To a Defined Mask
259. he type Timeout the instrument will trigger if a pulse Pulse Timeout transition does not occur within a specified time limit That is the trigger will occur when depending on the polarity that you select the signal stays higher or stays lower than the trigger level for the timeout value To set up for timeout triggering do the following procedures Overview Trigger based on pulse timeout Control elements and resources Select timeout 1 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of triggering the Trigger control window and touch Select Touch Timeout Aevent f A gt B Sec ve p een Aequire Trigger Type a na ngger timeout Y O Em zony Tans Trigger When Stays High StaysLow Either Select the 3 To specify which channel becomes the trigger source EEE kaama aa x ource Timeout Trigger source touch Source and select the source from the list Trigger Type es EGE a E ch3 500 0ps Ch4 rigger When StaysHigh Stays Low Either fad KEN C Set to trigger 4 Touch Stays High Stays Low or Either from the Trigger when When window Timeout Trigger Timeout Trigger m Stays High causes a trigger if the signal stays higher than the trigger level for longer than the nm timeout value m Stays Low causes a trigger if the signal stays lower than the trigger level for longer than the timeout value m Either causes a trigger if the signal stays lower or stays higher than the trigger level for longer than the timeout v
260. holds Note To use the trigger bar to set the threshold levels touch the Disp button select the Objects tab and then touch Long to display the long trigger bar Note the position of the trigger indicator Triggering occurs at the point the pulse returns over the first lower threshold going negative without crossing the second threshold level upper The polarity selected in the Polarity window determines the order that the threshold must be crossed for a runt trigger to occur Positive requires that the lower threshold must be first crossed going positive then recrossed going negative without the upper threshold being crossed at all m Negative requires that the upper threshold must be first crossed going negative then recrossed going positive without the lower threshold being crossed at all m Either requires only that either one of the thresholds must be first crossed going in either direction then recrossed going in the opposite direction without the other threshold being crossed at all For all three polarity settings triggering occurs at the point the runt pulse recrosses its first threshold Logic qualify 8 To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger the trigger on page 3 84 Control elements and resources Source Runt Trigger thi Vv T jer Upper Level s Deo aR APE soaps Lower Level z Source Runt Trigger Runt E Jase a Selected trigger bar at Unselected trigger bar upper thre
261. horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 1 standard deviation U 2 3 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 2 standard deviation U 3 3 vertical or horizontal bars indicating the mean and mean 3 standard deviation TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual A 11 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 2 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Comm Ext Ratio 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye measurement top and eye base eee Ext Ratio 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and eye base Ext Ratio dB 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and eye base Eye Height 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window top right bottom and left In detailed mode there are 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and base Eye Width 2 horizontal arrows indicating the eye width at the crossing level In detailed mode there are 2 vertical bars indicating the crossing times Crossing In Detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base 1 horizontal arrow indicating the crossing position In standard mode 1 horizontal arrow indicating the crossing position Eye Top 2 horizontal arrows and 1 horizontal bar indicating the eye window left the eye window right and the eye top E
262. hutting down 1 9 Signal connection and conditioning 3 2 Signal path compensation 3 139 3 144 Sin x x 3 114 B 9 Sin x x interpolation 3 32 3 113 Glossary 8 SINGLE 3 22 3 24 Single sequence 3 22 Single sequence off 3 24 SINGLE TRIG button 3 58 Single shot sampling 3 31 Site considerations 1 6 Size zoom B 5 B 7 Slew rate trigger 3 61 Glossary 15 600 ps limitation 3 73 7 5 ns limitation 3 73 how to set up 3 71 3 96 Slope Glossary 15 Slope main trigger menu 3 71 Slope trigger 3 48 Snapshot B 11 Index 18 Snapshot of measurements 3 128 Software upgrade 1 3 Software installation 1 10 1 12 Source A Trigger control window 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 3 76 Sources 3 121 Span 3 163 Spectral analysis displaying phase 3 188 Spectral analyzer controls 3 190 Spectral averaging 3 160 Spectral controls B 14 Spectral grading B 10 Spectral Math reference level 3 166 Spectral math 3 dB BW in bins 3 172 acquisition mode 3 182 affects of frequency domain control adjustments illustrated 3 165 affects of trigger jitter 3 181 aliasing 3 182 averaging 3 182 bandwidth 3 190 Blackman Harris 3 170 3 172 3 177 3 189 center 3 164 center frequency 3 190 3 192 coefficients 3 172 3 173 coherent gain 3 172 dB 3 166 3 187 dBm 3 166 3 187 defining spectral math waveforms 3 160 definition of gate parameters illustrated 3 163 degree 3 188 display the math control window 3 184 3 185 disp
263. iate standard from the list The standard selected determines the bit rate The Bit Rate field shows the bit rate for the selected standard Touch the Bit Rate field and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the serial data stream bit rate for nonstandard bit rates Note Changing the bit rate means the instrument is not triggering in accordance with the standard Touch the Clk Src button to select the serial data clock source Select from channel 1 through channel 4 and R Clk recovered clock Recovered clock is only available for NRZ coded signals Refer to Recovered Clock R Clk Key Points on page C 31 for information on the Recovered Clock function Clk Src Chay Clk Polarity Pos Data Src chi Coding NRZ If the clock source is different than the data source except for R Clk the instrument displays the Clk Polarity button and the Clk Level field Touch Clk Polarity to set the clock signal polarity to Pos itive or Neg ative Touch the Clk Level field and use the arrow buttons multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the clock signal threshold level Serial Pattern Poe Clk Clk Sre Chav Clk Polarity Pos Data Src chi Coding NRZ Standard OC3STM1 Y Bit Rate 155 5Mb s Data Level 224 0mV The Serial Pattern Data field shows the current serial pattern msb Touch the Format button to select the pattern display format from the drop down list Available
264. ic equipment WEEE For information about recycling options check the Support Service section of the E Tektronix Web site www tektronix com Mercury Notification This product uses an LCD backlight lamp that contains mercury Disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations Please contact your local authorities or within the United States the Electronics Industries Alliance www eiae org for disposal or recycling information This product has been classified as Monitoring and Control equipment and is outside the scope of the 2002 95 EC RoHS Directive This product is known to contain lead cadmium mercury and hexavalent chromium TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual XV Environmental Considerations xvi TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual SSS La Preface This user manual covers the following information m Describes the capabilities of the instrument how to install it and how to reinstall its software Explains how to operate the instrument how to control acquisition of processing of and input output of information About This Manual This manual is composed of the following chapters m Getting Started shows you how to configure and install your instrument and provides an incoming inspection procedure m Operating Basics uses maps to describe the various interfaces for controlling the instrument including the front panel and the software user interface These maps provide overviews o
265. ication triggering enables you to trigger on and display waveforms for industry standard communications signals Appendix B lists the supported standards on which you can trigger Automatic communication signal measurements enable you to make automatic measurements on communications signals Appendix C lists the available measurements TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 1 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering The Serial Mask Testing key features are Predefined masks for testing or triggering on industry standard signals such as ITU T G 703 ANSI T1 102 Fibre Channel Ethernet InfiniBand SONET Serial ATA USB IEEE 1394b RapidIO OIF PCI Express and their subsets On CSA7000B instruments optical mask standards have calibrated digital filters enabling operation as an optical reference receiver Autoset which quickly adjusts the instrument vertical and horizontal parameters to display a waveform in a mask Autofit which positions the signal on each acquisition to minimize mask segment hits Mask margins which allow you to adjust the default mask margin tolerances Pass Fail testing to continuously test a specified number of waveforms against a mask A mask editor for creating saving and recalling user defined masks Waveform database technology to do mask testing based on waveforms accumulated in a database rather than a single waveform stored in acquisi tion memory Communications trigger
266. ich the reference levels are calculated are the levels established using the selected Hi Low method described on page 3 121 To Take Automatic Use the procedure that follows to quickly take a measurement based on the Measurements default settings for High Low and for reference levels Overview To take automatic measurements Prerequisites 1 Obtain a stable display of the waveform to be measured TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup 3 123 Measuring Waveforms Overview Select the 2 waveform Take 4 automatic measurements Remove 6 measurements 3 124 To take automatic measurements Cont From the toolbar touch Meas to display the Measure ment setup control window To select the source waveform that you want to measure select the Ch Math or Ref Source tab and then touch the Channel Math or Reference button for the waveform The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform From the Measurement setup control window select the Ampl Time More Histog or Comm optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series tab that contains the measurement that you want to take Touch the button for the measurement that you want to take For a list of the measurements this instrument can take see Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported The readout for the measuremen
267. ies User Manual 3 119 Measuring Waveforms 3 120 automatic measurements are usually more accurate than cursor and graticule measurements And the instrument does the work continuously taking updating and displaying these measurements Some features of automatic measurements follow Annotate Waveforms On Screen You can create text to mark characterization levels that each measurement uses to compute results see Figure 3 30 See Customizing the Display on page 3 110 Label the waveform on page 3 207 and Annotate measurements on page 3 125 for additional information Input to process 1 i Figure 3 30 Annotated display Customize Measurements To allow you control over how your waveform data is characterized by measurements the instrument lets you set the methods used for each measurement See High Low Method on page 3 121 and Reference Levels Method on page 3 122 See Statistics on Measurement Results To see how automatic measurements vary statistically you can display a readout of the Min Max Mean and Standard Deviation of the measurement results See Display measurement statistics on page 3 125 for more information Select Measurement Parameters You can select from an extensive range of parameters to measure for a list see Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Measure Part of a Waveform You can feed the entire waveform to
268. ify Pattern and state types trigger on logic combinations of several signals m Setup hold type triggers on the relative timing between two signals The advanced trigger types are available on both A Main and B Delayed triggers TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 45 Triggering 3 46 Trigger Modes Trigger Holdoff m Comm is a special trigger type used on communication signals You can use Comm triggers to test communications signals and Mask testing automati cally uses Comm triggers to set up signals for mask testing Comm triggering is available with A triggers only and only when the Serial Mask option Option SM is present Serial is a special trigger type used on signals with serial data patterns Serial triggering is available with A triggers only and only when the Serial Pattern trigger option Option ST is present The trigger mode determines how the instrument behaves in the absence of a trigger event m Normal trigger mode enables the instrument to acquire a waveform only when it is triggered If no trigger occurs the instrument will not acquire a waveform rather the last waveform record acquired remains frozen on the display If no last waveform exists none is displayed See Normal trigger mode in Figure 3 17 You can push FORCE TRIGGER in the Trigger control window to force the instrument to make a single acquisition Auto trigger mode automatic mode enables the instrument to
269. igger point pa Tn source lt Horizontal delay aS Start posttrigger acquisition Trig After Time with Horizontal Delay B trigger point A trigger point A trigger source Waveform record gt ULLAL source Xu ve p D i j lt Horizontal del i isiti Trigger delay time orizontal delay Start posttrigger acquisition Trig on nth Event with Horizontal Delay B trigger point Waveform record A trigger point A trigger ULI LIL LA source source Re 4 ie Waiting for nth event I Horizontal delay gt Start posttrigger acquisition where n 4 Figure 3 24 Triggering with Horizontal Delay on 3 88 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Triggering with Reset You can specify a condition that if it occurs before the B trigger event resets the trigger system When the reset event occurs the trigger system stops waiting for the B event and returns to waiting for an Aevent You can specify a reset when the B trigger event does not occur m before a timeout that you specify m before a input signal that you specify enters a state that you specify or m before a input signal that you specify transitions in a direction that you specify NOTE A minimum of 100 ns must exist between B Event that triggers the oscilloscope and any B Event occurring after Reset becomes TRUE Since any number of int
270. ile it is resting on the rear feet make sure that you properly route any cables coming out of the rear of the instrument to avoid damaging them CAUTION To prevent damage to the instrument keep the bottom and sides of the instrument clear of obstructions for proper cooling Connecting Peripherals 1 6 A The peripheral connections are the same as those you would make on a personal computer The connection points are shown in Figure 1 1 See Table 1 1 on page 1 8 for additional connection information CAUTION To avoid product damage either power off the instrument or place the instrument in Standby power mode before installing any accessories except a USB mouse or keyboard to the instrument connectors You can connect and disconnect USB devices with the power on See Shutting Down the Instrument on page 1 9 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation Description Icon Label Locations Mouse Keyboard USB RS 232 com 1 IOlOl Printer LPT L 7 XVGA Out PC only for dual display operation VIDEO CO Hard drive USB A gt Mic P Audio line out M Audio line in IEN k l Jo Instrument monitor fy Y y
271. ill take several minutes When the verification is finished the resulting status will appear in the diagnostics control window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 21 Incoming Inspection NOTE If diagnostic error message 512 is displayed run signal path compensa tion and then rerun Instrument Diagnostics d Verify that no failures are found and reported on screen All tests should pass e Run the signal path compensation routine From the Utilities menu select Instrument Calibration This displays the Instrument Calibration control window Touch the Calibrate button to start the routine f Wait Signal path compensation may take five to ten minutes to run g Confirm signal path compensation returns passed status Verify that the word Pass appears in the instrument calibration control window 2 Return to regular service Touch the Close button to exit the instrument calibration control window Functional Tests The purpose of these procedures is to confirm that the instrument functions properly NOTE These procedures verify that the instrument features operate They do not verify that they operate within limits Therefore when the instructions in the functional tests that follow call for you to verify that a signal appears on screen that is about five divisions in amplitude or has a period of about six horizontal divisions and so forth do not interpret the quantities given
272. ime Display Date Time 8 Touch Display Trigger T to toggle between On and Off pega hess On displays the trigger T at the trigger location a 9 Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access a context sensitive overview of the display controls and their setup TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 117 Displaying Waveforms 3 118 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual a Measuring Waveforms The instrument comes equipped with cursors and automatic measurements to assist you in analyzing your waveforms NOTE You can also make graticule measurements counting graticule divisions and multiplying them by the vertical or horizontal scales set for the waveform that you are measuring Measurement Cursor Graticule Cursors Readouts readouts readouts Curs1 Pos 0 0s f Curs2 Pos 4 84us 4 Ka 500mv 2 HE Amp 980 0mV Wal ti 0 0s 1 Ous div HAI Rise 1 668ns t2 4 84us 500MS s_ 2 0ns pt HIG Freq 102 4kHz At 4 84us T7 40 0mVv L at 206 6kHz Figure 3 29 Graticule Cursor and Automatic measurements Taking Automatic Measurements The instrument automatically takes and displays waveform measurements This section describes how to set up the instrument to let it do the work of taking measurements for you Because automatic measurements use the waveform record points and Wave form Database mode measurements use a multidimensional array of points TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Ser
273. in your MyScope control window by clicking and dragging To reconfigure a control click and drag it back to the preview window Then select or clear the check boxes to include or remove components in the control Control elements and resources Choose From These Controls New Tab i E Label Rename Tab 1 oi Source bo Units gt chi Offset User Pref l Termination Position Invert Coupling Delete Bandwidth Probe Cal a Click And Drag Controls onto the Tab Below Vertical Display Vertical Vert Vertical Source thi Yv A Position A Scale 3 Label i Units Offset Termination Position 80 0mdiv Invert Coupling Parndimidth z Click And Drag Controls onto the Tab Below ical Display fiz MyScope Setup Untitled F Vertical ee vertical F Rename Tab Label User Pref ie Units Offset Delete Termination Vertical Vertical Vertical Source Display Chi Rename Tab L cam chi 4 Postion cere i Seale osition User Pref i Label Units Offset Delete mination Vertical Source thi Y 500 0mY Ka Fw Vertical Source Chi Position 1 52div Scale 500 0m TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual MyScope Overview To create a new MyScope control window Cont Click New Tab to add a tab to your MyScope control window
274. indow access C 28 display format C 33 edit controls C 34 edit the serial trigger pattern C 34 format C 33 functions C 4 C 5 hexadecimal format C 33 C 34 key points C 31 level C 33 mask testing C 21 phase lock loop C 31 polarity C 33 pulse form C 29 recovered clock C 29 C 31 C 33 recovered clock key points C 31 selecting C 28 selecting a code C 33 selecting a data source C 33 Index 3 Index selecting a source C 28 selecting a standard C 29 C 33 selecting a trigger C 32 selecting a type C 29 serial data C 33 serial data pattern C 34 serial pattern data C 33 threshold level C 33 threshold levels C 30 view the trigger pattern C 33 Configuration software installation 1 10 1 12 system 1 5 Connect input signal 3 6 Connecting and conditioning your signals 3 3 Connecting peripherals 1 6 Connection to a network 1 13 connection to a LAN 1 13 Connectivity tools 2 2 Contacting Tektronix xvii Contents and index B 16 Control knob Glossary 3 Control window Glossary 3 A Trigger 3 65 3 67 3 71 3 76 3 78 3 80 3 81 3 84 3 91 A gt B Seq Trigger 3 91 3 92 B trigger 3 93 Controlling data input and output 3 199 Copy B 3 a waveform 3 224 setup B 3 waveforms 3 224 Copy MyScope control window 3 239 Copying waveforms 3 213 Coupling 3 4 B 4 ground Glossary 7 trigger 3 47 Create custom control window 3 235 Create MyScope control window 3 235 Cre
275. ing an analog input such as a voltage at a discrete point in time and holding it constant so that it can be quantized Two general methods of sampling are real time sampling and equivalent time sampling Screen text Lines displayed on screen that you use to indicate measurement reference levels and points that an automatic measurement is using to derive the measurement value Setting The state of the front panel and system at a given time Setup control window A group of related controls for a major instrument function that the instrument displays across the bottom of the screen TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Setup Hold trigger A mode in which the instrument triggers when a data source changes state within the setup or hold time relative to a clock source Positive setup times precede the clock edge positive hold times follow the clock edge The clock edge may be the rising or falling edge Selected waveform The waveform on which all measurements are performed and which is affected by vertical position and scale adjustments The light over one of the channel selector buttons indicates the current selected waveform Slew Rate trigger A mode in which the instrument triggers based on how fast a pulse edge traverses slews between an upper and lower threshold The edge of the pulse may be positive negative or either The instrument can trigger on slew rates faster or slower than a user specified rate
276. ing math waveforms 3 156 waveform differentiation 3 149 waveform integration 3 151 MathCad file format 3 214 MathLab file format 3 214 Max 3 125 Maximum A 2 B 11 B 12 Glossary 9 Mean 3 125 A 2 A 3 B 11 B 12 Glossary 9 Mean 1 stddev A 3 Mean 2 stddev A 3 Mean 3 stddev A 3 Measure menu all B 12 amplitude B 11 area B 12 burst width B 12 Comm B 12 crossing B 12 cycle area B 12 cycle distortion B 12 cycle mean B 11 cycle RMS B 11 delay B 12 ext ratio B 12 ext ratio dB B 12 ext ratio B 12 eye height B 12 eye top B 12 eye width B 12 fall time B 12 frequency B 12 gating B 12 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index high level B 11 histogram measurements B 12 hits in box B 12 Horiz B 12 jitter 6 sigma B 12 jitter pk pk B 12 jitter rms B 12 low level B 11 maximum B 11 B 12 mean B 11 B 12 mean 1 stddev B 12 mean 2 stddev B 12 mean 3 stddev B 12 measurement setup B 11 median B 12 minimum B 11 B 12 more B 12 neg duty cycle B 12 neg overshoot B 11 negative width B 12 noise pk pk B 12 noise RMS B 12 off B 12 peak hits B 12 peak to peak B 11 B 12 period B 12 phase B 12 pos duty cycle B 12 pos overshoot B 11 positive width B 12 reference levels B 12 reset histograms B 12 reset statistics B 12 rise time B 12 RMS B 11 s n ratio B 12 snapshot B 11 standard deviation B
277. iod Measured in Hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second The value used as 100 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements Calculated using either the min max or the histogram method The min max method uses the maximum value found The histogram method uses the most common value found above the mid point Measured over the entire waveform or gated region TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual A 1 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 1 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Name fl Low Tr Maximum AE Mean AL Minimum Negative Duty Cycle Negative Overshoot Negative Width TIE Peak to Peak LA Phase Period Positive Duty Cycle Definition The value used as 0 whenever High Ref Mid Ref and Low Ref values are needed as in fall time and rise time measurements May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method it is the minimum value found With the histogram method it refers to the most common value found below the midpoint Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The maximum amplitude Typically the most positive peak voltage Measured over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region Voltage measurement The minimum
278. ion A 1 Table A 2 Supported measurements and their definition A 9 Table B 1 File menu commands cee eeceececevees B 1 Table B 2 Edit menu commands eceeceececevees B 3 Table B 3 Vertical menu commands eeeeeeeeeeeee B 4 Table B 4 Horiz Acq menu commands esssssssessssesoe B 5 Table B 5 Trig menu commands esesesosssosessssesesss B 7 Table B 6 Display menu commands ssssssssssesossesoe B 9 Table B 7 Cursor menu commands esssssssesssssossoss B 11 Table B 8 Measure menu commands ssssssosesossesoes B 11 Table B 9 Masks menu commands eceeeeccecevees B 13 Table B 10 Math menu commands ecceeeeeeeees B 14 Table B 11 Application menu commands eeee0e B 14 Table B 12 Utilities menu commands eeeeeeeeee B 15 Table B 13 Help menu commands ee ceeeeeevees B 16 Table C 1 Masks control window functions 00 C 4 Table C 2 Communication trigger functions 8 C 5 Table C 3 Serial trigger functions cece eee eee eee C 7 Table C 4 ITU T masks cc ccc cece ec ee cere cece eens C 35 ix TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Table of Contents Table C 5 ANSI T1 102 masks ccc cece cece cee cecnees C 35 Table C 6 Ethernet masks cc cece cece cece cece eeeee C 35 Table C 7 SONET SDH masks cc cece cece cece eee eeee C 35 Table
279. ion FHD installed Ola o o e Hard Drive ON EESS oljg e gee 8 oB ols o oS S 23939 FAST EDGE SMA output Probe T USB 2 0 Compensation on some models T O 9 E el lel fel lt Ground terminal DC PROBE CAL BNC output Ae AUX TRIG OUT BNC output P Je RECOVERED CLOCK SMA output RECOVERED DATA SMA output TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 2 9 C Rear Panel I O Map Removable hard disk drive to provide individual C environment for each user or to secure data loosen and then pull on thumb screws to release the disk CD RW drive with option FHD o A a Connectors for speaker and microphone IN v A USB 2 0 connectors for mouse keyboard or other peripherals 4 ports PS 2 connector for mouse PS 2 connector for keyboard RJ 45 connector to connect to network VIDEO O oo0000 Upper VIDEO port to connect a monitor for dual monitor operation com Ee COM1 serial port Parallel port Centronics to connect printer or other device y Pa eee Cs j LPT SCOPE Lower XGA port to replicate the oscilloscope display on an external monitor GPIB port to connect to controller e _ Auxiliary input external trigger input S reference input and reference output 2 10
280. ion Window Considerations The instrument lets you define the horizontal acquisition window that is set several parameters that determine the segment of an incoming signal that becomes the waveform record when acquired For background read Waveform Record on page 3 30 These common parameters specify a horizontal acquisition window that is applied to all channels in parallel See Independent vs Shared Window on page 3 17 These parameters are m The trigger condition that you set up determines the point on the waveform that triggers the instrument m Horizontal position also determines the number of pretrigger and posttrigger samples samples before the reference point are pretrigger samples and those after the reference are posttrigger samples TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms m The Horizontal Delay that you set determines the time from the trigger point to the Horizontal Reference m The horizontal scale and waveform record length number of samples that you set determines the horizontal size of the window relative to any waveform allowing you to scale it to contain a waveform edge a cycle or several cycles Sample interval First sampled and digitized point in record Trigger point _ acquisition Horizontal delay gt Horizontal window Horizontal reference Horizontal position Figure 3 4 Horizontal Acquisition window d
281. ion gt lt UnaryExpression gt lt UnaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt UnaryOperator gt lt Expression gt lt BinaryExpression gt lt Term gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt Scalar gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Term gt lt Term gt lt BinaryOperator gt lt Scalar gt lt Term gt lt Waveform gt lt Expression gt lt Scalar gt lt Integer gt lt Float gt lt Meas Result gt lt Variable gt lt Waveform gt lt ChannelWaveform gt lt Reference Waveform gt lt MathWaveform gt lt ChannelWaveform gt Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 lt Reference Waveform gt Ref1 Ref2 Ref3 Ref4 lt MathWaveform gt Math1 Math2 Math3 Math4 lt UnaryOperator gt Average Integral Derivative Invert Sqrt Exp log 10 log e Fabs Sin Min Max Ceil Cos Tan ASin Sinh ACos Cosh ATan Tanh Floor Spectral Magnitude Spectral Phase Spectral Real Spectral Imag lt BinaryOperator gt lt lt gt gt CHS EXX The logical operators generate a vector that is all 0 0 or 1 0 Operators amp amp and are not provided but if x and y are expressions equal to 0 or 1 then x y is the same as x amp amp y and x y gt 0 99 is the same as x ly lt Meas Result gt meas1 meas2 meas3 meas4 meas5 meas6 meas7 meas8 lt Variable gt gt VAR1 VAR2 VAR3 VAR4 VARS VAR6 VAR7 VARS Waveform Differen
282. ired for the acquisition mode currently set are processed and then processing continues to step 7 below 7 At this point the acquisition record is in waveform memory and is available to the instrument for measurement of its parameters display and so on The instrument then checks for a user specified stop condition and either returns to its idle state or continues at step 3 according to what it finds De eee User Interface Map Complete Control and Display Status Bar Display of acquisition status mode and number of acquisitions trigger status warnings date and time File Edit Vertical Menu Bar Access to data I O printing online help system and instrument functions here Afz kcq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks fflath App Utiities Hel Buttons Buttons Menu Touch to Display Live reference and math waveforms display here bbe along with cursors Waveform Handle Touch and drag gt a to change vertical position of waveform Touch the handle and change the position and scale using a aa TE T o a toggle between toolbar and menu bar modes p 800 0ns Curs2 Pos i J kij Multipurpose Knob Readouts Adjust parameters controlled by multipurpose knobs EEEE EEEE ENNE P E EET A PE E EN EN TEN I IE A E I ET DO O E S O T O the multipurpose knobs Ie Vi 40 0mV t1 800 Ons TI 500mV Q ansa P IA 200mv 2 IGI V2 40 omv t2
283. is file contains release notes and updates that could not be included in other product documentation TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Product Description m GPIB Programmer Online Help software This software in an online help format contains the information that you need to program the instrument through its GPIB interface A printable PDF file of this information is also available on the compact disc m Performance Verification Procedures The compact disc contains instructions to perform a performance verification See the instructions for the compact discs for information about installing the support software Occasionally new versions of software for your instrument may become available at our web site See Contacting Tektronix on the back of the title page Software Upgrade Tektronix may offer software upgrade kits for the instrument Contact your Tektronix service representative for more information see Contacting Tektronix on the back of the title page TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 3 Product Description 1 4 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual _ Ly lt a Installation This chapter covers installation of the instrument Unpacking Verify that you have received all of the parts of your instrument The Standard Accessories list shows the standard accessories that you should find in the shipping carton probes depend on the option you ordered You should also verify that you
284. ise Pk Pk C 41 C 51 noise pk pk A 4 Noise RMS C 41 C 51 noise RMS A 4 overshoot Glossary 12 parameter Glossary 9 Index 13 Index peak hits A 3 peak to peak A 2 Glossary 11 period A 2 Glossary 11 phase A 2 Glossary 12 pk pk A 3 positive duty cycle A 2 positive overshoot A 3 positive width A 3 propagation delay A 1 Quality Factor C 42 C 52 quality factor A 5 rise time A 3 Glossary 14 RMS A 3 Glossary 14 S N Ratio C 41 C 51 S N ratio A 5 setup B 11 Statistics 3 125 Glossary 9 stddev A 3 tracking Glossary 10 undershoot Glossary 10 waveform count A 3 width Glossary 11 Glossary 12 Measurement accuracy ensuring maximum 3 139 3 144 Measurements B 2 C 41 C 51 automated 3 119 Classes of 3 119 cursor 3 130 eye diagram A 6 eye measurement levels C 42 C 52 high and low levels defined A 6 levels used in taking A 5 A 6 C 42 C 52 reference levels defined A 6 reference levels defined eye pattern optical A 7 C 43 C 53 supported C 41 C 51 Measuring waveforms 3 119 absolute reference 3 122 access gating 3 129 annotate measurement 3 125 annotate waveforms on screen 3 120 annotated display 3 120 automatic measurements 3 119 calibrate the oscilloscope 3 140 change cursor position 3 134 channel 3 121 check the calibration status 3 140 components determining time cursor readout values 3 132 connect the probe calibration fixture 3 141 cursor 3 129 cursor me
285. isites This chapter contains instructions for performing the Incoming Inspection Procedure This procedure verifies that the instrument is operating correctly after shipment but does not check product specifications If the instrument fails any test within this section it may need service To contact Tektronix for service see Contacting Tektronix on the back of the title page Make sure you have put the instrument into service as detailed in Installation starting on page 1 5 Then assemble the following test equipment and proceed with the procedures that follow This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument functions and was adjusted properly No test equipment or hookups are required None Power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warm up before doing this procedure 1 Verify that internal diagnostics pass Do the following substeps to verify passing of internal diagnostics a Display the System diagnostics menu m Ifthe instrument is in toolbar mode touch the MENU button to put the instrument into menu bar mode m From the Utilities menu select Instrument Diagnostics This displays the diagnostics control window b Run the System Diagnostics m First disconnect any input signals and probes from all four channels m Touch the Run button in the diagnostics control window c Wait The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper instrument function This verification w
286. isplay on off B 4 label B 4 offset B 4 position scale B 4 probe cal B 4 termination B 4 vertical setup B 4 zoom controls B 4 zoom setup B 5 Vertical offset 3 101 discussion on setting 3 12 Vertical position 3 101 Vertical range discussion on setting 3 12 Vertical scale 3 101 Vertical scale and offset illustrated 3 13 uses for 3 3 Vertical setup B 4 purpose 3 3 Vertical window overview 3 11 3 12 View printing 3 229 Virtual keyboard control window 3 199 3 206 VNC B 10 Voltage TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index overrange and underrange points 3 12 overview 3 12 W Waveform B 2 B 3 B 11 Glossary 16 clipping See Clipping copying 3 213 count A 3 database 3 20 3 24 3 36 Glossary 17 differentiation 3 149 display 3 99 display on B 10 displaying 3 97 exporting 3 213 FFTs 3 160 histograms B 12 integration 3 151 intensity 3 112 interpolation 3 112 B 9 interval Glossary 17 printing 3 228 recalling 3 205 save formats 3 214 saving 3 205 Waveform clipping See Clipping Waveform record 3 30 definition applied to all channels 3 17 illustrated 3 30 3 132 spectral source long versus short 3 161 Waveforms and zoom 3 105 clear 3 211 delete 3 211 Measuring 3 119 Web site address Tektronix xvii Width Glossary 11 Glossary 12 setup B 8 trigger B 7 Width trigger 3 60 3 69 A Trigger control window 3 69 how to set up 3 69 3 96 how to setu
287. isplays the Reference Setup window that you use to save and control reference waveforms Save All Wim Displays the window that you use to save all reference waveforms Recall Wim Displays the Reference Setup window that you use to recall and control reference waveforms Delete All Refs Deletes all reference waveforms Instrument Setup Displays the Instrument Setup window that you use to save instrument setups to nonvolatile memory or to a file recall saved setups or delete saved setups Recall Default Setup Recalls the factory default instrument setup TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual B 1 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 1 File menu commands Cont Menu Run Application Page Setup Print Preview Print Export Setup Select for Export Export 1 Recent Setup File 1 Minimize Shutdown Function depends on installed applications Allows you to start an optional application Displays the Page Setup dialog box that you use to define the page before sending data to a printer Shows you a preview of the page before you print the page Displays the Print dialog box that you use to send data to your printer Displays the Export Setup window that you use to set up and export images waveforms and measurements Images Select the Palette Color GrayScale or Black amp White View Full Screen or Graticules Only Image Normal or InkSaver Mode or Data Format used when exporting images Waveforms
288. ist J Source Tolerance 5 Select None from the list Type User Defined Mask ITU T Fibre Channel 6 Touch the Copy Current Mask to User Mask button If you are asked if you want to overwrite the current user mask touch the Yes button Ethernet SONET SDH TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 21 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Create and edit new mask segments Save the user mask to disk C 22 Creating a new mask cont N Gad 10 11 12 Touch the Edit User Mask button to display the user mask edit functions Touch the Segment field and use the arrow buttons multipurpose knob or keypad to enter or select segment 1 Touch the Vertex Add button The instrument draws the default new segment shape a triangle Use the instructions in Editing a User Mask starting at step 5 on page C 17 to edit a segment Repeat steps 8 through 10 selecting an unused and sequential segment number to create and edit more segments Refer to Saving a User Mask to Disk on page C 19 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources Mask Element Segment 1 Verter Editing Mask Values Horizontal Vertical Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Mask Testing Example The following procedure is an example of setting up the instrument to perform mask testing on a DS1A signal This exa
289. ition 00div Scale 0 idom Vertical Zoom S HORIZONTAL 3 POSITION DELAY RESOLUTION ES MORE SAMPLES lt SCALE gt w Acquiring Waveforms Overview To set up signal input Cont For help 8 For more information on the controls described in this procedure push the Vert or Horiz button Touch the HELP button in the toolbar Continue with 9 To finish acquisition setup you must set the acquisition acquisition mode and start the acquisition setup Related control elements and resources See To Set Acquisition Modes on page 3 24 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Autoset the Instrument Overview Prerequisites Execute Execute Autoset Undo Prompt Done Autoset automatically sets up the instrument controls acquisition display horizontal trigger and vertical based on the characteristics of the input signal Autoset is much faster and easier than a manual control by control setup When the input signal is connected do an autoset to automatically set up the instru ment To autoset the instrument sch oe Signals must be connected to channels A triggering source must be provided Push the Autoset button to execute an Autoset If you use Autoset when one or more channels are displayed the instrument selects the lowest numbered channel for horizontal scaling and triggering All channels in use
290. ition For more information display online help while performing the procedure Overview To set up signal input Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The acquisition system should be set to run continuously See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Connect input 2 Connect to the signal to be acquired using proper SS signal probing and connecting techniques fojacca el le o S5 Note For more details on control over input setup push Sla e Bes S the Vert button to display the Vertical control window gt oBolzzE and then touch the HELP button le je je 2 QQ QO is B le LJ Pe AA Select the 3 Push a channel button CH 1 CH 4 to select the N C VERTICAL input signal signal channel POSMION POS TION CH2 POSITION POSITION channel A channel button lights when its channel is on w Q QO Q zZ zZ zZ zZ SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE Select input 4 Touch Vert to display the Vertical control window To Chan2 Chana Chan coupling change the input coupling select the channel tab and Display Poaition Termination Coupling then select from oo Scale DC to couple both the AC and DC components of soov an input signal viaj Vertical Zoom GND to disconnect the input signal from the Fea acquisition Touch Close to close the window 3 6 TDS6000B amp TD
291. itter The instrument acquisition system has a sample clock that is asynchronous with respect to the input signal This means that from one acquisition to the next samples may be in a different position on the waveform with respect to the trigger Samples may vary in position by up to one sample interval TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 181 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Recognizing Aliasing 3 182 There are only two samples per cycle of a signal that have a frequency equal to one half of the sample rate This is the highest nonaliased signal that can be output from the spectral analyzer Thus at this frequency one sample of acquisition jitter will show up in the spectrum as 180 degree phase variations The phase spectrum is dejittered by using the fractional trigger value of the instrument to correct all phases in the spectrum Therefore phase is accurately measured from DC to the Nyquist frequency m Effects of Average and High Res acquisition modes The result of averaging the time domain acquisition using either average mode or Hi Res acquisition mode affects the frequency response of the instrument This is due to the one sample of jitter in the acquisition system Both High Res and average acquisition modes have the same affect on the frequency response These modes cause the response to roll off from a magnitude value of one at DC to a magnitude value of 0 63 at Nyquist which is the frequency equal to one half of
292. k amp White for Anite retell r Steno Enhanced the color palette of your exported images see Data Format 7 In the View window select whether you want to export fence mr the Full Screen or Graticules Only I Readouts Below Graticule 8 In the Image window select whether you want to export using Normal or InkSaver with Enhanced Waveform Color Mode Export Cancel Help Normal exports the image exactly as it appears on screen m nkSaver with Enhanced Waveform Color exports the image with colors designed to print with the white background 9 Touch Data Format and select the data format from the Seer za EE Images Waveforms Measurements drop down list Prompt for Filename Palette Image F before Exporting Color Normal Black amp White InkSever Mode Enhanced Set Front Panel Print Button to Export View Data Format Full Screen Groticule s Only Bitmap BMP N JPEG PNG I Readouts Below Graticule OK Cancel 3 216 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Setup to export 10 Select the Waveforms tab to display the Waveforms waveforms control window 11 Touch Data Destination and select the destination format of your exported waveform file see File Formats on page 3 214 for information on the available formats 12 Touch Source Waveform and select the sourc
293. k hits A 3 B 12 Peak to peak A 2 B 11 B 12 Glossary 11 Performance verification 1 11 of functions 1 20 self tests 1 19 Period A 2 B 12 Glossary 11 Peripheral connecting 1 6 Persistence 3 113 Persistence controls B 9 Phase A 2 B 12 Glossary 12 Phase spectrum B 14 Phase suppression 3 168 Phase verses frequency 3 160 Phone number Tektronix xvii Pixel Glossary 12 Pk pk A 3 Plug amp play software 1 10 1 18 PNG file format 3 214 Polarity and width A Trigger control window 3 65 3 67 3 69 Polarity main trigger menu 3 67 3 69 Pos duty cycle B 12 Pos overshoot B 11 Position vertical 3 151 3 152 B 4 Position scale B 1 B 4 B 6 B 13 B 14 Positive duty cycle A 2 Positive overshoot A 3 Positive width A 3 B 12 Positive A Trigger control window 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 Posttrigger 3 44 Glossary 12 Powering off 1 9 Powering on 1 8 Preferences B 16 Pretrigger 3 44 Glossary 12 Print B 2 Print preview 3 231 B 2 Printing 3 228 waveforms 3 228 Probe cal B 4 calibrate 3 141 calibration fixture 3 141 compensation Glossary 13 definition Glossary 13 low frequency compensation 3 142 Index 16 Probe channel deskew 3 141 Glossary 3 Probes and signal connection 3 3 Product description 1 1 software 1 2 Product description C 1 Product support contact information xvii Programmer help 1 10 Propagation delay A 1 Proximal Glossary 13 Pulse trigger Glossary 13 Pulse trigge
294. k to the user mask memory E1 Coan Pair 2 048 Mbis F Edit the user 6 Refer to Editing a User Mask on page C 17 mask Save the user 7 Refer to Saving a User Mask to Disk on page C 19 You do not mask to disk need to save the edited user mask to disk as the instrument retains the current user mask in nonvolatile memory However if you plan on creating a number of user masks you will need to store the user masks on disk as the instrument can only load one user mask at a time C 16 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Editing a User Mask To edit a user mask do the following procedure Overview Editing a user mask Control elements and resources Access the 1 From the button bar touch Masks and select the mask edit Masks tab window 2 Touch the User Mask button Mask Elements Mask Values 3 Touch the Edit User Mask button The instrument displays the segment Horizontal Mask Edit control window Vertical ow Enable the 4 Touch the Controls button to open the mask edit controls window FEZESAEZE Tek Proviow WimDB 34 Jul 03 11 10 22 mask edit on the right side of the screen This provides the maximum area Paene ae Seinen controls to display the mask making editing easier a i EA FN eS ee See EA ES PER Ov _ T A EE W 2m s Select a 5 Touch the Segment field and use the arrow buttons
295. kers that you can use to make measurements between two waveform locations The instrument displays the values expressed in volts or time of the position of the active cursor and the distance between the two cursors Cycle area A measurement of waveform area taken over one cycle Expressed in volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Cycle mean An amplitude voltage measurement of the arithmetic mean over one cycle Cycle RMS The true Root Mean Square voltage over one cycle TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 3 Glossary Glossary 4 dB Decibel a method of expressing power or voltage ratios The decibel scale is logarithmic It is often used to express the efficiency of power distribution systems when the ratio consists of the energy put into the system divided by the energy delivered or in some cases lost by the system One milliwatt of optical power is usually the optical reference for 0 dBm The formula for decibels is dB 20 loe for optical dB 10 log 72 where V is the voltage of the incident pulse V is the voltage reflected back by the load Po is the power out P is the power in and log is the decimal based logarithmic function dBm A logarithmic measure of power referenced to 1 milliwatt 1 mW optical power 0 0 dBm dam 10g Beige DC coupling A mode that passes both AC and DC signal components to the circuit Available for both the trigger
296. l elements and resources Select the 4 In the Time Stamps controls touch Source and select ad Ror en Selection Source Tracking reference the source of the reference frame Ea ce Si He frame fe pans m Kanapa Frame Count Mig 5 Inthe Time Stamps controls touch Frame and use the caarrame Selected Frame Frame Reference Frame Selection i Source Tracking gt multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number ofthe I o pain P ht reference frame This value sets the starting frame when EEYAN TR ET fon Hovizrmeg SetUp measuring the relative time between two frames z Frame Count eee Select the You may set the Selected Frame and Reference Frame FastFrame as previously shown or you can set them from the Pua emaabue ram ausina rans i ource Tracking ource and time Selection Controls window row none amz Stamps Touch Selection Controls from the Time Stamps control Ama m h selection window to display the FastFrame controls Mutiple Frame Count Readouts controls pre sa 7 Inthe FastFrame controls window touch Selected Frame Source and select the source of the frame you want to view 8 Touch Selected Frame Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the specific frame you want to view and take time stamps on The frame you select appears on the display Note The A is the selected time stamp minus the reference time stamp 9 Touch the Reference Frame Source and select the ff r
297. l function whether it is displayed or not m AC Line Voltage is a convenient trigger source when you are looking at signals related to the power line frequency Examples include devices such as lighting equipment and power supplies Because the instrument generates the trigger from the power line you do not have to use a channel input m Auxiliary Trigger AUX IN provides a fifth source that you can use as a trigger input when you need to use the four input channels for other signals For example you might want to trigger on a clock while displaying four other logic signals To use the auxiliary trigger connect the signal to the Auxiliary Trigger input connector The Auxiliary Trigger input is not compatible with most probes nor can you display the auxiliary trigger signal Trigger Types The instrument provides the following trigger types m Edge is the simplest and most commonly used trigger type You can use it with analog or digital signals An edge trigger event occurs when the trigger source the signal the trigger circuit is monitoring passes through a specified voltage level in the specified direction the trigger slope Edge type is available on both A Main and B Delayed triggers m Advanced triggers are actually a collection of trigger types that are primarily used with digital signals to detect specific conditions m Glitch runt width transition and timeout types trigger on unique properties of pulses that you can spec
298. l trigger mode To take a 4 Push the SINGLE button to start acquiring and acquire INTENSITY single enough waveforms to satisfy the acquisition mode and eS acquisition then stop For more help 5 See references listed at right See To Set Acquisition Modes on page 3 24 and To Get More Help on page 3 10 3 26 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms To Set Roll Mode Overview To set Roll Mode Prerequisites 1 The horizontal and vertical controls must be set up Triggering should also be set up To enable roll 2 Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from mode the Horiz Acq control window or select Horizontal Ac quisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu to display the Acquisition Mode control window Select the Acquisition tab 3 Select Roll Mode AUTO to enable roll mode When the horizontal scale is 40 ms per division at a Pk Detect record length of 200K points and the acquisition mode is Sample or Pk Detect roll mode turns on As the record length becomes larger the time per division required to enter roll mode becomes slower Sarnple Average Envelope Note Envelope Average and Waveform Database acquisition modes inhibit roll mode To single 4 Push the SINGLE button to start acquiring and acquire sequence roll enough waveforms to satisfy the acquisition mode and mode then stop To turn off roll 5 Do the following step to stop acquisitions in roll m
299. l window 3 68 3 72 Time B 12 get current 3 232 Time base Glossary 16 Time cursor readout values 3 132 Time domain controls 3 160 Timebase 3 101 Timeout trigger B 7 Timeout trigger 3 61 3 76 Glossary 16 A Trigger control window 3 76 how to set up 3 76 how to setup 3 84 Timer A Trigger control window 3 76 To autoset the instrument 3 9 To get more help 3 10 To reset the instrument 3 10 Touch screen 3 99 3 102 Trace Glossary 16 Trace expression Glossary 16 Track B 11 Transition setup B 8 trigger 3 61 B 7 Transition trigger how to setup 3 84 Trig delay A Trigger control window 3 91 Trigger 3 44 Glossary 16 A Only 3 91 AC line voltage 3 45 3 51 auxiliary 3 45 3 51 coupling 3 47 delay 3 49 edge 3 45 Glossary 5 glitch 3 60 3 65 3 84 Glossary 6 holdoff 3 46 Index 20 level 3 48 Glossary 16 level marker 3 112 line 3 45 3 51 logic 3 59 3 62 marker 3 112 mode 3 46 overview 3 43 pattern 3 61 3 78 position 3 48 pulse 3 59 readout 3 53 runt 3 60 3 67 3 84 Glossary 14 setup B 7 setup and hold 3 84 setup hold 3 62 3 63 3 81 slew rate 3 61 Glossary 15 slope 3 48 source 3 45 state 3 62 3 80 status lights 3 53 T 3 112 B 10 timeout 3 61 3 76 3 84 Glossary 16 transition 3 61 3 84 types 3 50 width 3 60 3 69 3 84 window 3 61 3 74 3 84 Trigger after A 3 91 Trigger after events 3 92 Trigger after time 3 91 how t
300. lay the spectral waveform 3 186 duration 3 161 3 191 duration and resolution control effects illustrated 3 162 example 3 193 example of scallop loss for a Hanning Window without zero fill illustration 3 173 example of the effects of setting the phase suppres sion threshold illustrated 3 169 FFT length 3 171 Flattop2 window 3 170 3 172 3 179 3 189 frequency domain controls 3 160 frequency domain span 3 191 frequency range 3 190 frequency span 3 190 gate controls 3 162 gate duration 3 191 gate position 3 191 gating controls 3 160 Gaussian window 3 170 3 172 3 174 3 189 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index group delay 3 169 3 188 Hamming window 3 170 3 172 3 176 3 189 Hanning window 3 170 3 172 3 177 3 189 how aliased frequencies appear in a spectral waveform illustrated 3 183 impulse response testing 3 169 Kaiser Bessel window 3 170 3 172 3 177 3 189 linear 3 166 3 187 magnitude verses frequency 3 160 multiple analyzer control locks 3 161 nearest side lobe 3 172 3 173 phase reference point 3 191 phase reference position 3 168 phase unwrap 3 168 algorithm 3 168 dejitter 3 168 phase verses frequency 3 160 radian 3 188 real and imaginary magnitudes 3 167 recognizing aliasing 3 182 record length 3 161 3 191 Rectangular window 3 170 3 172 3 175 3 189 reducing noise 3 188 reference level offset 3 167 resolution 3 161 3 191 re
301. lay your reference waveform 3 211 export your file 3 220 exporting and copying waveforms 3 213 file formats 3 214 find the file directory 3 212 find the source directory 3 204 3 210 find your file 3 212 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index finish the chart 3 223 hardcopy formats 3 229 image 3 229 import the waveform data 3 222 JPEG file format 3 214 label the waveform 3 207 margins 3 229 MathCad file format 3 214 MathLab file format 3 214 name a destination 3 203 name the file 3 221 name your setup 3 202 3 203 numeric file format 3 214 orientation 3 229 page setup window 3 230 palette 3 229 paper 3 229 PNG file format 3 214 print preview window 3 231 print window illustration 3 228 printing waveforms 3 228 recall a reference waveform from a file 3 210 recall setup from a file 3 204 recall the setup 3 204 recall the waveform 3 209 recall your setup 3 205 recall your waveform 3 211 remote communication 3 233 retaining current settings 3 200 save all waveforms to files 3 208 save the file 3 221 save the setup 3 202 save the waveform to a file 3 208 save the waveform to a reference 3 207 save your setup 3 203 save your waveform 3 209 saving and recalling a setup 3 199 saving and recalling waveforms 3 205 select a destination 3 208 3 220 select directory and name file 3 208 select for copy 3 224 select for export 3 215 select
302. lays the Tolerance Setup tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to set up the mask margin tolerance Displays the Pass Fail Setup tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to set up pass fail testing Displays the Pass Fail Results tab of the Mask Setup window that you use to view test results Toggles the mask on or off Displays the Mask control window that you use to control mask pass fail testing and display test results Displays the Mask Configuration setup window that you use to configure the display autoset and autofit features of mask testing Displays the Mask Edit Setup window that you use to create user masks Displays the Mask Edit control window that you use to edit user masks B 13 Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Math Commands Table B 10 lists the commands available from the Math menu on the menu bar Table B 10 Math menu commands Menu Math Setup Display On Off Position Scale Label Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Spectral Setup Magnitude Spectrum Phase Spectrum Spectral Controls Set Math Averages Equation Editor Function Displays the Math Setup control window that you use to create math waveforms Toggles the display of math waveforms on and off Displays the vertical Position and Scale control window that you can use to change the vertical position and scale of waveforms Displays a control window that you use to label your waveforms Creates a predefined math waveform Creates a pre
303. le analyzer control locks Up to four spectral analyzers may be used simultaneously They may all be assigned to different gates on the same source waveform or to different channel sources The controls of Math1 and Math2 may be locked and the controls of Math3 and Math4 may be locked that is turning a control on one analyzer changes the control on the other analyzer to the same value Other combinations of locking including all four analyzers are available using GPIB commands The same exclusions for math waveforms apply to spectral math waveforms In addition sources for spectral math waveforms must be channel waveforms Using Spectral Math Read the following topics they provide details that can help you create the Controls spectral waveform that best supports your data analysis tasks The spectral analyzer contains five primary control categories These are shown in Table 3 9 Table 3 9 Spectral analyzer controls Time controls Gate controls Frequency controls Magnitude controls Phase controls Source Position Center dB dBm linear real degrees radians group imaginary delay Duration record length Duration Ref level Zero threshold Duration sample rate Window Resolution bandwidth Ref level offset Phase Unwrap Resolution Using the time controls The operation of the time domain controls for the spectral analyzer is summarized by the following rules m Duration selects the time from the beginning to the end of the acquired
304. ling Although it takes the samples sequentially in time it takes them randomly with respect to the trigger Random sampling occurs because the instrument sample clock runs asynchronously with respect to the input signal and the signal trigger The instrument takes samples independently of the trigger position and displays them based on the time difference between the sample and the trigger IT Interpolated Time mode is the default setting for these scopes IT is a real time sampling mode that interpolates points between sampled points to fill in the record length selected It uses sin x x interpolation as default method IT mode offers the same 500fs point resolution that ET can achieve but it does it with a single trigger event instead of requiring multiple triggers Your instrument can interpolate between the samples it acquires In equivalent time sampling it interpolates only when it does not have all the real samples it needs to fill its displayed waveform When setting ZOOM to progressively larger amounts of expansion the instrument then interpolates to create the intervening points in the displayed waveform If the time per division is set fast enough to require equivalent time but equivalent time is disabled the instrument interpo lates points There are two options for interpolation Sin x x or linear The instrument can also equivalent time sample to acquire more samples see Equivalent Time Sampling on page 3 31 Sin x x int
305. ll waveforms are displayed both live and derived waveforms math waveforms reference waveforms and so on The sections that follow cover display related usage m Displaying Waveforms on page 3 97 m Creating and Using Math Waveforms on page 3 145 Signal Connection and Conditioning This section presents overviews of the instrument features related to setting up the input signal for digitizing and acquisition It addresses the following topics m How to turn on channels and adjust vertical scale position and offset m How to set horizontal scale position and access record length and trigger position controls m How to get a basic trigger on your waveform NOTE Terminology This manual uses the terms vertical acquisition window and horizontal acquisition window throughout this section and elsewhere These terms refer to the vertical and horizontal range of the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires The terms do not refer to any windows or display windows on screen Figure 3 1 shows the model for each input channel gt K1 K2 K3 E To the 50 Q remainder k gt oe 2 ofthe acquisition 77 a amp E ii S attenuation Vertical S system Coupling vertical scale Vertical offset Input position termination Figure 3 1 Input and Acquisition Systems and Controls 3 2 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Use input conditioning to
306. lly have decreasing magnitudes compared to lower order harmonics Thus if you see a series of increasing harmonic magnitude values as frequency increases then you can suspect that they may be aliased In the spectral math waveform the actual higher frequency components are undersampled and therefore they appear as lower frequency aliases that fold back around the Nyquist point See Figure 3 58 You can test by increasing the sample rate and observing if aliases unwrap to different frequency positions Nyquist frequency 0 Hz 2 sample rate gY Frequency y c j T Z Aliased frequencies Actual frequencies ooo Figure 3 58 How aliased frequencies appear in a spectral waveform Another way to observe aliasing if you have a variable frequency signal source is to adjust the frequency slowly while watching the spectral display If some of the harmonics are aliased you will see the harmonics decreasing in frequency when they should be increasing or vice versa Using averaging in either the time or frequency domain will make these frequency shifts more sluggish To Take Cursor Measurements of a Spectral Math Waveform Once you have displayed a spectral math waveform use cursors to measure the frequency amplitude or phase angle See Taking Cursor Measurements on page 3 130 To Take Automated Measurements of a Spectral Math Waveform You can use automated measurements to measure spectr
307. lossary 10 Multipurpose knobs 3 133 B 16 MultiView zoom 3 105 3 118 See also Zoom feature 3 105 MyScope using 3 238 MyScope control window 3 235 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual NAND Glossary 10 NAND A Trigger control window 3 78 3 80 3 85 Neg duty cycle B 12 Neg overshoot B 11 Negative duty cycle A 2 Negative overshoot A 2 Negative width A 2 B 12 Negative A Trigger control window 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 Network connection 1 13 No persistence B 9 Noise pk pk B 12 pk pk measurement A 4 reducing in phase FFTs 3 188 reducing in phase waveforms 3 168 RMS A 4 B 12 Noise Pk Pk measurement C 41 C 51 Noise RMS C 41 C 51 NOR Glossary 11 NOR A Trigger control window 3 78 3 80 3 85 Normal trigger mode 3 46 3 52 Glossary 11 Normal display B 10 Numeric file format 3 214 Nyquist frequency 3 182 0 Objects display B 9 Off B 12 Offset B 4 DC See DC Offset vertical 3 12 3 151 3 152 Option installation 1 12 B 16 Option key 1 12 Option software 1 12 Options key B 16 Options list B 16 OR Glossary 11 OR A Trigger control window 3 78 3 80 3 85 Orientation printing 3 229 Output 3 199 Overshoot Glossary 12 P Page preview 3 230 Page setup B 2 Index 15 Index Palette printing 3 229 Paper printing 3 229 Pattern trigger 3 61 3 77 how to setup 3 78 pcAnywhere B 10 Peak detect 3 18 3 24 Peak detect acquisition mode Glossary 11 Pea
308. ltage measurement Max High Amplitude KOUM PositiveOvershoot Positive width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points rising edge MidRef default 50 and falling edge MidRef default 50 on a positive pulse Posttrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired after the trigger event Pretrigger The specified portion of the waveform record that contains data acquired before the trigger event TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Probe An input device Probe compensation Adjustment that improves low frequency response of a probe Proximal The point closest to a reference point As used in the instrument the beginning measurement point for timing measurements Pulse trigger A trigger mode in which triggering occurs if the instrument finds a pulse of the specified polarity with a width between or optionally outside the user specified lower and upper time limits Quantizing The process of converting an analog input that has been sampled such as a voltage to a digital value Real time sampling A sampling mode where the instrument samples fast enough to completely fill a waveform record from a single trigger event Use real time sampling to capture single shot or transient events Record length The specified number of samples in a waveform Recovered Clock A clock signal derived from and synchronous with a recei
309. ltage offset is incompatible with reference waveforms because offset is an acquisition control Connecting and Read the following topics related to waveform acquisition they provide details Conditioning Your Signals that can make it easier to set up and acquire your waveforms Probes and Signal Connection Select the probe or cable that brings the signal into the instrument Choose the probe or cable that best fits your acquisition task whether it is connecting an active probe to test a digital circuit or connecting to a test fixture through SMA cables to characterize a device The connection to the instrument depends on your application Tektronix provides a variety of probes and cables for this product Check your Tektronix catalog for connection accessories that may support your application More information about your probes can be found in the user manual for your probes Four acquisition channels are available Each channel can be displayed as a waveform or can contribute waveform data to other waveforms math and reference waveforms for example TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 3 Acquiring Waveforms A Coupling All instruments and probes specify a maximum signal level CAUTION Exceeding the maximum limit even momentarily may damage the input channel Use external attenuators if necessary to prevent exceeding the limits Coupling determines whether an input signal is directly connected to the input
310. lways stop an acquisition the SINGLE button or Single Sequence control will automatically stop acquisition when one complete acquisition sequence is completed See step 4 Set the stop mode on page 3 24 or access the online help from the Run Stop control window for more information Untriggered Roll Untriggered roll mode displays newly acquired data points at the right edge of the waveform record while moving older waveform data points to the left To stop acquiring data push RUN STOP see Figure 3 6 Use untriggered roll to continuously observe a slow process knowing that you can always see the most recent view of that process Math and measurements work after you push STOP Untriggered Roll with Single Sequence Untriggered roll mode with single sequence displays newly acquired data points at the right edge of the waveform record while moving older waveform data points to the left Acquisitions automatically stop after a complete waveform record is acquired see Figure 3 6 Use untriggered roll with single sequence to observe data for later viewing Untriggered roll New data points New data points AN A A tN VININ 1 VN VIN v U U U UNN cquisitions Acquisitions lt Oddata start lt Old data continues caine Untriggered roll with single sequence New data points Complete waveform record WW Old data Acquisitions E start k N A A AAAA Acquisitions VV U stop
311. m a waveform touch and drag across the segment of the waveform that you want to see in greater detail Then select Zoom 1 On Zoom 2 On Zoom 3 On or Zoom 4 On to magnify the highlighted waveform segment in one of the 4 zoom areas BM Zoom ton i Zoom 2 On ri Zoom 30n Note The instrument displays the box enclosed area on p _zomaon the waveform magnified in the graticule If two graticules m ata are shown the magnified waveform is shown in the MeasurementGatng bottom graticule Zoom Of m Push the MultiView Zoom button to split the screen ee and add a zoom graticule If the instrument creates two graticules the magnified waveform s is displayed in the lower graticule and the unmagnified waveform s in the upper graticule Use the Zoom Setup menu to change the graticule size 00n 25G a 500m 2 TAS 250V 100s s div S s 400ps pt s 400 Ed 400mv 3 106 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview Zoom a waveform To zoom waveforms Cont To zoom a waveform start by using one of two methods to select the axis that you want to adjust m Push the HORIZ button or the VERT button to select the axis that you want to adjust in the zoom graticule m Touch the HORIZ button or the VERT button in the control window to select which axis is controlled by the multipurpose knobs Use the multipurpose knobs
312. mean 3 T Cross sigma The eye crossing point as a percentage of eye height Crossing 100 PCrosStmean PBaS mean PTOPmean PBaS mean The top of the eye The base of the eye The peak to peak value for the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter PP TCrossipp The RMS value of the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter RMS TCrosstsigma 6 x Jitter RMS The peak to peak value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Noise Pk Pk PTOPok pk or PBASEpk pk The RMS value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user S N Ratio PTop PBase PTopsigma or PBaSesigma C 41 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 27 Supported communications measurements and their definition Cont Name Definition vay Duty Cycle Distortion The peak to peak time variation of the 1st eye crossing measured at the MidRef as a percent of the eye period DCD sec 100 x TDCD _ TCross2nean TCroSs2mean Quality Factor Ratio of eye size to noise g Quality Factor PTopmean PBaSemean PTOPsigma PBasesigma Levels Used in Taking Eye Measurements All eye diagram measurements are based on the power level the voltage level or the time locations of edges within each acquisition Figure C 5 shows an eye diagram an
313. ments May be calculated using either the min max or the histogram method With the min max method most useful for general waveforms it is the maximum value found With the histogram method most useful for pulses it refers to the most common value found above the mid point Holdoff trigger The time after a trigger signal that elapses before the trigger circuit will accept another trigger signal Trigger holdoff helps ensure a stable display Horizontal acquisition window The range of the segment of the input signal that the acquisition system acquires Horizontal bar cursors The two horizontal bars that you position to measure the voltage parameters of a waveform The instrument displays the value of the active moveable cursor with respect to ground and the voltage value between the bars Horizontal Reference Point The point about which the trace is expanded or contracted when horizontal size adjustments are made The horizontal reference point remains anchored as the rest of the trace grows or shrinks around it TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 7 Glossary Glossary 8 Initialize Setting the instrument to a completely known default condition Interpolation The way the instrument calculates values for record points when the instrument cannot acquire all the points for a complete record with a single trigger event That condition occurs when the instrument is limited to real time sampling and the time b
314. mple uses a DS1A signal and a CSA7000B Instrument but the example can easily be modified for other communications signals and other instruments Overview Creating a new mask Control elements and resources Install the test 1 Connect your DS1A signal to CH 1 through suitable cables hookup probes or adapters CSA7000B Instrument Signal Source O 00 08 w00e Q 00 00w Qo 1 om0 0 5 s 8 Output S UJ 2 Press DEFAULT SETUP Set instrument 3 From the button bar touch Masks and select the settings Masks tab 4 Touch the ANSI T1 102 button If not using an DS1A signal touch the button appropriate for the signal that you are using 5 Touch the mask standard field to display the drop down list 6 Select DS1A 2 048 Mb s from the list if not using a DS1A signal select the standard appropriate for the signal that you are using DS1C 3 152 Mbis DS2 6 312 Mbis 083 44 736 Mb s DS4NA 139 26 Mb s DS4NA Man Output 189 26 Mb s STS 1 Pulse 51 84 Mhi STS 1 Eye 51 84 Mb s STS 3 155 52 Mb s STS 3 Man Output 155 52 Mb s a es The mask is displayed but may not be aligned with the signal TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 23 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Creating a new mask cont Control elements and resources Align the mask 7 To align the signal with
315. n DC Compensation TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview To mask test a waveform cont Related control elements and resources Enable and set 10 In the Masks tab touch the Autofit button to enable the waveform waveform autofit function Autofit checks each waveform for any autofit mask hits If there are hits autofit repositions the waveform to parameters minimize hits The number of hits reported is the number after autofit has minimized hits The Autofit Config button lets you set the autofit maximum waveform repositioning parameters as a percentage of the horizontal and vertical divisions return to default settings or return to the Mask Setup control window Use the keypad to RAAN EE change the vertical or horizontal autofit parameters Vertical 10 div m Horizontal 11 Touch the Masks button to return to the Mask control window Set mask test 12 Touch the Masks Setup window Tolerance tab to set the Mask Margin Tolerance tolerance percentage of margin used in the mask test Use the control E margins knob keypad pop up keypad or up and down arrow buttons to enter the mask margin tolerance percentage The range of values is 50 to 50 Margins 5 0 Margin tolerance settings greater than 0 expand the size of the Ka rN segments making the mask test harder to pass margin tolerance settings less than 0 negative percent reduce
316. n the exported files 3 226 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont 13 If using FastFrame select the frame range to include in the copied files All Frames to include all frames in the copied files m Frames to enter a range of frames to include in the copied files _ Setup to copy 14 Select the Measurements tab to display the Measure measurements ments control window 15 Select Displayed Measurements to copy measurements that are displayed on screen select Measurements Snapshot to copy a snapshot of all measurements or select Histogram Data to copy histogram data in comma separated values format 16 Touch Data Format and select the data format text or numeric from the list Copy your file 17 Touch OK to accept your changes and copy the file to the clipboard Cancel to close the window without making changes or Help to access more information _ For further 18 For more help on copying files touch the Help button assistance to access contextual online help TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources FastFrame data range Frames fi to 1 All Frames Images Waveforms Measurements Data Format Displayed Measurements Text k C Measurements Snapshot Histogram Data CS Copy ox Cancel Help Data Format z Nume
317. nal desktop area To make the best use of the new display area do these additional steps to move the Windows controls to the external monitor 1 Click and hold on the Windows task bar in the area shown in Figure 1 7 and then drag it upwards and toward the external monitor The task bar will first go to the side of the internal monitor then to the side of the external monitor and finally to the bottom of the external monitor ig Start iE Ea TekScope amp I i 9 03 AM Click here to drag task bar Figure 1 7 Drag area for Windows task bar 2 Release the mouse when the task bar is where you want it to be 1 18 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation Internal monitor External monitor Tekironix SST azn Ba h o Select all gt Figure 1 8 Moving Windows desktop icons to the external monitor 4 Ifyou use the instrument help system you can drag the help windows to the external monitor so that you can read them while you operate the instrument 5 When you open any Windows application drag the windows from the application to the external monitor TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 19 Installation 1 20 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual SS eee Incoming Inspection Self Tests Equipment required Prerequ
318. nd the relative time between triggers of two specified frames To start FastFrame Time Stamps do the following steps Control elements and resources Overview Time stamping frames Prerequisites 1 FastFrame mode should be set up as described in the previous example 2 Turn on FastFrame as described on page 3 37 Selected Frame Frame Reference Frame Selection CHION Chi V Nee Frame HoriztAcy Frame a i SetUn 2 Multiple Frame Count FSk Readouts Turn readouts 3 In the Time Stamps controls touch Readouts to toggle on or off time stamp readouts on or off oo Cee ee ee Source Tracking Source aa On displays time stamp readouts see Figure 3 15 EE eie i Y no Rec Length Fims au 3 area on page 3 41 Time stamps are always acquired sooo Multiple Frame Count Frames m Off turns off the display of time stamp readouts The displayed time uses the following format Sel Ch F xxx DD MMM YYYY HH MM SS mmm yuyu nnn ppp Ref Ch F xxx DD MMM YYYY HH MM SS mmm uuy nnn ppp A DD MMM YYYY HH MM SS mmm uuu nnn ppp Where Sel and Ref Ch F xxx are the selected or reference frame number DD MMM YYYY is the date day month and year HH MM SS mmm is the clock time hours minutes seconds and milliseconds uuu nnn ppp is a fraction of a second to picoseconds TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 39 Acquiring Waveforms Overview Time stamping frames Cont Contro
319. ndicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the marking WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the marking CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product Symbols on the Product The following symbols may appear on the product A A CAUTION WARNING Protective Ground Refer to Manual High Voltage Earth Terminal Mains Disconnected Mains Connected OFF Power ON Power Standby xiv TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual DE ae O Environmental Considerations Product End of Life Handling Restriction of Hazardous Substances This section provides information about the environmental impact of the product Observe the following guidelines when recycling an instrument or component Equipment Recycling Production of this equipment required the extraction and use of natural resources The equipment may contain substances that could be harmful to the environment or human health if improperly handled at the product s end of life In order to avoid release of such substances into the environment and to reduce the use of natural resources we encourage you to recycle this product in an appropriate system that will ensure that most of the materials are reused or recycled appropriately The symbol shown to the left indicates that this product complies with the European Union s requirements according to Directive 2002 96 EC on waste electrical and electron
320. ndow you use to select input termination for a channel Displays the Coupling control window you use to select input coupling for a channel Displays the Bandwidth control window you use to set the bandwidth of a channel Displays the Probe Cal control window you use to check a probe status and compensate the entire signal path from the probe tip to digitized signal Displays the Deskew control window you use to compensate for propagation delays of input channels Displays the Attenuation control window you use to inform the instrument of the external attenuation or gain between the signal and the input channels TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 3 Vertical menu commands Cont Menu Submenu Function Zoom Setup Displays the Zoom Setup window you use to set up the horizontal and vertical zoom controls Zoom Graticule Size 50 50 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 50 50 80 20 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 80 20 100 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 100 Size Displays the Zoom control window you use to select the zoom graticule size Horizontal and Acquisition Commands Table B 4 lists the commands available from the Horiz Acq menu Table B 4 Horiz Acq menu commands Menu Submenu Function Horizontal Acquisition Displays the Horizontal and Acquisition Setup window you use to set up the Setup Horizontal and Vertical subsystems Horizontal You can set the recor
321. ned Push the Vertical CH button to toggle the channel on or off Reference Refi Ref4 Define an active reference waveform by From the Refs setup control window touch Display to toggle display of the selected reference on or off Saving a channel reference or math waveform to one of locations Ref1 Ref4 Recalling a waveform previously saved to a file into one of locations Ref1 Ref4 Both of these operations can be performed from the File menu Math Mathi Math4 Define a math waveform by creating a math When defining a math waveform you turn it on in waveform using existing sources channel math the Math setup control window and reference waveforms and measurements This operation can be performed by touching the Math button and then selecting Define Edit Expression Operations on Waveforms In general the method of adjusting vertically scaling offsetting positioning and so on is from the front panel adjust a waveform using its Vertical Scale and Position knobs Table 3 4 summarizes operations you can perform for the three waveform types 3 100 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Table 3 4 Operations performed based on the waveform type Control function Vertical Scale Vertical Position Vertical Offset Horizontal Scale Horizontal Position Horizontal Record Length Quick Horizontal and Vertical Scale Adjust Zoom MultiView Waveform supports Opera
322. ng between several control windows you can put the controls that you use into a custom control window This section contains procedures for creating MyScope control windows Detailed information is available in the online help Control elements and resources App Pies Utilities Help Current 18 05 New Control Window Open Control Window Edit Control Window Select MyScope gt New Control Window Click to expand a category Controls that can be added to your MyScope control window are contained within each category The categories match the menu bar to aid you in finding the controls that you normally use fe MyScope Setup Untitled Choose From These Controls H File aj bas H Edit Rename Tab a varucal H Horizontal 4 Trigger User Pref H Display H Cursors Measure H Mask z 3 235 MyScope Overview Make control selections Create a control window 3 236 To create a new MyScope control window Cont 3 6 Click a control to preview it Double click the control or click the to expand the control list If there is no then the control cannot be customized further Clear the check boxes to remove any components that you do not want included in the control Click and drag the control to your MyScope control window The control will snap to the nearest grid location when you release the mouse You can change the placement of the control
323. ng the existing name and using an attached keyboard to enter a new name To display the Save Instrument Setup As dialog from the Setup control window touch Save The Save Instrument Setup dialog allows for the entry of a file name file type and location Control elements and resources ups Delete Setups Save Instrument Settings Save Settings to File a 0 a 0 co 0 am E 0 ups Delete Setups Save Instrument Settings i 0 a 0 co 1 O m Save Settings to File 0 E Za Baye m Save Settings to File Ee J Save Save Instrument Setup As Save in SJ Setups vl ck Ey 030709_101546 set File name 030709_130553 i Save astype Setup Files set w Cancel I Auto increment file name Help TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save your setup Cont Name a 7 Use the Save in drop down list and buttons to navigate destination to the directory in which to save your setup Name your 8 Name your setup file by doing one of the following setup steps Accepting the default file name that appears in the File name field Clicking in the File name field and typing a new name replacing the default file name Clicking an existing name in the file list if any are listed Data in the existing file will be overwritten Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click the keyboard icon to display a virtu
324. nstructed from the selected waveform data You can display both vertical voltage and horizontal time histograms but only one at a time Use histogram measurements to get statistical measure ment data for a section of a waveform along one axis Horizontal histogram Histogram measurements File Edit Yertical Horiz 4cq Trig Display Cursors Measure Masks Math Appli Utilities Help Buttons Tek Run S ample 07 Jul 03 17 34 21 Top Limit 516 8m 5 0ns div 20 0GS s 50 0ps pt IGA Mean 1 993ns 1 99462 IEE Max 3 2ns u1 3 14250 IE Pk Pk 2 2ns u 2 12710 Ih 200mV A DE 224mv IRA Min 1 0ns 1 01774 Figure 3 35 Horizontal histogram view and measurement data 3 136 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms A histogram source can be any waveform channel or math including a reference waveform In addition to using limit controls to set histogram box boundaries you can also use standard Windows drag and drop to resize and reposition the histogram box Histograms are not available in FastFrame Record View XY or Zoom modes Using Histograms Histogram Size The maximum vertical histogram size is 200 The maximum horizontal size is 500 Histogram Counting Stays On Turning on histograms starts histogram counting and data accumulation A sample histogram display is shown in Figure 3 35 Histogram data is continuously accumulated until you
325. nt annotations Option Installation Displays a window that you use to enable optional features and external applications 1 If error code 351 is displayed from the Utilities Instrument Calibration menu run Signal Path Compensation and then from the Utilities Instrument Diagnostics menu run the diagnostics Help Commands Table B 13 lists the commands available from the Help menu on the menu bar Table B 13 Help menu commands Menu Function Help on Window Displays online help on the current window Contents and Index Displays the contents and index dialog of the online help Restore Help If the help window is minimized help is redisplayed Technical Support Displays how to obtain technical support Customer Feedback About TekScope Displays how to supply customer feedback Displays the instrument version number serial number instrument id copyright installed option list and option installation key Buttons Touch Buttons to switch to toolbar mode B 16 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual E E eee Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Product Description Serial Mask Testing This section of the user manual provides a high level description of the Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering functions These functions are standard with CSA7000B Series instruments Some of these functions are standard and some of the functions are options for the TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series Digital Storage
326. nter the data range of the data to include in the exported files m Save Samples between Cursors to include data between the cursors in the exported files Save Samples in Zoom Area to include data in zoom area 1 2 3 or 4 in the exported files All to include all data in the exported files 16 If using FastFrame select the frame range to include in the exported files All Frames to include all frames in the exported files m Frames to enter a range of frames to include in the exported files Control elements and resources Waveform Data Range C Samples f1 to 1 Save Samples between Cursors Save Samples in Zoom Area fi ri f All Number of Samples 5000 FastFrame data range C Frames f1 to 1 Al Frames TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Setup to export 17 Select the Measurements tab to display the Measure measurements ments control window 18 Touch Data Format and select the data format text or numeric from the list 19 Select the Measurements that you want to export Displayed Measurements exports measurements that are displayed on screen m Measurements Snapshot exports a snapshot of all measurements m Histogram Data exports current histogram data 20 Touch OK to accept your changes Cancel to close the window without making changes or Help to access more information TDS6000B
327. ntrol window touch measurement Setup Statistics statistics Statistics n o 10 From the Statistics control window select Off Mean or All Off Turns off measurement statistics Mean Displays the mean of measurements Weight n All Displays the Mean Min Max and Standard Deviation of measurements fa Close 11 To set the number of measurements included in the Dae measurement statistics touch Weight n and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the weighting Annotate Measurement annotation graphically shows the position on measurements the waveform of the elements from which the measurement result is derived Horizontal bars vertical bars horizontal arrows and vertical arrows indicate the elements used by the measurement See Measurement Annotations on page A 9 for a description of the annotations To annotate measure ments perform the following steps Setup Ref Levs 12 From the Measurements setup control window touch l Setup Annotation Gating niman Statistics nea Annotation Meas Y 13 From the drop down list select the measurement to annotate The readout of the annotated measurement contains an asterisk TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 125 Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements Cont Related control elements and resources Show more 14 To select the amount of annotation de
328. nts eye pattern measurements and measurement statistics m A large 10 4 inch 264 2 mm high resolution XGA color display that supports color grading of waveform data to show sample density m MultiView Zoom to view and compare up to four zoom areas at a time Lock and manually or automatically scroll up to four zoom areas m An intuitive graphical user interface UI with online help that is built in and available on screen m Internal removable disk storage m Wide array of probing solutions The instrument includes the following software m System Software Includes a specially configured version of Windows P preinstalled on the instrument Windows is the operating system on which the user interface application of this product runs and provides an open desktop for you to install other compatible applications Do not attempt to substitute any version of Windows that is not specifically provided by Tektronix for use with your instrument m Product Software Comes preinstalled on the instrument This software running on Windows is the instrument application This software starts automatically when the instrument is powered on and provides the user interface UI and all other instrument control functions You can also minimize the instrument application m Support Software The compact discs included with the instrument contain additional useful software and files that can be installed on your instrument m Readme file Th
329. nual Triggering Overview Set the setup and hold times Logic qualify the trigger To set mode and holdoff TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual To trigger on setup hold time violations Cont To set the setup time and the hold time relative to the clock 8 Touch Setup Time and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the setup time 9 Touch Hold Time and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the hold time See Figure 3 22 on page 3 84 Positive setup time always leads the clock edge positive hold time always follows the clocking edge Setup time always leads the hold time by at least 2 ns Ts Ty 2 ns Note Attempting to set either time to reduce the 2 ns limit adjusts the other time to maintain the limit In most cases you will enter positive values for both setup and hold time Positive values set the instrument to trigger if the data source is still settling inside the setup time before the clock or if it switches inside the hold time after the clock You can skew this setup hold violation zone that the setup and hold times form by entering negative values See Figure 3 21 on page 3 64 10 To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger on page 3 84 11 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types Control elements and resources Data Source ne Ck Data Level EAr ker ci Ta Hold Time Ons 4 Clock Source che Y Clock Ed
330. o Edita MyScope Control Use the following procedure to edit a MyScope control window Window Overview To edit a MyScope control window Control elements and resources Select from 1 Select MyScope gt Edit Control Window ath App Utilities Help menu Current New Control Window Open Control Window Edit Control Window C TekScope MyScope 050520_122455 tcw C TekScope MyScope trigger tew pe MyScope exne Select a control 2 Select the control window that you want to edit and x window then click Open avs ers Bill s Window tow l John s Controls tew S Signal Quality Test Set L tow a Signal Quality Test Set 2 tcw Filename igna Qualty Test Set E Files of type MyScope files tew x Cancel Help Quick Tips m Some controls function differently in a MyScope control window than they do in the standard control window For details see the online help m You can copy MyScope control windows tcw files to other TDS6000B or TDS6000C Series instruments TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 239 MyScope 3 240 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendices ee ee See ae Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported This appendix provides a list of all supported measurements and their defini tions An illustration showing the levels used to take measurements is also included Table A 1 Supported measurements and their definition Nam
331. o control the gated area touch Measurement Gating Cursor Zoom 1 Zoom 2 Zoom 3 Zoom 4 or Off Cursor Sets the gated area to the area between the cursors Use the multipurpose knobs to adjust the cursors on screen such that the area to measure is between the cursors Zoom 1 4 Sets the gated area to the waveform area contained in the Zoom graticule Off Turns off measurement gating Turning V Bar cursors off will not turn gating off You must turn gating off in the Measurement Gating control window or the Zoom drop down list TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources a Tek Run le y 07 Jul 03 16 03 26 a as Curs1 Pos AGs Curs2 Pos 151 245 hos ob r Measurement C EE SE Na S EENET EEEE EEEE EEE EE bhert mt Track Mode A P Indep Iracking beat ne x Setup Close i soomv SH Freg 11 o1kHz ye11 9505 115 136 Bus 40 0 sav Ba Ampi zov jt 98106 t2 151 2us 1 25MSis_ AOGNS pt Ea PkPk civ p 09811 M 2 DE 40 0mv Rise esc8rs 641 956 Vat 07 Jul 03 16 06 04 3 Position A Emy o MEAT ECO0mV 20 0ps 11 9kHz 11 9539 20V 1 98278 208v 2 09483 s3 ns 640 139 3 129 Measuring Waveforms Taking Cursor Measurements Because cursor measurements give immediate feedback of the amplitude or time values they measure they are usually quick to take and are more accur
332. o set up 3 91 Trigger and display 3 5 Trigger MAIN LEVEL knob 3 48 3 50 Trigger menu a event main trigger setup B 7 a gt b trigger sequence B 8 b event delayed trigger setup B 8 comm B 7 comm setup B 8 edge B 7 edge setup B 8 glitch B 7 glitch setup B 8 holdoff B 8 logic pattern B 7 logic pattern setup B 8 logic state B 7 logic state setup B 8 mode B 8 quick select B 7 run stop B 8 runt B 7 runt setup B 8 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index serial pattern B 7 serial pattern setup B 8 setup hold B 7 setup hold setup B 8 timeout B 7 timeout setup B 8 transition B 7 transition setup B 8 width B 7 width setup B 8 window B 7 window setup B 8 Trigger point defined 3 30 Trigger when A Trigger 3 79 A Trigger control window 3 78 3 81 transition is lt A Trigger control window 3 73 transition time gt A Trigger control window 3 73 Trigger with Reset 3 94 Trigger delayed how to set up 3 91 Trigger glitch how to set up 3 65 Trigger runt how to set up 3 67 3 96 Trigger slew rate how to set up 3 71 3 96 Trigger timeout how to set up 3 76 Trigger width how to set up 3 69 3 96 Pinpoint triggering overview of 3 43 Triggering advanced 3 45 advanced triggering 3 59 comm triggering 3 46 3 95 define inputs 3 80 define logic 3 80 define the clock source and edge 3 82 define the data source 3 82 d
333. ode mode tS ee Pees m f you are not in Single Sequence push RUN acquisitions you Deer cede ee i STOP to stop roll mode m f you are in Single Sequence roll mode acquisi tions stop automatically when a complete record is acquired TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Use the procedure that follows to set up roll mode acquisitions Control elements and resources See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Horizs cq Iig Display Cur ion Setup WimDB INTENSITY 3 27 Acquiring Waveforms Overview To disable roll 6 mode To set Roll Mode Cont Touch the Horiz button Select Acquisition tab from the Horiz Acq control window Or select Horizontal Acquisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu to display the Acquisition Mode control window Select the Acquisition tab Select Roll Mode OFF to disable roll mode Or whenever you set the Horizontal SCALE to 20 ms per division or faster roll mode turns off At record lengths greater than 200K points the time per division required to turn off roll mode becomes slower Note Envelope Average and Waveform Database acquisition modes inhibit roll mode Acquisition Control Background Acquisition Hardware 3 28 Control elements and resources Horiz 4eqg Iig Display Cur Horiz an Setup East Acquisitions Horizontal Acquisition m Acquisition Mode Sample Pk Detect Hi Res WimDB Avera
334. oftware 4 Use the backup tool that displays to select your backup media and to select the files and folders that you want to back up Use the Windows online help for information on using the Backup tool You can back up to the CD RW drive USB 2 0 memory device or to a third party storage device over the printer port rear panel The instrument system and application software is preinstalled at the factory If you need to reinstall the software refer to the instructions that accompany the CDs shipped with the instrument If you need to restore the operating system you also need the Windows license information from the Certificate of Authen ticity shipped with the instrument Read the software release notes README TXT ASCII file on the product soft ware CD before performing installation procedures This file contains additional installation and operation information that supercedes other product documenta tion To view the README TXT file open the Notepad Windows accessory Then open the file on the Product Software CD The Product Software CD also contains accessory software and files that you can choose to install in the instrument or in another computer Refer to the instruc tions that accompany the CD for installation information GPIB Programmer Online Help Software You can install the GPIB Programmer online help on the instrument but it may be more convenient to install it on the PC that is functioning as the GPIB system cont
335. oint These areas are used to establish the following directions m TCrossl mean the horizontal mean of the left crossing point at TCross m TCross1 jgma the horizontal standard deviation of the left crossing point at TCross 1 m TCross1pk pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at TCross1 m PCross1 mean the vertical mean of the left crossing point at PCross T2 Values The T2 values are vertical and horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point These areas are used to establish the following directions m TCross2mean the horizontal mean of the right crossing point at TCross2 m TCross2sigma the horizontal standard deviation of the right crossing point at TCrossy m TCross2pk pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the right crossing point at TCrossz DCD Values The duty cycle distortion DCD values are horizontal values associated with the rightmost crossing point at 50 of the eye height These areas are used to establish the DCD k pk the horizontal peak to peak deviation of the left crossing point at half the height of the eye TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 53 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 54 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual ee eee Appendix D Cleaning A Exterior Cleaning Use these procedures to clean your instrument If additional cleaning is required have your instrument serviced by qualified servic
336. olution lower bandwidth waveform This mode only works with real time noninter polated sampling A key advantage of Hi Res is its potential for increasing vertical resolution regardless of the input signal Table 3 1 indicates that you can obtain up to 13 significant bits with Hi res mode The instrument uses 16 bit memory This is allocated as 15 bits 1 sign bit Round off errors and internal noise limit the effective bits for Hi Res mode and signal averaging to about 13 bits You can calculate the theoretical number of bits of enhancement using the following formula where Nd is the number of samples taken during an acquisition interval Bits of enhancement 0 5 log Nd 3 18 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Table 3 1 Additional resolution bits aena een Resulting resolu Sample Rate S s Nd extra samples hancement bits tion in bits 5 00E 00 13 00 1 00E 01 13 00 2 50E 01 13 00 5 00E 01 13 00 1 00E 02 13 00 2 50E 02 13 00 5 00E 02 13 00 1 00E 03 13 00 2 50E 03 13 00 5 00E 03 13 00 1 00E 04 13 00 2 50E 04 13 00 5 00E 04 13 00 1 00E 05 12 80 2 50E 05 5 006403 e14 1214 5 00E 05 11 64 1 00E 06 11 14 2 50E 06 10 48 5 00E 06 9 98 1 00E 07 9 48 5 00E 07 8 32 1 00E 08 7 82 2 50E 08 5006 00 tte 7 16 5 006 08 2506 00 aes ese 1 25E 09 1006 00 ooo 6o TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 19 Acquiring Waveforms Sample 3 20 m Envelope
337. ommunications signal by using a Phase Lock Loop PLL clock recovery circuit m The recovered clock function only applies to NRZ source signals with a signal bit rate that is less than or equal to 3 125 Gb s The recovered clock and recovered data up to 1 25 Gb s are also available at the front panel of a CSA7000B Series instrument m When you select recovered clock the instrument attempts to trigger on and acquire a lock on the derived clock signal If the source data stream is interrupted or is very distorted then the instrument may not acquire a lock or may lose signal lock causing an unstable waveform display If this occurs verify that the source signal is correct and then push the LEVEL Push to set 50 front panel knob to force the instrument to reacquire a lock on the data stream TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 31 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Serial Pattern Trigger Serial pattern trigger sets the instrument to trigger on a user defined NRZ data stream pattern This section describes how to access and operate the serial pattern trigger function Serial Pattern Trigger Setup following procedure Overview Serial trigger setup Access the 1 From the button bar touch Trig and select the trigger control A Event trigger tab window The instrument opens the Trigger Setup control window Select serial 2 Touch the Serial button trigger The instrument displays the
338. on 3 114 Selected waveform Glossary 15 Selecting zoom 3 106 Sequential triggering 3 85 Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering C 1 Serial number B 16 Serial pattern setup B 8 Serial pattern trigger C 32 setup C 32 Serial pattern triggering 3 95 Serial pattern trigger B 7 Serial trigger C 3 C 32 accessing C 7 bit rate C 7 clk level C 7 clk polarity C 7 clk src C 7 coding C 7 control window C 7 data level C 7 data src C 7 editor C 7 format C 7 functions C 7 key features C 3 Index 17 Index standard C 7 Service support contact information xvii Set FFT vert scale 3 187 Set horizontal acquisition window 3 7 SET LEVEL TO 50 button 3 51 Set math averages B 14 Set thresholds A Trigger control window 3 78 3 80 3 85 Set time amp date B 15 Set to 50 main trigger menu 3 51 Set to ECL A Trigger control window 3 72 Set to TTL A Trigger control window 3 72 Set vertical acquisition window 3 7 Set hold trigger 3 63 Setting Glossary 14 Setting acquisition controls 3 17 Setting vertical range and position 3 13 Setup control window Glossary 14 dual display 1 14 file B 2 recalling 3 199 saving 3 199 second monitor 1 14 Setup and hold trigger how to setup 3 84 Setup hold setup B 8 Setup hold trigger 3 62 B 7 how to set up 3 81 maximum hold time 3 63 negative setup or hold times 3 63 positive setup or hold times 3 63 trigger point location 3 63 Shutdown B 2 S
339. on The ratio of eye top to base Ext Ratio PT0pmean PBasSemean The ratio of eye base to top in Ext Ratio 100 PBaS mean PTOPmean The ratio of eye top to base in dB Ext Ratio dB 10 Log PTOpmean PBas nean The eye height in watts or volts Eye Height PTopmean 3 PTOPsigma PBaS mean 3 PBasesigma The eye width in seconds Eye Width TCross2nean 3 TCross2yigma TCroSStmean 3 T Cross sigma The eye crossing point as a percentage of eye height Crossing 100 PCrosStmean PBaS mean PTOPmean PBaS mean The top of the eye The base of the eye The peak to peak value for the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter PP TCrossipp The RMS value of the edge jitter in the current horizontal units Jitter RMS TCrosstsigma 6 x Jitter RMS The peak to peak value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Noise Pk Pk PTOPok pk or PBASEpk pk The RMS value of the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user Ratio of the signal amplitude to the noise of the top or base of the signal as specified by the user S N Ratio PTop PBase PTopsigma or PBaSesigma C 51 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 51 Supported communications measurements and their definition Cont Name Definition vay Duty Cycle Distortion The peak to peak time variation of the 1st eye crossing measured at the MidRef as a percent of t
340. on e E e Sain a If the math waveform that you select has already been ATAM E a ion defined its math expression appears in the window You ml a ous can still use the waveform by touching the Clear button Ea Ba which discards its previous math expression Or repeat step 3 to select another waveform To define an 4 Touch one of the Predefined Expression buttons to use Caner aE press on expression a predefined math expression or touch Editor to m awe Define Edit a new math expression Predefined Expression EA EA TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 153 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To define a math waveform Cont Related control elements and resources To define edit 5 Use the control window at right to define a math amath expression See Table 3 8 on page 3 148 for expression expression examples some guidelines for creating your expression follow m Sources Ch1 Ch4 Ref1 Ref4 and Meas1 Meas8 should be set up before you use them channels acquired or acquisitions running references and automated measurement scalars defined m Math definitions are not implemented if sources or other elements of the definition are not valid m Use the backspace button to remove the last entry use the clear key to remove the entire expression and start over m Use parentheses to group terms in the expression to control execution order for example 5 Ch1 Ch2 Sele
341. on setup To Trigger ona 2 From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of Tri pattern the Trigger control window and touch Select 3 Touch Glitch Width Runt Timeout Setup and Hold Transition or the Window trigger type 4 From the Trigger if drop down menu select Logic Trigger if Glitch Occurs px 1 2V 3 84 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To define pattern inputs To set thresholds To define the logic For further assistance Trigger on a pattern Cont 5 To set the logic state for each of the input channels Ch1 Ch2 touch each Input Threshold and select either High H Low L or don t care X from the menu The instrument checks the logic state of up to two other available channels and triggers only if their conditions are met Each channel can have a value of high H low L or don t care X A value is considered high if the channel input voltage is greater than the specified threshold voltage a value is considered low if the channel input voltage is less than the specified threshold voltage Use the don t care selection for any channels that will not be used as part of the pattern To set the logic threshold for each channel select the channel threshold and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set each threshold To choose the logic pattern type you want applied to the input channels touch an avail
342. ons to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields Save the file 26 Touch the Save button to save the file To cancel without saving a file touch the Cancel button Save Cancel Help For further 27 For more help on exporting files touch the Help assistance button to access contextual online help TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 221 Data Input Output To Usean How you use the exported waveform depends on your application The following Exported Waveform example is a simple application the procedure is general and may require adapting for your spreadsheet or other data analysis tool Overview To use exported waveforms Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 MS Excel 97 2000 or 2002 running on a PC or on the instrument Access to a waveform exported by the instrument a Import the 3 In Excel select Open from the File menu Use the Text Inport Wizard Step 1 of 3 waveform data window that pops up to navigate to the directory UE Rake E yar caeay containing the file riginal data type Choose the file type that best describes your data A y Delimi Chi h b h field Note If using MS Excel 2000 or 2002 skip the next Aes Sai OS peti hale ans ss aan ec el step Start import at row 1 File Origin Windows ANSI had In the dialog that displays make the selections as shown at the
343. ontrol Resolution bandwidth usually adjusts the bandwidth of the analyzer filters without affecting the span and center frequency 3 164 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms i r a a a A A E iy ma al gt GE OE Y Y ETN f 7 i YN i f H _ F f S ae w E LA L l i a rf f E TE va a Y Koa NG Ya N E y ra ea Me Pa fy f Fe j y ie Nes P l ii Via E YN AAA aA nanninannan aAA AAAA al liea naaar at ia ee eee NW nwa ii N WAN EET SEN E EOE E E E bk ie od oR nee Ne eg ae Nee Center frequency is 1 0 and span is 0 5 Gate width 200 m Increase the center frequency Decrease the center frequency lt Set center frequency back to 1 and decrease the Span Decrease the Span again m Increase resolution by reducing Resolution BW increasing the gate length Increase resolution again by reducing the Resolution BW doubling the gate length Start E Center frequency Stop Span Figure 3 44 Effects of frequency domain control adjustments TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 165 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Using the magnitude controls Vertical units can be either linear or logarithmic You can select these choices by touching the Math menu button Then touch the Spectr
344. oom wipe such as Wypall Medium Duty Wipes 05701 available from Kimberly Clark Corporation If the display is very dirty moisten the wipe with distilled water or a 75 isopropyl alcohol solution and gently rub the display surface Avoid using excess force or you may damage the plastic display surface TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual aa Glossary a ae Glossary AC coupling A type of signal transmission that blocks the DC component of a signal but uses the dynamic AC component Accuracy The closeness of the indicated value to the true value Acquisition The process of sampling signals from input channels digitizing the samples into data points and assembling the data points into a waveform record The waveform record is stored in memory The trigger marks time zero in that process Acquisition interval The time duration of the waveform record divided by the record length Except in equivalent time the instrument acquires one data point for every acquisition interval Aliasing A false representation of a signal due to insufficient sampling of high frequencies or fast transitions A condition that occurs when an instrument digitizes at an effective sampling rate that is too slow to reproduce the input signal The waveform displayed on the instrument may have a lower frequency than the actual input signal Amplitude The High waveform value less the Low waveform value AND A logic Boolean function in which
345. orizontal histograms display the time of the rightmost nonzero bin minus the time of the leftmost nonzero bin Max Min Displays the maximum voltage or time Displays the minimum voltage or time The percentage of points in the histogram that are within 1 standard deviation of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram that are within 2 standard deviations of the histogram mean The percentage of points in the histogram that are within 3 standard deviations of the histogram mean TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual A 3 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 1 Comm measurements and their definition Name LZ A 4 Ext Ratio Extinction Ratio Extinction Ratio dB Eye Height Eye Width Crossing Eye Top Eye Base Jitter Pk Pk Jitter RMS Jitter 60 Noise Pk Pk Noise RMS Definition The ratio of eye top to base Ext Ratio PTo0pmean PBasS mean The ratio of eye base to top in Ext Ratio 100 PBaS mean PTOPmean The ratio of eye top to base in dB Ext Ratio dB 10 Log PTOpmean PBas nean The eye height in watts or volts Eye Height PTopmean 3 PTOPsigma PBaS mean 3 PBasesigma The eye width in seconds Eye Width TCross2nean 3 TCross2sigma TCroSSImean 3 T Cross sigma The eye crossing point as a percentage of eye height Crossing 100 PCrosStmean PBaS mean PTOPmean PBaS mean The top of the
346. orizontal position from the same trigger point apply to all channels simultaneously One trigger from a single trigger source will locate a common horizontal acquisition window for all active channels which you can shift in parallel by setting the horizontal position control The horizontal acquisition window determines the waveform records extracted from all signals present at all active channels You can think of the horizontal acquisition window as cutting across any input signals present in the input channels to extract the same slice of time into waveform records See Figure 3 5 gt O Ch3 record Sy Common horizontal position and delay Ch4 record Common record start point and record length Figure 3 5 Common trigger record length and acquisition rate for all channels Setting Acquisition Controls This section presents overviews of the instrument acquisition features those that start and stop acquisitions and those that control how the instrument processes the data as it is acquired just sampled or averaged or enveloped Special features keys to using and operation controls are covered Roll mode gives a strip chart recorder like display for low frequency signals Roll mode lets you see acquired data points without waiting for the acquisition of a complete waveform record For example in normal acquisition mode when the Horizontal Scale is 1 second per division 10 seconds are re
347. ouch Start Frame and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of the starting frame you want to view Touch of Frames and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to enter the number of frames you want to view The number of frames that you select to view will appear overlaid on the display The frames within the selected range are displayed superimposed over each other in the color of the Source channel The Selected Frame is also superimposed on the display of frames but in a dark blue color The blue line is drawn in normal or monochrome color selections no persistence and when no Refs are displayed You may find it difficult to distinguish the dark blue Selected Frame if the selected color palette is Spectral or Temp Control elements and resources FastFrame Rec Length 5000 Frame Count FastFrame Rec Length Frame Count Time Stamos Reference Frame ame Viewing Se Acted F ne Selection Frame Controls Tracking an Frame 1 Readouts Source TEA Chi Y Wie HoriztAcy SetUp Frame Viewing Selected Frame Source chi Live tart Frame s Time Stamps Selection Reference Frame Controls Tracking Source marg HoriztAcq Frame Frame 7 Readouts Tames of Frames n 1 Overlay TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Time Stamping Frames Use Time Stamps to display the absolute trigger time for a specific frame a
348. ouch the Help button while in the Zoom setup window to access a context sensitive overview of the MultiView Zoom controls and their setup Customizing the Display Using Display Controls 3 110 Control elements and resources Zoom 2 Zoom 1 Zoom 2 Zoom 3 Zoom 4 a Setup Close Zoom 4 Lock AutoScroll Scroll Speed 1 a Use the display customizing features this instrument provides to present the display elements color graticule style waveform representation and so on according to your preferences From the Color Palette you can select temperature spectral or gray scale color grading of a waveform so that its data color or intensity reflects the sample density of the data in that area of the waveform Read the following topics they provide the details that can help you set up the the display system so that it displays waveforms and other display elements as you prefer TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Display Settings Table 3 5 lists display attributes that you can set and where they are accessed Table 3 5 Customizable display elements Display attribute Graticule Style Display Persistence Display Style Screen Text Color Palette Record View and Waveform Data base Reference Colors Math Colors Menu name Display Disp Display Disp Display Disp Display Disp Display Disp Display Disp
349. p 3 84 main trigger menu 3 65 3 67 Window 3 170 Blackman Harris 3 189 characteristics 3 172 characteristics of 3 170 Flattop2 3 189 functions 3 160 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Gaussian 3 189 Hamming 3 189 Hanning 3 189 Kaiser Bessel 3 189 rectangular 3 189 rectangular vs bell shaped 3 175 selecting 3 171 setup B 8 Tek Exponential 3 189 trigger 3 61 Window trigger defining limits 3 75 how to setup 3 84 logic inputs 3 75 setting up 3 74 Source 3 74 threshold levels 3 74 trigger if 3 75 Windows descriptions of 3 189 X XY format 3 34 Glossary 17 XYZ format 3 34 Y YT format 3 34 Glossary 17 Z Zero phase reference point 3 173 establishing for impulse testing 3 173 Zoom 3 99 3 101 3 105 3 118 3 129 100 B 5 B 7 50 50 B 5 B 7 80 20 B 5 B 7 a waveform 3 107 and waveforms 3 105 button 3 106 controls B 4 B 5 feature 3 105 graticule B 5 B 7 graticule size B 7 lock 3 110 reset zoom factors 3 109 scroll 3 110 setup 3 101 B 5 B 6 Size B 5 Index 23 Index Index 24 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual
350. p TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 179 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Amplitude Time 90 dB side lobe aL ANa Mi LLC PUTT LTT TT TW Frequency bins Scallop loss is 0 0065 dB dB 0 05 Frequency bins Figure 3 56 Time and frequency domain graphs for the Flattop2 window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 180 Creating and Using Math Waveforms m Tek Exponential Window The Tek Exponential window see Figure 3 57 was invented at Tektronix In the time domain it is not a symmetrical bell shape as is the case with the other windows see Figure 3 57 Instead it is exponential with a peak at the 20 position of the time domain gate The frequency domain shape is triangular Use this window for impulse response testing where the 20 position is the zero phase reference point More of the acquired data record length is used to capture the impulse response Exact details of how to compute its values were published in the article Impulse response testing lets a single test do the work of thousands by John Pickerd in EDN magazine April 27 1995 page 95 Amplitude Time 67 dB side lobe Frequency bins Figure 3 57 Tek Exponential window in the time and the frequency domains Effects of trigger j
351. pend on the input source characteristics which you want to observe and the characteris tics of the window function The window characteristics are shown in Table 3 10 m FFT length The FFT length is controlled so that the gate width in samples is never more than 0 8 of the FFT length Thus zero fill is always in effect This essentially eliminates scallop loss errors in magnitude that would occur without zero fill TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 171 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Table 3 10 Window characteristics Window Rectangular Hamming Hanning Kaiser Bessel Blackman Harris Gaussian Flattop2 Tek Exponential 3 172 pee Ea e 3 dB BW in bins Scallop loss side lobe reference Coefficients 1 3 0 543478 0 456522 1 72 1 02 dB 69 dB 50 0 40243 0 49804 0 09831 0 00122 1 92 0 81 dB 92 dB 50 0 35875 0 48829 0 14128 0 01168 2 0 0 76 dB 79 dB a 3 75 not cosine series 3 8 0 0065 dB 90 dB 50 0 213348 0 206985 0 139512 0 043084 0 003745 1 42 0 60 dB 67 dB na m 3 dB BW in Bins This is the bandwidth of the filter response of the spectral analyzer to a sine wave input for a given window function It is given in units of bins A bin is the interval between spectral samples when the interpolation ratio due to FFT zero fill is one The bandwidth is measured between the points on the lobe that are 3 dB down from the peak of the lobe The bandwidth in Hz may be computed by
352. pendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Table C 16 IOF masks None SFI SPI 5 TC Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TC Clock 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Clock 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Data 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Data 3 125 Gb s VSR 0C192 STM64 1 24416 Gb s Table C 17 PCI Express masks None Table C 18 SAS masks None SAS IR AASJ 1 5 Gb s SAS IR 3 0 Gb s SAS CR AASJ 3 0 Gb s Supported Communication Trigger Codes and Standards C 38 SAS IR 1 5 Gb s SAS CR AASJ 1 5 Gb s SAS CR 3 0 Gb s SAS XR AASJ 3 0 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TC Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Data 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TC Data 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RD Data 3 125 Gb s TFI 5 2 488 Gb s PCI Express Transm PCI Express Recv 2 5 Gb s 2 5 Gb s SAS CR 1 5 Gb s SAS XR AASJ 1 5 Gb s SAS XR 3 0 Gb s SAS SATA 3 0 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Clock 2 488 Gb s SFI SPI 5 TA Clock 3 125 Gb s SFI SPI 5 RB Clock 3 125 Gb s TFI 5 3 1104 Gb s SAS XR 1 5 Gb s SAS SATA 1 5 Gb s SAS IR AASJ 3 0 Gb s Tables C 19 through C 26 list all supported communication trigger standards Note that HDB3 B3ZS B6ZS and B8ZS are considered to be subsets of the AMI code set TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Trigg
353. plication to B e determine if it has these capabilities and for instructions E ooe in using them k 5 00E 07 oo S a ii ce aS Ca Eph K im TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 223 Data Input Output Overview To use exported waveforms Cont Control elements and resources For further 9 For more help on exporting waveforms touch the assistance Help button in the window to access contextual online help To Copy Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to copy a waveform to the clipboard Overview To save a waveform Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Make sure the waveform image or measurement to be copied exists that is your source must be a channel an active math waveform an active reference and so forth m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 m See page 3 24 for acquisition setup m See page 3 43 for trigger setup Select for copy 2 From the menu bar select Edit and then select Select sie Eat vertical Honz Acq Trig Display Cursors Measure for Copy The menu lists all available waveform image and measurement types available for export Select for Copy Full Screen bitmap Copy Setup Graticule bitmap Full Screen to export a bitmap of all screen m e Wa 2 contents Measurement data m Graticule to export a bitmap of only the graticule area m Waveform to export waveform data m Measurements to export measurement data Sele
354. polarity C 13 positive polarity C 13 print C 12 recall mask dialog C 20 recalling a user mask from disk C 20 repeat C 13 reset C 14 results C 14 results viewing C 25 running C 14 samples to test C 12 save mask as dialog C 19 save waveform C 12 saving a user mask C 16 saving a user mask to disk C 19 segments C 22 segments and mask hits C 26 selecting a mask segment C 17 selecting a mask standard C 15 selecting a mask vertex C 17 selecting the mask type C 15 selecting the source C 24 setting instrument settings C 21 setup C 9 C 25 setup window C 9 signal source C 9 SRQ C 12 standard C 9 C 10 C 15 standards and bandwidth C 27 start testing C 14 stop test C 14 summary C 14 system bandwidth C 27 tolerance C 11 C 24 C 26 triggers C 25 vertex adding C 22 vertices C 26 waveform autofit C 11 waveform resizing C 10 Index 11 Index Mask types 1394b C 37 C 47 ANSI T1 102 C 35 C 45 Ethernet C 35 C 45 Fibre Channel C 36 C 46 Fibre Channel Electrical C 36 C 46 InfiniBand C 37 C 47 IOF C 38 C 48 ITU T C 35 C 45 PCI Express C 38 C 48 Rapid IO LP LVDS C 37 C 47 Rapid IO Serial C 37 C 47 SAS C 38 C 48 Serial ATA C 37 C 47 SONET SDH C 35 C 46 USB 1 2 2 0 C 37 C 47 Mask types supported C 34 C 45 Math overview 3 145 Math color 3 111 Math menu Chi Ch2 B 14 Chi Ch2 B 14 Ch3 Ch4 B 14 Ch3 Ch4 B 14 display on off B 13
355. powered up 2 Make sure the waveform to be saved exists that is your 0000 source must be a channel an active math waveform or an active reference Display the waveform with the setup in which you want to save it m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 2 m See page 3 24 for acquisition setup For help in setup and acquiring waveforms check the pag references at right m See page 3 43 for trigger setup Display the 3 From the toolbar touch Refs and select the Ref 1 to Ref Refs reference 4 tab of the reference in which you want to save the control window waveform Save Wim to Refi Recall Ref fron 5 m Select the 4 Select the Ch Math or Ref tab of the waveform that il A Y im waveform to you want to save and then touch the number of the save channel math or reference waveform that you want to ne ie save 3 206 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To save a waveform Cont Control elements and resources Label the 5 If you want to label the waveform touch Label and use E Save Wim to Refi Recall Refi from waveform your keyboard or the pop up keyboard to create a label Ps Postion i ay aa for your waveform Ea J Fez 3 Save Wim to File D Wim Fild Label j is Jelete You can label any channel math or reference waveform an eB and position the label relative to the display edge and p ee Sa eo ees the vertical position of the waveform using the Label
356. pplications 1 12 derivative math waveforms 3 150 integral math waveforms 3 152 optional 1 11 Area A 1 B 12 Glossary 2 Attenuation Glossary 2 Attenuation input B 4 Auto increment file name 3 200 3 203 3 208 3 221 AutoBright 3 112 Automated measurements 3 119 of FFT math waveforms 3 183 Automatic measurements 3 119 high and low levels defined A 6 levels used in taking A 5 A 6 C 42 C 52 reference levels defined A 6 reference levels defined eye pattern optical A 7 C 43 C 53 Automatic trigger mode 3 46 3 52 Glossary 2 Autoset 3 11 B 5 Glossary 2 how to execute 3 9 undoing 3 9 undo B 5 Autoset Undo 3 9 Autoset undo B 3 AUX Out configuration B 15 Auxiliary trigger 3 45 3 51 Average 3 20 3 24 3 36 Average acquisition mode Glossary 2 Averaging Glossary 2 spectral math 3 182 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index B event delayed trigger setup B 8 B Trigger control window 3 93 Backing up user files 1 9 Bandwidth B 4 Glossary 2 Enhanced 3 5 Bitmap file format 3 214 Blackman Harris 3 170 3 172 3 177 3 189 Burst width A 1 B 12 Button DELAY 3 49 E mail on Trigger 3 58 FORCE TRIG 3 57 SET LEVEL TO 50 3 51 SINGLE TRIG 3 58 ZOOM 3 105 3 106 C Calibrate probes 3 141 Calibrate the oscilloscope 3 140 Calibration instructions 3 140 Calibration status 3 140 CD ROMs optional applications 1 11 Center 3 164 Ch1 Ch2 B 14 Ch1 Ch2 B 14
357. purpose knobs to position each cursor on Eec Pos the waveform to measure the feature that interests you 31 Read the results in the cursor readout The cursor readout is displayed below the graticule as shown here or at the bottom of the graticule area The figure shows the cursor measurement of a frequency magnitude on an FFT The readout reads about 0 dB 4 0 mdB because it is aligned with the reference level offset The other readout reads 10 08 dB indicating the magnitude of the frequency it is measuring is 10 08 dB relative to reference level offset Display of the source waveform is turned off The cursor units will be in dB or volts for magnitude waveforms and in degrees or radians for those measuring phase OOnsdiv 25GS a_ B00ps pt 260mV 2 4 32 Select V Bars and use the multipurpose knobs to align the two vertical cursors to points of interest along the horizontal axis of the waveform 33 Read the frequency difference between the cursors from the A readout Read the frequency of each cursor relative to the zero frequency point from the cursors readout For further 34 Touch the Help button in the toolbar to access assistance context sensitive help on math waveforms 3 192 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Spectral Math Example The following procedure is an example of setting up the instrument to perform spect
358. puted This is true of impulse response testing where an impulse is fed into the system and the spectrum of the response of the system output is computed Group delay measures how well a system passes a signal in terms of phase distortion Group delay is the negative derivative of the phase with respect to frequency This feature is not useful for analysis of harmonic content of signals where the phase response is not continuous m Impulse Response Testing When performing impulse response testing of a system place the impulse at the zero phase reference position of the acquisition This produces a correct phase display Because the Tek Exponential window has its zero phase reference position at the 20 point more of the impulse response is captured All other window functions have their phase reference position at the 50 position in the gated region There are several ways to adjust the position of the zero phase reference point with respect to your input signal m Adjust the spectral analyzer gate position TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 169 Creating and Using Math Waveforms 3 170 m Perform fine adjustment using the front panel trigger level control m Adjust the front panel HORIZONTAL POSITION control Using windows to filter There are eight different spectral analyzer windows Rectangular Hamming Hanning Kaiser Bessel Gaussian Blackman Harris Flattop2 TekExponential In the time domain a window
359. quired to fill the waveform record Without roll mode you must wait 10 seconds to see any waveform display With roll mode you can start seeing results almost immediate ly TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 17 Acquiring Waveforms The following table indicates which acquisition features and modes are incompatible with other features or modes Control Feature Incompatible with Explanation Average Single acquisition Acquisitions continue until the specified number of wave forms have been acquired and averaged Envelope Single acquisition Acquisitions continue until the specified number of wave forms have been acquired for the enveloped waveform Roll Measurements Measurements are not available until you stop acquisitions Using the Acquisition Consider the mode that you want to use to acquire data Controls m Sample The instrument does no postprocessing of acquired samples The instrument saves the first sample of perhaps many during each acquisition interval an acquisition interval is the time covered by the waveform record divided by the record length Sample mode is the default mode m Peak Detect The instrument stores both the lowest and highest samples over a two acquisition interval period This mode only works with real time noninterpolated sampling m Hi Res The instrument creates a record point by averaging all samples taken during an acquisition interval Hi Res results in a higher res
360. quivalent Time Sampling The instrument uses equivalent time sampling to extend its sample rate beyond its real time maximum sampling rate but only under two conditions m You must have selected Equivalent Time in the Acquisition Setup control window m You must have set the instrument that requires a faster sampleing rate than it can support in real time sampling mode If both conditions are met the instrument takes a few samples with each trigger event and eventually obtains enough samples to construct a waveform record The instrument makes multiple acquisitions of a repetitive waveform to obtain the sample density required for a waveform record See Figure 3 12 Equiva lent time sampling should only be used on repetitive signals The sampling speeds affect the mode the instrument uses to sample waveforms m The instrument always real time samples at slower time base settings faster time settings force the instrument to switch from real time sampling to equivalent time sampling or interpolation depending on whether Equivalent Time or Interpolated Real Time is selected TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 31 Acquiring Waveforms 3 32 Interpolation es Oe eee 1st Acquisition cycle Mo M 3rd Acquisition cycle SIE ee nth Acquisition cycle ees Figure 3 12 Equivalent time sampling 2nd Acquisition cycle The type of equivalent time sampling the instrument uses is called random equivalent time samp
361. r pose knob makes smaller adjustments TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 133 Measuring Waveforms To Set the Cursor Sources You must target the cursors to the source they are to measure See Cursors Treat Sources Independently on page 3 132 To do so use the procedure that follows Overview To set the cursor sources Prerequisites 1 Display the 2 cursor controls window Select the 3 cursor sources Select a 4 cursor type Change cursor 5 position 3 134 Display the waveform to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform Push the CURSORS front panel button or from the toolbar touch Cursors From the Cursor Source menu select the channel math or reference tab and then select the waveform to take cursor measurements on If you are using Waveform or Screen cursors your must select a source for both cursors by first touching a cursor button before selecting a source Note If a waveform is not available its source button is grayed out From the Cursor Type menu select the H Bars V Bars Waveform or Screen cursor type See Table 3 6 on page 3 130 for an explanation of the cursor types To change the position of a cursor use the multipurpose knobs or the keypad to move a cursor Related control elements and resources AA oo00 See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Cur
362. r B 9 monochrome gray B 10 monochrome green B 10 n B 10 Index 6 no persistence B 9 objects B 9 persistence controls B 9 remote display B 10 reset all B 9 screen text B 9 sin x x B 9 spectral grading B 10 temperature grading B 10 user palette B 10 variable persistence B 9 vectors B 9 waveform display on B 10 waveform interpolation B 9 xy 3 34 yt 3 34 Display on off B 1 B 4 B 13 B 14 Display trigger T B 10 Displaying waveforms 3 97 access the display Setup dialog box 3 114 acquisition preview 3 99 adjust the horizontal reference 3 104 change graticule style 3 116 change waveforms colors 3 116 checking the zoom scale and position 3 109 color palette 3 111 customizable display elements 3 111 customize graticule amp waveforms 3 116 customizing the display 3 110 date and time 3 112 defining and displaying waveforms 3 100 display and acquisition controls 3 102 display control 3 99 display elements 3 98 display persistence 3 111 display settings 3 111 display style 3 111 dots 3 111 3 114 explore the zoom controls 3 104 graticule 3 98 3 116 graticule area 3 98 graticule style 3 111 graticules 3 101 horizontal position 3 101 3 102 horizontal position and the horizontal reference 3 102 horizontal record length 3 101 horizontal reference 3 99 3 102 horizontal scale 3 101 horizontal zoom 3 109 horizontal scale readout 3 99
363. r points exist Not all of these will result in the same display The holdoff period allows the instrument to trigger on the correct edge resulting in a stable display Holdoff is adjustable from 250 ns minimum holdoff available to 12 seconds maximum holdoff available To see how to set holdoff see To set holdoff on page 3 55 You can also set an auto holdoff Auto holdoff varies with the horizontal scale and is equal to 5 divisions times the current time division setting Random holdoff selects a new random holdoff time for each acquisition cycle Rather than helping the instrument synchronize on a particular feature of a pulse train random holdoff prevents synchronization helping to reveal features of some pulse trains Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff THULE UL ULI Indicates trigger points Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Holdoff Trigger level TH i i i At the longer holdoff time for the top waveform unstable triggering occurs With a shorter holdoff set for the bottom waveform triggers all occur on the first pulse in the burst to remedy the unstable trigger Figure 3 18 Holdoff adjustment can prevent false triggers Trigger Coupling Trigger coupling determines what part of the signal is passed to the trigger circuit Edge triggering can use all available coupling types AC DC Low Frequency Rejection High Frequency Rejection and Noise Rejection All the advanced trigger types use only DC coupling See To set
364. r settings to those appropriate for displaying a waveform of the specified type If the signal is not within the mask touch the Autoset button to center the waveform DEES in a mask If Autoset did not align the signal in the mask adjust z the instrument vertical and horizontal controls If you touch the Autoset button and the Autoset Undo preference is On the instrument will display an Autoset Undo window Touch the Undo button to return to the previous settings or touch the Close button to remove the window TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 9 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Select the mask 5 standard Select 6 display parameters Autoset the 9 signal C 10 To mask test a waveform cont To specify the mask standard select a standard from the drop down list CSA7000B Series only Optical mask type standard combinations also display an optical Bessel Thompson Filter button that lets you turn on or off the fourth order Bessel Thomp son frequency filter default is On When the filter is On In the Masks tab touch the Display button to toggle mask display on or off The mask must be turned on to do mask testing Touch the Hit Count button to turn on or off hit counting The hit count is shown in the Pass Fail Results tab Touch the Display Config button to set mask hit highlighting and to lock the mask to the waveform Lock Mask to Waveform resizes
365. ral analysis of a signal This example uses the FAST EDGE signal available on the front panel of the instrument Overview Spectral math example Control elements and resources Install the test 1 hookup gt Display the waveform Connect the FAST EDGE signal to CH 1 through a E suitable cable and adapter Aera Sj 2 Bee 8 ob elses e e fps al aaaa Press DEFAULT SETUP pee ee LJ Press AUTOSET From the toolbar touch Vert and select the Chan 1 tab Touch Offset and using the multipurpose knobs or Sen s keypad set the offset to 260 mV and the Ch1 Scale to 200 mV TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 193 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Spectral math example cont Control elements and resources Display the 6 From the toolbar touch Math and select the spectral math Math 1 tab waveform Spectral Analysis 7 Touch the Predefined Mag button m Predefined The instrument sets up a predefined magnitude spectral a a analysis waveform 8 To see the settings touch the Spectral Analysis Setup o c Specraegict ce ec Length indow Type enter Fre button ca er ane Ee Scale sets the vertical scale factor and lets you set Leva fet Bims iowa ir the vertical scale m orin Gits E m Reference sets the value at the top of the display e and offset sets the waveform position with respect to its g
366. reating and Using Math Waveforms Integral waveforms find use in the following applications m Measuring power and energy such as in switching power supplies m Characterizing mechanical transducers as when integrating the output of an accelerometer to obtain velocity The integral math waveform derived from the sampled waveform is computed based on the following equation n y n scale 2 O Dy i 1 Where x i is the source waveform y n is a point in the integral math waveform scale is the output scale factor T is the time between samples Since the resultant math waveform is an integral waveform its vertical scale is in volt seconds its horizontal scale is in seconds The source signal is integrated over its entire record length therefore the math waveform record length equals that of the source waveform Offset and Position When creating integrated math waveforms from live channel waveforms consider the following topics m You should scale and position the source waveform so that it is contained on screen Off screen waveforms may be clipped which will result in errors in the integral waveform m You can use vertical position and vertical offset to position your source waveform The vertical position and vertical offset will not affect your integral waveform unless you position the source waveform off screen so that it is clipped DC Offset The source waveforms that you connect to the instrument often have a DC
367. rence level In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base In detailed mode 2 horizontal arrows indicating the position of the crossings Q Factor 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base In detailed mode 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye top and base TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual A 13 Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported A 14 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual a ET Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Both the instrument menu bar and a toolbar allow you to control instrument operation Where possible this manual describes operation using first the front panel and then the toolbar This appendix describes functions available from the menu bar For more information about these commands see the online help File Commands Table B 1 lists the commands available from the File menu on the menu bar Table B 1 File menu commands Menu Submenu Function Reference Waveforms Reference Setup Displays the Reference Setup window that you use to set up and control reference waveforms Display On Off Displays the Waveform Display control window that you can use to turn the display of waveforms on and off Position Scale Displays the control window that you use to position the waveform and set the vertical scale Label Displays a control window that you use to label your waveforms Save Wim D
368. rence waveforms see Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 205 4 Use the Vertical knobs to achieve a good display of each waveform that you select Set horizontal 5 To make sure the main graticule is selected push the E OSNA display MultiView Zoom button to toggle it off Use the horizontal parameters knobs to scale and position the waveform on screen and to set sample resolution spas ted a MORE SAMPLES lt SCALE gt ee Scaled Horizontally Positioned Horizontally fa na The Resolution knob sets the record length See discussion of record length on page 3 15 Push PUSH TO SET TO 50 if required to stabilize ruen Toser display TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 103 Displaying Waveforms Overview Adjust the 6 horizontal reference Quick adjust 8 the timebase zoom Explore the 9 zoom controls 3 104 To display waveforms in the main graticule Cont To adjust the point around which the waveforms expand and contract touch the Horizontal Reference and drag it left or right on screen Move the Horizontal Reference along the horizontal axis until it aligns to the point on the waveform that you want to be stationary on screen Note If Delay is off Horizontal Reference is the same as Horizontal Position Release the Horizontal Reference and
369. res that follow to clear it To clear all references and setups use Tek Secure Overview To clear references Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be powered up You must have access to a waveform saved by the instrument m See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 Display the 2 From the toolbar touch Refs and select the tab Ref 1 reference to Ref 4 of the reference that you want to delete control window os ies E crerreeremmenenmer Display Position ela ee oo ge Label Aw A A Delete the 3 Touch Delete to delete the reference waveform Ban reference Horz Pos TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 211 Data Input Output Overview To clear references Cont Control elements and resources Delete a 4 To display the Delete Reference Waveform window Recall Reft from File reference from the Delete Wfm File window touch Delete Fes waveform file Delete Wim File od Delete Close The Delete Reference Waveform window allows Delete Reference Waveform xl navigation to directories lists waveform files in the Lookin a Wavetoms acer directory and provides for selection of a waveform file Sheree eee 9 030709_102354 wfm a TOSWwFmaoo wfm TOSwmad Lwin MI TOsSwfmnoo2 wfm File name 030709_102346 wiml E Files of type Waveform Filestwim zx Cancel Help Find the file 5 Use the Look in drop down list an
370. response Pe esis Res BW 40 0MHz_ Ref Level 20 008 FFT waveform of the gt m t m phase response peer tills IG 100mv Q WW y2 57 1dB 2 72 5MHz 200ns div HEH 20 0dB 31 2MH OMG Ay 4 160B 2 145 OMHZ 25GS s 400ps pt 1 0 125MHz Ay Af 57 38ndB Af 72 5MHz DE 4 0mVv gt 52 34dB Figure 3 38 Spectral analysis of an impulse TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 145 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Defining Math Waveforms 3 146 This instrument supports mathematical combination and functional transforma tions of waveforms it acquires Figure 3 39 shows this concept Channel waveform Math expression Math waveform Ch2 Function source Math1 Figure 3 39 Functional transformation of an acquired waveform You create math waveforms to support the analysis of your channel and reference waveforms By combining and transforming source waveforms and other data into math waveforms you can derive the data view that your application requires You can create math waveforms that result from m Mathematical operations on one or several waveforms add subtract multiply and divide Logical operations greater than less than less than or equal greater than or equal not equal or equal m Variables that you set m Regular scalars such as 3 14 m Function transforms of waveforms such as integrating differentiating and so on m Spectral analysis of waveforms such as an impulse m Mea
371. ric Text Cancel Help 3 227 Data Input Output Printing Waveforms You can print the display screen including any waveforms displayed Before you can print you must install and set up your printer Consult the instructions that come with your printer Also for printer setup instructions you can display Windows help and access its section on printers To Print from Front Panel To print a waveform from the front panel push the front panel PRINT button The display screen will print on the default printer For additional print options see the topics that follow To Print from Menu Bar To print a waveform from the application menu bar select the File menu and then select Print The instrument displays the standard MS Windows P Print window shown in Figure 3 60 Access the Windows help system for more information Print zix m Printer Name Tektronix Phaser 340 Properties Status Ready Type Tektronix Phaser 340 Whee Wtekadm1Sips391 car Comment Tek Phaser 340 B39 L1 Grid E10 I Print to file Print range Copies if All Number of copies 1 Pages frome to Page Setup Print Preview Cancel Help pi alel I Collate Figure 3 60 Print window 3 228 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output To Set Up the Page To set the format of the printed page from the menu bar select the File menu and then select Page Setup The instrument di
372. right as you navigate through the Text Teet Impor VSee AE Import Wizard You must select delimiter as your data This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see he how your text is affected in the preview below type comma as the delimiter type and General as your Column data format limiters I Treat consecutive delimiters as one Text Qualifier zl I Semicolon I Comma I Space I other E hy Note This step assumes MS Excel 97 your tool may have similar import features for comma separated data Check its documentation m3 Text Date MDY aa General converts numeric values to numbers date values to dates and all remaining values to text Do not import column Skip Note To plot 2 channels export the first channel with scale factors and time values Export the second chan nel as voltages only Data preview Cancel lt Back Next gt 3 222 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output Overview To use exported waveforms Cont Control elements and resources Begin your 5 Touch the row or column number to select the entire row Ee Edit Insert Format Tools Data Window Help chart or column containing your imported waveform values Jose SAY s BRS o S eH eB om Bi Drm see right B tors SSH ox ae helo oa Select the Chart button from the toolbar or from the Insert menu
373. ring 3 59 A Trigger control window 3 67 Pulse A Trigger control window 3 65 3 69 3 71 3 76 Q Q Factor C 42 C 52 Q factor A 5 Quality Factor C 42 C 52 Quality factor A 5 B 12 Quantizing Glossary 13 Quitting the application 1 12 R Window trigger B 7 Radian 3 188 Range vertical input 3 12 Readout channel 3 109 cursor V bars 3 192 trigger 3 53 Real time only B 6 Real time acquisition controls 3 25 Real time sampling 3 31 Glossary 13 Recall default setup B 1 Recall waveform B 1 Recalling a setup 3 199 Recalling a waveform 3 205 Recent setup file B 2 Record acquisition shared by all channels 3 17 Record length 3 15 3 101 3 161 Glossary 13 defined 3 30 derivative math waveforms 3 150 integral math waveforms 3 152 Recovered clock 3 95 Glossary 13 Recovered clock C 29 C 31 C 33 key points C 31 Rectangular window 3 170 3 172 3 175 3 189 Reference TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index clock B 15 color 3 111 levels 3 126 3 127 levels method 3 122 memory Glossary 13 setup B 1 waveforms B 1 Glossary 13 Reference selection B 15 Reference level calculation methods 3 123 References 3 121 clear 3 211 clearing 3 211 delete 3 211 Related manuals xvi Relative reference 3 122 Release notes for plug amp play software 1 10 Remote communication 3 233 Remote control B 10 Remote display B 10 Remove measurements 3 124 Repetitive signal
374. rms Overview Prerequisites 1 Change 2 waveform colors Change 4 graticule style 3 116 that you can make Customizations you can make Display the waveforms to be measured on screen The waveform may be a channel reference or math waveform From the Display setup control window select the Colors tab Choose a color palette from the Color Palette list Normal Green and Gray give the appearance of an intensity graded display similar to an analog instrument Spectral and Temp use hue to indicate the frequency of occurrence and to highlight events User and User Palette let you create a custom color palette From the Display setup control window select the Objects tab Touch the Full Grid Cross Hair or Frame button to select that style of graticule Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments Related control elements and resources Q009 See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Math Color Dalault Display Date Time ott Display Trigger T TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To set the display readout options For further assistance Customizations you can make Cont Related control elements and resources 6 Touch the DISP button and select the Objects tab 7 Touch Display Date Time to toggle between On and Off On displays the date and t
375. rn the touch d off Page 3 102 pe e m ES ush to turn the touch screen on and off Page 3 oF eS Aono gt gt CY gt CY Turn channel displays on and off Vertically scale or position the waveform Page 3 2 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 2 7 ee ee Display Map Single Graticule Drag icon to change the trigger level Drag cursors to measure waveforms on screen _Refs Jl App Help Men J 25 Jun 03 13 21 48 _ Vert J Horiz J Trig L Disp Cursor Meas J Masks J Math Setups AP re Tek Run Sample Drag the position icons to a reposition a waveform i i Curst Pos X s 3 113 8us p 3 iy E F Curs2 Pos g A EEA ET ER l i are E 5 NENE 99 243 a Seer Click icon to assign multipurpose gt E8 i i knobs to waveform vertical i i m Zoom 1 On position and scale i Zoom 2 On Zoom 3 On Zoom 4 On Histogram Vertical Drag across the waveform area to Histogram Horizontal zoom the boxed waveform segment EAS oe Also enable disable histograms and j i measurement gating Er EEE E E SE Ma 500mv 40 0us div 1 25M5 s 800ns pt 1 70 0mMV Cancel 2 8 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual SS Le Front Panel I O Map lt CD RW Drive with amooo 6 Opt
376. roller From the system controller you can copy and paste commands from the help directly into your test pro grams The programmer information contains the following content m GPIB configuration information for the instrument m Lists of the command groups and the commands they contain m Detailed command descriptions including syntax and examples m Status and error messages m Programming examples The CD also contains a printable version of the programmer information in the form of a PDF file TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation Manual Performance Verification Procedure This is a printable PDF file that describes how to verify the instrument performance using generic test equip ment User manual This is a PDF file of this user manual Optional Accessory Software The Optional Applications Software CD contains programs that you can install and run five times per application You can then purchase an upgrade from Tektronix if you decide that you want to continue to use the application Refer to the instructions that accompany the CD for installation information TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 11 Installation Desktop Applications Options You can install desktop application software on the instrument The instrument has been tested with the following software products installed m Microsoft Office 2000 including Word Excel Powerpoint and Access m MathCad m MATLAB Other so
377. rols EN sam 1 amm Factor sae bd Factor Find 10 Controls a EJ al Graticule Size Close Zoom Source Factor 2 window touch Controls a 7 Select from the Graticule Size list to change the size of Graticule Size the unmagnified Acquisition and Zoom windows m 50 50 allocates half of the available display for the zoomed graticule and half of the available display for the acquisition window 80 20 allocates 80 of the available display for the zoomed graticule and 20 for the acquisition window 100 uses the entire display for the zoomed graticule Note The instrument displays the box enclosed area on the waveform magnified in the graticule If two graticules are shown the magnified waveform is shown in the bottom graticule 8 To select the source of your zoomed waveform area Zoom Source touch Zoom Source and select the source from the ame drop down list You can select the live acquisitions or one of the four zoom areas Zoom4 3 108 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms Overview To zoom waveforms Cont Control elements and resources Checking the 9 To quickly determine the zoom factor and position ofa E z zoom factor zoomed waveform check the readouts ae maa Ma and position The Zoom setup window displays the horizontal ee a ae and vertical position and zoom factor of the oe oo selected zoom area EA sey ch F m From the Zoom S
378. rom No Persistence Infinite Persistence and Variable Persistence Modes Displays the Persistence Controls window that you use to control display persistence Choose from Sin x x or Linear interpolation Choose from Full Grid Cross hair and Frame styles Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 6 Display menu commands Cont Menu Record View Palette User Palette Display Trigger T Waveform Display On Display Date and Time Display Remote Normal Choose Normal to use system colors for best viewing Monochrome Gray Monochrome Green Temperature Grading Choose Gray to display waveforms in shades of gray Spectral Grading User Choose Temp temperature to display waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in warmer colors reds Choose Green to display waveforms in shades of green Choose Spectral to display waveforms with the highest sample density points appearing in blue shades Choose User to display a control window to design your own colors Displays a window that you use to set hue lightness and saturation for the selected object The Reset button allows you to reset the palette to factory defaults The Setup button displays the Color Setup window Toggle on and off the display of a T at the trigger point i Toggle on and off the waveform display E Toggle on and off the display of the system date and time Toggle on and off remote display support VNC or pcAnywhere must be installed on
379. round reference m Rec Length sets the number of samples in the waveform acquisition Sample rate sets the sample rate Duration sets the time over the acquired waveform also changes record length Resolution controls sample rate and record length to keep the duration constant while changing the time between samples of the acquired waveform 3 194 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Display the spectral math waveform Cont Spectral math example cont Window Type affects the shape of the spectral analyzer response in the frequency domain that is the ability to resolve frequency in the output spectrum Gate Position sets the position of the gate on the acquired waveform The data in the gate region is input to the spectral analyzer The gate position is the time from the trigger to the zero phase reference position in the gate Gate Duration sets the width of the gate in seconds and it is inversely proportional to the resolution bandwidth For narrow band frequency resolution use a wide gate Gate Length displays the number of samples over the specified gate duration Resolution BW sets the bandwidth in hertz of the filters used in the spectral analysis Resolution BW is inversely proportional to the gate duration Touch Center Freq and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the frequency span to 125 kHz and the center frequenc
380. rs with the trigger point located at the clock edge Positive settings for both setup and hold times the most common application locate the setup hold violation zone so it spans the clocking edge See the top waveform in Figure 3 21 The instrument detects and triggers on data that does not become stable long enough before the clock setup time violation or that does not stay stable long enough after the clock hold time violation Negative settings for setup or hold times skew the setup hold violation zone to locate it before or after the clocking edge See the bottom and center waveforms of Figure 3 21 The instrument can then detect and trigger on violations of a time range that occurs before or one that occurs after the clock NOTE Keep the hold time setting to no more than 1 5 ns less than one half the clock period hold time period 2 1 5 ns or the instrument cannot trigger this assumes a 50 duty cycle clock TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 63 Triggering Setup Hold Ts Setup time lt violation gt Ty Hold time zone Setup Hold violation zone Ts Ty re eS i Tg Ty must be 500 ps gt Clock level Clock signal Setup Hold lt violation gt Ts zone gt Ty al Clock level Clock signal Setup Hold lt violation zone gt TH Tg lt gt Clock level Clock signal Positive Tg Negativ
381. rtain threshold levels when logic or pulse triggering turn the trigger LEVEL knob SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE You can also set the level in the Trigger setup window Com Grae L READY EXT NOISE MODE ies 4s pustig Sersox a WH oO KD 3 50 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview Triggering from the front panel Cont Control elements and resources To set to 50 5 To quickly obtain an edge glitch timeout serial or m ee width trigger push the trigger LEVEL knob The a instrument sets the trigger level to the halfway point Cowes between the peaks of the trigger signal This function Ca has no effect for the other advanced trigger types ax You can also set the level to 50 in the Trigger control oa window Ta ose LEVEL When the phase locked loop is active Comm and Serial iy te ey Trigger only pushing the trigger LEVEL knob recycles o the clock recovery trigger circuit The instrument will attempt to acquire lock once If the input data is disrupted removed or heavily distorted the instrument may not acquire lock or may lose lock If the recovered clock is not locked to the incoming data the waveform display will not be stable Once the input data is available press the PUSH SET TO 50 knob to force the instrument to reacquire lock When using Comm triggering pushing the trigger PUSH SET TO 50 knob sets the levels for the selected code To
382. s 20 dB 15 dB 10 dB t A iS je Figure 3 45 Effects of adjusting the reference level m Reference Level Offset This changes the value of Ref in the equation for dB shown above Unlike the Reference Level control this control actually changes the output data values in the spectrum Zero dB is shown on the display screen by the marker associated with the spectral waveform Adjusting the reference level offset causes the spectral waveform to move vertically with respect to the waveform reference marker This moves the waveform without changing the Reference Level control setting Sometimes it is beneficial to adjust this control so that the peak of a fundamental is at zero dB Then you can measure other harmonics in terms of how many dB they are down from the fundamental Touch the dBm button to preset this level to the equivalent of 1 mW into 50 ohms 20 dB 20 dB 20 dB 0 dB Figure 3 46 Effects of adjusting the reference level offset control m Real and Imaginary Magnitudes You may set the spectral analyzer to display the linear magnitude of the real data or the imaginary data in the spectrum This is useful if you process the spectrum off line and transform it back into a time domain trace You could save the real and the imaginary spectrum into a reference memory You can export the waveforms directly into Mathcad Matlab and Excel documents and update in real time TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 167
383. s the size of the segments making the mask test easier to pass TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 11 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview To mask test a waveform cont Set mask test 13 Select the Pass Fail Setup tab of the Masks control window pass and fail parameters C 12 14 15 16 17 Use the control knob keypad or pop up keypad to enter the number of waveforms to test number of samples in some modes the failure threshold the number of waveforms that must fail to fail the test and the delay time the time from when mask test starts to when the instrument begins sampling Use the Failure field buttons to set what the instrument does when a mask test fails have the instrument beep BEEP send an SRQ out on the GPIB bus SRQ send a trigger pulse out on the AUX OUT connector AUX Out stop signal acquisition immediately Stop Acq and or print the instrument screen image to a printer Print Touching the More button displays more failure functions Save Wfm saves the waveform data of the first waveform that causes the test to fail to a wfm file Log Date saves time date and basic test information of the first waveform that causes the test to fail to an ASCIl text txt file Both files are saved to the location specified by the Path button The file name format is YYMMDD HHMMSS where YY is year MM is month DD is day HH is hour MM is minut
384. s to trigger the instrument on industry standard communications signals Automatic measurements on communications signals Clock recovery from the serial data stream NOTE If a standard or function listed in this manual is not available on your instrument it is because it is optional or the configuration or bandwidth of your instrument cannot test that standard Although the TDS6000B Series instruments are not calibrated optical reference receivers you can use them with mask testing to evaluate general optical signal characteristics and waveshape using an external O E converter C 2 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Serial Pattern Trigger Serial Pattern Trigger lets you define a serial data pattern on which to trigger the instrument The Serial Pattern Trigger key features are m User defined serial data pattern of up to 64 bits on NRZ data streams up to 3 125 GBaud m Clock recovery from the serial data stream Installing Optional Serial Mask Testing and Serial Pattern Trigger Functions To enable the optional Serial Mask Testing and or Serial Triggering functions on TDS6000B instruments you must have a valid Option Installation Key Do the following steps 1 Or AE er From the oscilloscope menu bar touch the Utilities menu select Option Installation and then touch Continue Enter the authorization key using the instrument keyboard Touch
385. se the arrow down key to highlight Outboard LAN in the Peripheral Configuration screen and then press Enter 8 Use the arrow up or down key to highlight Enabled and then press Enter 9 Press the F10 key to save and exit Confirm the Save of Configuration changes when you are prompted on screen 10 Use the Windows network setup utility to define the instrument as a network client and configure it for your network You can find the network setup utility in the Windows Start menu if you select Settings gt Control Panel and then double click Network Consult your network administrator for specific instructions to make these settings NOTE If you want to disable network access for the instrument perform the above procedure except substitute Disabled for the command listed in step 8 The instrument will boot faster with network access disabled Setting up a Dual Display Use the following steps to set up the instrument for dual display operation You can operate the instrument while having full use of Windows and other applica tions on the external monitor TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Installation 1 Use the On Standby switch to power down 2 Connect a keyboard and mouse 3 Connect an external monitor o lo 08 Ogo obs dp Hogabgg O AD O eo
386. se time ay a RMS Mean Median StdDev Hits in Box Waveform Count Peak Hits Pk Pk Max Mean 1 StdDev Mean 2 StdDev Mean 3 StdDev Definition Voltage measurement over the entire waveform or gated region Max High Amplitude 197 PositiveOvershoot Timing measurement of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region The distance time between MidRef default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse Timing measurement Time taken for the leading edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to rise from a Low Ref value default 10 to a High Ref value default 90 of its final value Voltage measurement The true Root Mean Square voltage over the entire waveform or gated region The average of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box are less than and half are greater than this value The standard deviation Root Mean Square RMS deviation of all acquired points within or on the histogram box Displays the number of points in the histogram box or on the box boundary Displays the number of waveforms that have contributed to the histogram Displays the number of points in the largest bin of the histogram Displays the peak to peak value of the histogram Vertical histograms display the voltage of the highest nonzero bin minus the voltage of the lowest nonzero bin H
387. se unwrap will display the correct result by unwrapping the phase Phase unwrap is only valid when the phase spectrum is a continuous function of frequency Therefore do not use it when analyzing the harmonic content of the typical repetitive signal Suppression Threshold Random noise in the spectrum may have phase values over the entire range This could make the phase display unusable However you can set the suppression threshold control to a level in dB The phase of any complex spectral points with a magnitude below this threshold is set to zero Phase Unwrap Algorithm The algorithm searches for the largest magnitude in the current span Phase unwrap is then performed in both directions in frequency from that point This results in a stable phase unwrap Phase Spectrum dejitter An instrument acquisition system jitters by one sample interval Signals at the Nyquist frequency only have two samples per cycle This would cause 180 of phase jitter if it were not corrected The instrument phase spectrum is dejittered so that accurate measurements of phase are obtained from DC to the Nyquist frequency TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Magnitude vs frequency Suppression threshold Phase vs frequency Figure 3 47 Example of the effects of setting the phase suppression threshold m Group Delay When the phase spectrum is a continuous function of frequency group delay may be com
388. segment multipurpose knob or keypad to select a segment to edit The Segment selected active segment is highlighted Each mask can have up to 16 segments Selecta 6 Touch the Vertex field and use the arrow buttons multipurpose vertex knob or keypad to select the vertex to edit The active vertex is indicated with an X on the template segment Each segment can have up to 50 vertices TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual C 17 Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Overview Editing a user mask cont Control elements and resources Move a 7 Touch the Horizontal field and use the multipurpose knob or vertex keypad to change the selected vertex horizontal position Horizontal 8 Touch the Vertical field and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to change the selected vertex vertical position Vertical Add or delete a 9 To add a vertex select the closest vertex that is clockwise from vertex where you want to place a new vertex Touch Add to add a Vertex vertex midway between the selected vertex and the next counter clockwise vertex 10 To delete a vertex enter or select the vertex number Then touch Delete to delete the selected vertex The remaining vertices located counter clockwise from the deleted vertex are renumbered Vertex clockwise from vertex you want to add Added vertex W Save the user 11 Refer to Saving a User Mask to Disk on page C 19 mask to disk C 18
389. select the 6 Push the up and down arrow buttons to toggle through TRIGGER trigger source the possible trigger sources m CH1 CH 4 are the input channels The channel cOURGE cOURLNG you select as a trigger source will function whether it is displayed or not os T m LINE is the AC Line Voltage Because the bee instrument generates the trigger you do not have to ees ust EYEL sg input a signal to create the trigger EX oOo m AUX is a Sixth nondisplayable trigger source To use the auxiliary trigger connect the external triggering signal to the Auxiliary Trigger input connector on the front panel TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 51 Triggering Overview Triggering from the front panel Cont Control elements and resources To set the 7 Push the up and down arrow buttons to toggle through re gt trigger the possible trigger couplings a coupling E sewer DC passes all both AC and DC components of SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE the input signal i Cens HFAEJ Cam m AC passes only the AC components of an input Crm Gr C READY 7 EXT NOISE signal van m HF REJ attenuates signals above 20 kHz w pusko se m LF REJ attenuates signals below 200 kHz w w oO s m NOISE REJ provides lower sensitivity reducing the chance of falsely triggering on noise To select the 8 Push the TRIGGER MODE button to toggle between TRIGGER trigger mode NORMAL and AUTO trigger modes m NORMAL tri
390. setup the settings are applied but the data is not restored TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 199 Data Input Output m Waveforms in Math Waveforms Math1 Math4 Control settings and the math expression are retained but not the waveform data Upon setup recall however the recalled math waveform expressions will be applied but math waveform data is not restored m User Options that are stored in the Windows Registry These include all options accessed by first selecting Utilities menu bar and then User Preferences Utilities menu You cannot recall into a channel or a math waveform The instrument recalls each waveform into one of the reference waveform locations Ref1l Ref4 If you want to save a waveform in a useful format for other applications such as a spreadsheet use the export function see Exporting and Copying Waveforms on page 3 213 A few things to remember when saving and recalling setups All Settings are Retained The instrument includes almost all instrument settings with a few exceptions such as user options in the saved setup Retaining Current Settings Recalling a setup replaces the current setup with the recalled setup If you do not want to lose your current setup save it to its own setup file for later recall before you recall a setup Avoiding Setup Waveform Mismatches Saved setups may contain settings inappropriate for waveforms currently in your instrument For example if you s
391. setup for copy 3 224 select setup for export 3 215 select the waveform to save 3 206 select your setup 3 205 select your waveform 3 210 setup to copy images 3 225 setup to copy measurements 3 227 setup to copy waveforms 3 225 3 226 setup to export histograms 3 219 setup to export images 3 216 setup to export measurements 3 219 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual setup to export waveforms 3 217 specify a line graph chart 3 223 spreadsheet file format 3 214 text file format 3 214 to clear references 3 211 to copy your waveform 3 224 to date time stamp hardcopies 3 232 to display the date and time 3 232 to export your waveform 3 215 to get the current time 3 232 to preview the page 3 230 to print from front panel 3 228 to print from menu bar 3 228 to recall your setup 3 204 to recall your waveform 3 209 to save to a file 3 202 to save your setup 3 201 to save your waveform 3 206 to set the date and time 3 232 to set up the page 3 229 to use an exported waveform 3 222 using auto increment filename 3 200 view 3 229 Data Source A Trigger control window 3 82 Date and time display 3 112 B 10 displaying 3 232 on hardcopies 3 232 setting 3 112 3 232 dB 3 187 Glossary 4 dBm Glossary 4 DC coupling Glossary 4 DC offset with math waveforms 3 152 Decibel Glossary 4 Default setup how to execute 3 10 Define inputs A Trigger control window 3 78 3 80 3 82 3 83 3 85 Defin
392. shold at lower threshold Runt pulse crosses first threshold only recrosses first threshold level and triggers acquisition Trigger if Logic Y Pattern Ch3 px 12V 1 2 3 68 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To set mode and holdoff To trigger on a runt pulse Cont 9 Control elements and resources Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger ZZ types 000 See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select the the trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 Trigger Basedon When you select the type Width the instrument will trigger on a pulse narrower Pulse Width or wider than some specified range of time defined by the upper limit and Overview Select width triggering Select the source Select the polarity Trigger based on pulse width _ 9 gt lower limit To set up for width triggering do the following procedures Control elements and resources From the toolbar touch Trig select the A Event tab of Tri ORE g the Trigger control window and touch Select Touch Width _AEvent A gt B Seq B Event Mode AWidih Acquire Source Pulse Width Pulse Width Trigger Type jggerNTyp Cre Width Y vig Salact an s Upper Limit 500 0ps Polarity Lower Limit m a l
393. shows how vertical position moves the acquired waveform vertically in the acquisition window to place the acquired waveform in the graticule display m As you vary the vertical position the vertical acquisition window moves up and down 5 divisions on the waveform With input signals that are smaller than the window it appears the waveform moves in the window Actually the position moves the vertical acquisition window up and down on the input signal a SCALE setting determines Vertical gt 40 5 Volt the vertical acquisition window 40 4 Volt window size here 100 mV div x 10 divisions 8 graticule divisions and Channel 1 Graticule 1 division of position reference indicator 0 4 Volt 0 5 Volt b Vertical offset and position Vertical gt 07 Vot can change the location of window 0 6 Volt the acquired waveform within the acquisition window repositioning it so Graticule its waveform appears inthe Channel graticule reference 02 Volt Indicator 93Volt Figure 3 2 Setting vertical range and position of input channels The vertical offset control affects the vertical acquisition window and the displayed waveform as follows m The vertical range window is always centered around the offset value It is the voltage level at the middle of the vertical acq
394. sition window This limiting causes inaccuracies in amplitude related measurements Note that the acquisition window also includes 1 division above and below the displayed graticule area See Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 12 Enhanced Bandwidth When setting up the vertical controls you may want to set Enhanced Bandwidth on or off When on DSP filtering can provide a shorter risetime and flattens the bandpass but makes the phase response linear and may extend bandwidth depending on model Enhanced Bandwidth provides a matched response across enabled channels so you will leave it on for most applications except for those for which you would rather use the true analog bandwidth of your instrument Display the Online help on the Vertical Setup Control Window for more information Trigger and Display Set basic trigger controls to gate waveform acquisition and use the display to interactively scale position and offset waveforms See the sections Triggering on page 3 43 and Displaying Waveforms on page 3 97 Flexible Control Access This manual focuses on basic setup through the front panel and then through use of the User Interface UI Application displayed on screen The online help system also documents the UI TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 5 Acquiring Waveforms To Set Up Signal Input Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to scale and position input signals for acquis
395. solution bandwidth 3 164 3 190 3 191 sample rate 3 190 3 191 scale factor 3 187 3 188 scallop Loss 3 172 scallop loss 3 172 select a predefined spectral analysis math waveform 3 184 select a spectral waveform 3 185 select spectral analysis setup 3 185 select the window type 3 189 set the frequency domain controls 3 190 set the magnitude scale 3 187 set the phase scale 3 188 set the time domain controls 3 191 set time and frequency domain control tracking 3 189 setup B 14 span 3 163 spectral analyzer controls 3 161 spectral averaging 3 160 suppression threshold 3 168 swept sine wave analysis 3 184 take cursor measurements 3 192 Tek Exponential window 3 170 3 172 3 181 3 189 Tek Exponential window in the time and the frequency domains illustration 3 181 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual time and frequency domain graphs for the Flattop2 window illustration 3 180 time and frequency domain graphs for the Rectangu lar window illustration 3 175 time and frequency graphs for the Gaussian Window illustration 3 174 time and frequency graphs for the Hanning window illustration 3 177 time and frequency graphs for the Kaiser Bessel window illustration 3 178 time and frequency graphs of the Blackman Harris window illustration 3 179 time and frequency graphs of the Hamming window 3 176 time domain controls 3 160 to define a spectral math waveform 3 185 to select a pr
396. sor Source Channel e Cursor Type H Bars form Curs1 Pos 40 0m TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview Set cursor tracking Set cursor style For further assistance To set the cursor sources Cont 6 1 h 0 1 2 To change the cursor tracking mode from the Cursor controls window select Setup Touch Track Mode Indep or Tracking m Indep Makes each cursor positionable without regard to the position of the other cursor m Tracking Makes both cursors move in unison and maintain a fixed horizontal or vertical distance between each other To return to the Cursor controls window touch the Controls button To toggle the display of cursors on or off touch the Cursor button Note All adjustments that you can make in the Cursor controls window can also be made in this window To change the waveform and screen cursor marker style from the Cursor controls window select Setup Touch Style and select Lines Line amp X or X Touch the Help button in the Cursor setup control window or the Cursor controls window to access the online assistance TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Related control elements and resources m Track Mode Indep Tracking Controls Cursor Setup Style X X 2 3 135 Measuring Waveforms Taking Histograms The instrument can display histograms co
397. sor type 3 134 select measurement parameters 3 120 select measurement sources 3 121 select the cursor sources 3 134 select the waveform 3 124 set cursor style 3 135 set cursor tracking 3 135 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Index set display and reset histogram source and type 3 138 set histogram display options 3 138 set histogram limit controls 3 139 set measurement reference levels 3 126 3 127 signal type 3 122 sources 3 121 split cursors 3 130 standard deviation 3 125 statistics 3 120 take a snapshot of measurements 3 128 take measurements on a frame 3 121 taking automatic measurements 3 119 taking cursor measurements 3 130 taking histograms 3 136 3 144 to calibrate probes 3 141 to compensate passive probes 3 142 to compensate the oscilloscope 3 139 to deskew channels 3 141 to set the cursor sources 3 134 to start and reset histogram counting 3 137 to take automatic measurements 3 123 tracking cursor 3 135 using automatic measurements 3 121 using cursors 3 131 using histograms 3 137 vertical cursors 3 130 vertical cursors measure from the trigger point 3 132 zoom 3 129 Median A 3 B 12 Mesial Glossary 10 Min 3 125 take automatic measurements 3 124 Minimize B 2 Minimum A 2 B 11 B 12 Glossary 10 Min max 3 127 Mode Glossary 10 acquisition 3 29 B 6 trigger B 8 Monochrome gray B 10 Monochrome green B 10 More B 12 Mouse 3 102 Multipurpose knob G
398. splaying the amplitude data of one channel instead of time data Control elements and resources Colors Record View 75 0 Int AutoBright Wfm DB View 75 0 Waveform Display On Tek FastAcq Sample majiji IE 20 0mv 2 40 0ns div IRA 10 0mv 2 13 0MSis 800ps pt BSI 4 0mv Rea Figure 3 13 Acquisition XY display TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Using FastFrame FastFrame is an acquisition mode that lets you capture Multiple acquisitions in the acquisition memory of a single channel Figure 3 14 shows how FastFrame combines the desired captured frames into one larger waveform For example FastFrame would let you store 4000 frames depending on the record length option installed of 500 samples each into one waveform FastFrame mode lets you jump to and view the frame that you select Time Stamps can display the absolute trigger time for a specific frame and the relative time between triggers of two specified frames FastFrame lets you compare multiple waveforms eta y MF Ae el iene ieee l Real time ees eat cen Dara T FastFrame SEP ee ke l li val Figure 3 14 FastFrame TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 35 Acquiring Waveforms 3 36 Using FastFrame Acquisitions FastFrame is not compatible with these features or modes Equivalent Time Histograms Average Envelope
399. splays the Page Setup window shown in Figure 3 62 m Paper select the paper size and source from the drop down lists Orientation select either Portrait or Landscape see Figure 3 61 m Margins set the margins you want for your page Doooooooon oooo0oo0o00o0o0o oa00000u000 DoOooooooon Landscape format Portrait format Figure 3 61 Hardcopy formats m Palette select either Color or Black amp White m View select either Full Screen or Graticule s Only m Full Screen displays both the graticule and menu areas of the screen m Graticule s displays only the graticule area of the display Image select either Normal or InkSaver with Enhanced Waveform Color Mode m Normal exports the image exactly as it appears on screen m InkSaver with Enhanced Waveform Color exports the image with colors designed to print with the white background Touch Help for more information TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 229 Data Input Output m Paper Size jeter o SY Source Automatically Seea ssti ts is sSY m Orientation Margins finches Portrait Left po i Right pbp C Landscape Top p Bottom b Palette View Image Color Full Screen Normal Black amp White Graticule s Only Ink saver Mode Enhanced Readouts Below Graticule Set Front Panel Print Button to Export Print Preview Cancel Print Help Figure
400. ssy m Spreadsheet creates files CSV in a format usable by spreadsheets Excel Lotus 1 2 3 and Quattro Pro MatLab creates files DAT in a format usable by MatLab m MathCad creates files DAT in a format usable by MathCad Note that the MathCad file is an ASCII file the first four values of which contain header information m The first header value holds the record length m The second header value holds time in seconds between samples m The third header value holds the trigger position expressed as an index in the data position m The fourth header value refers to the fractional trigger position Also note that the delimiters are carriage returns 3 214 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Data Input Output To Export Your Waveform Overview Prerequisites Select for export Select setup for export Use the procedure that follows to export a waveform or waveforms to the instrument hard disk a CD RW drive USB 2 0 memory device or third party storage device To save a waveform The instrument must be powered up Make sure the waveform image or measurement to be exported exists that is your source must be a channel an active math waveform an active reference and so forth From the menu bar select File and then select Select for Export The menu lists all available waveform image and measurement types available for export Full Screen to export a bitmap of all
401. surement scalars can be used in expression for example you can use the measurement feature this instrument provides to measure the average of a waveform and subtract it from the original waveform to define a new math waveform You can create up to four math waveforms see Using Math on page 3 147 for more examples Math waveforms can be used in other math Math waveforms autoscale when the math waveform is first defined and turned on Advanced functions such as TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms integrate differentiate average square root and log can be taken on single waveforms or complicated expressions In FastFrame math is applied to each frame Some operations that you cannot use with math waveforms follow Circular Math on Math Measurements in Math and Measurements on Math You cannot use circular definitions of math waveforms For example if you define Math2 Ch1 Math1 and then define a second math waveform as Math3 Ch2 Math2 you cannot define a third math waveform as Math1 Math2 Ch3 If you do the Math1 definition is rejected with an error because a circular definition is not allowed Measurements Meas1 Meas8 are allowed in a math definition but not measurement functions such as rise Ch1 m Roll Mode Math is updated when acquisition is stopped Using Math The following topics provide details that can help you create the math waveform that b
402. t a single acquisition sequence The ARM READY and TRIG D lights show the acquisition status Page 3 53 Turn knob to adjust waveform intensity Page 3 111 Use these knobs and buttons to set the trigger parameters Push ADVANCED to display additional trigger functions Pages 3 43 and 3 59 Push to turn cursors on or off Page 3 130 Push to make a hard copy Page 3 228 Push to return settings to default values Page 3 10 Horizontally scale position delay and set record length resolution of selected waveform Page 3 14 Push MultiView Zoom to add a magnified graticule to the display Push HORIZ or VERT to select the axis to magnify Page 3 105 c VERTICAL POSITION POSITION POSITION EN ras VW g SCALE SCALE SCALE SCALE A G POSITION CH4 Push to automatically set up the vertical horizontal and trigger controls based on selected channels Page 3 9 Y y y INTENSITY Fre Auroser P5EAULT prr CURSORS L c HORIZONTAL TRIGGER y POSITION 4 Ji D Turn the multipurpose knobs to adjust parameters selected from te DELAY eS me rom RUNI a STOP the screen interface Push a Fine button to toggle between i 7 i j i j SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE normal and fine adjustment with its dial oe age 3 1939 RESOrUTIEN vm y Cons GFRES TD COD oe cue irre READY SAMPLE NOISE SCALE b gt MODE HORE LEVEL Push to tu
403. t is automatically displayed and the measurement is added to the measurement list in the setup window Measurements are displayed below the graticule area as shown here If the area is occupied or there are too many measurements to fit in that area measurements are displayed in the lower graticule area In Roll mode measurements are not available until after you stop acquisitions To remove the measurement touch Clear and the last measurement selected is removed To remove any measurement in the measurement list touch the measurement prior to touching the Clear button More than one measurement can be selected Touch the first measurement that you want to remove drag across all of the measurements that you want to select and then touch the Clear button You can also toggle the display of measurements on and off by touching the Display button Related control elements and resources 07 Jul 03 15 52 3 Sts horie Gry Gs cra E Moas H mesk K man eT ar ate ary Monu J Tek Run Sample mE s00mv Fi 11 9 kH2 yet 1 9422 11 800 Ons 40 Gnsidiv req WG Ampi 196v yet 98011 12 800 Ons 1 25MS s_ 800rs pt At 00s 740 01 H n PePe 208v pi2 03968 TAE 40 0mv KAI Rise 827 2ns 1639 590 Source Measurements TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements Cont Related control elements and resources Display 9 From the Measurements setup co
404. t noise The instrument acquires data as in the sample mode and then averages it according to a specified number of averages Averaging Displaying a trace that is the combined result of several acquisitions thereby reducing apparent noise Bandwidth The highest frequency signal the instrument can acquire with no more than 3 dB x 707 attenuation of the original reference signal Burst width A timing measurement of the duration of a burst TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Control knob See Knob Channel One type of input used for signal acquisition The instrument has four channels Channel probe deskew A relative time delay for each channel This lets you align signals to compensate for the fact that signals may come in from cables of differing length Channel Reference Indicator The indicator on the left side of the display that points to the position around which the waveform contracts or expands when vertical scale is changed This position is ground when offset is set to 0 V otherwise it is ground plus offset Control window A group of related controls for a major instrument function that the instrument displays at the right of the screen Coupling The association of two or more circuits or systems in such a way that power or information can be transferred from one to the other You can couple the input signal to the trigger and vertical systems several different ways Cursors Paired mar
405. t to ECL 3 72 set to TTL 3 72 setup hold 3 81 3 84 slew rate 3 71 source 3 65 3 67 3 69 3 71 3 74 3 76 state 3 80 thresholds 3 68 3 72 timeout 3 76 3 84 timer 3 76 transition 3 71 3 84 trig delay 3 91 trigger if 3 75 trigger when 3 78 3 81 TRUE 3 78 3 81 upper level 3 74 width 3 69 3 84 window 3 74 3 84 A Trigger level ECL 3 56 3 57 TTL 3 56 3 57 user 3 56 3 57 A gt B Seq Trigger control window 3 91 3 92 A Then B 3 91 3 92 A gt b trigger sequence B 8 About TekScope B 16 Absolute reference 3 122 AC coupling Glossary 1 AC line voltage trigger input 3 45 3 51 Access vertical set up help 3 11 Accessory software 1 10 Accuracy Glossary 1 Acquisition Glossary 1 input channels and digitizers 3 28 interval Glossary 1 modes 3 29 Envelope 3 36 record 3 30 sampling see sampling 3 29 Acquisition controls acquisition control background 3 28 acquisition hardware 3 28 acquisition modes 3 29 aliasing illustrated 3 23 Index 1 Index average 3 20 3 24 condition 3 22 envelope 3 20 3 24 equivalent time sampling 3 31 equivalent time sampling illustrated 3 32 global controls 3 22 Hi Res 3 18 3 24 interpolation 3 32 IT interpolated time 3 32 linear interpolation 3 33 methods to check and eliminate aliasing 3 23 peak detect 3 18 3 24 preventing aliasing 3 23 real time 3 25 real time sampling 3 31 record length 3 30 repetitive signal 3 25 roll
406. t to reset the histogram count Histograms EE track numbers of counts Touching Reset resets those Ez counts to zero and begins counting from zero Touch Display to toggle the display of the selected a histogram on and off a Select Linear to display histogram data linearly Bin counts smaller than the maximum counts are scaled linearly by dividing the bin count by the maximum bin count Histogram Linear Select Log to display histogram data logarithmically Bin counts smaller than the maximum counts are scaled logarithmically Logarithmic scaling provides better visual details for bins with low counts TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To start and reset histogram counting Cont Related control elements and resources Set histogram 9 Touch Adjust Histogram Box Limits and use the Top limit controls Limit Bottom Limit Left Limit and Right Limit controls to set the size of the histogram box The histogram box selects the section of the waveform used for histograms Histogram Scal Bottom Lim 20 164 Left Limit 80 08 Adjust Histo Right Limit soops Touch Adjust Histogram Box Location and use the X Histogram Sealing Location and Y Location controls to set the location of the histogram box Xx Location 80 0ps Histo Size Histogram Table A 1 on page A 1 includes a list of the available histogram measurements Measurements and a brief
407. ta Input Output Overview To recall your setup Cont Control elements and resources Select your 6 If not selected select set in the Save as type of file to setup include in the file listing Setup files are always type set Note Only change the type if you want to temporarily see other types of files in the current directory Otherwise leave it set at set Filename ETERS g Files of type Setup Files set 7 Choose your setup file by either Clicking an existing name in the file list m Clicking in the File name field and typing a new Access to virtual keyboard name replacing the default file name Note If your instrument lacks a keyboard touch or click on the icons as indicated right to display a virtual keyboard You can use the mouse or touch screen with the virtual keyboard to type entries in the name fields and comments fields Recall your Touch the Recall button to recall the setup file To cancel setup without recalling a setup touch the Cancel button Cancel Help o For further 9 For more help on recalling setups touch the Help assistance button in the toolbar to display contextual help on screen Saving and Recalling Waveforms This instrument can save any number of waveforms limited only by the space you have to store them By saving a waveform you can recall it at a later time for comparison evalua tion and documentation This capability is helpful
408. tail shown with a annotation measurement from the menu bar touch Utilities User detail Preferences and then select the Measurement tab to display the Annotation Type setup window r Annotation Type Standard 15 From the window select either the Standard or Detailed annotation type Selecting Detailed displays more annotations than selecting standard Set 16 From the Measurements control window touch Setup jee measurement Ref Levs to display the Reference Levels setup control F reference window gating levels uu Statistics nee Annotation Meas 1 Y 17 To use these settings for all measurements toggle the Use On Use On Use On All Meas button to On To set different values aa EI for some measurements toggle the Use On all Meas button to Off 3 126 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Measuring Waveforms Overview To take automatic measurements Cont Set 18 To select how the instrument determines the base and measurement top of the waveform touch Min Max Histogram or reference Histogram mean levels Cont m Min max Uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This setting is best for examining waveforms that have no large flat portions at a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves almost any waveform except for pulses See Figure 3 31 on page 3 122 m Histogram Selects the most common values above or below the midpoint Since this appro
409. tarting i 6 1 04 on page 3 153 to define the math waveform an GS A m f the waveform is not displayed touch Display to toggle it on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 157 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Cont Set scale and 4 position Take 5 automatic measurements 3 158 Touch Position or Scale and use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to size and position the waveform on screen as you want it Note Position is in divisions so changing the scale can make the math waveform disappear until position is also changed the same effect happens with channel waveforms You can touch and drag a waveform handle to change the waveform vertical position You can adjust the waveform vertical position and scale by first touching the waveform handle and then using the multipurpose knobs to adjust the scale and position You cannot adjust the offset of a math waveform You cannot adjust horizontal scale position and sample density resolution of math waveforms different length source waveforms result in a math waveform of the shortest source record length If you adjust these settings for sources for a math waveform the adjustment is reflected in the math waveform Touch the Meas button select the Math tab and touch a math button to choose a math waveform from Math1 Math4 See right Select a measurement for more information see Taking Automati
410. ter 1 Getting Started TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 2 1 Documentation Map This instrument ships with documents individually tailored to address different aspects or parts of the product features and interface The table below cross references each document to the instrument features and interfaces it supports To read about Installation Specifications amp Operation overviews S oO 900 6 f e Bo LJ In Depth Operation and UI Help GPIB Commands Eeh Analysis and Connectivity Tools Refer to these documents User Manual Quick Start User Manual Product Software CD Online Help System Online Programmers Guide Oscilloscope Analysis and Connectivity Made Easy TekVISA Programming Manual VXIplug amp play Driver Help TekVISA Excel Toolbar Help EZ op00 Description Read the Quick Start User Manual tor a quick overview of instrument features and their usage Read the User Manual for general informa tion about your instrument procedures on how to put it into service maps of its user interface controls overviews and back ground on its features Product Software CD includes Specifica tions of performance For more usage information see Online Help System below Access online help from the instrument for context sensitive information on virtually all controls and elements on screen Onlin
411. ternal Signals Instrument Calibration Instrument Diagnostics Multipurpose Knobs r User Preferences Option Installation Keypd Label TL Trig Level 14y TRIGGER Poa EDGE _B Event f Mode Atoga Acquire Source oy B Trig Level 128 0mV Edge Trigger Coupling Force Trigger Alig V Fi Set 50 Slog A E NEH 3 57 Triggering Overview To single trigger 1 To E mail on 1 trigger 3 58 Additional trigger parameters Cont To trigger on the next valid trigger event and then stop push the SINGLE front panel button Push the SINGLE button each time you want to initiate the single sequence of acquisitions To leave Single Trigger mode push the front panel RUN STOP button The exact function of the SINGLE button depends on the acquisition mode In Sample Peak Detect or Hi Res acquisition modes acquisition stops after a single waveform is acquired In Average or Envelope acquisition modes acquisition stops after N waveforms are acquired where N is the number of averages or envelopes specified In equivalent time it takes several triggers to partially fill a record In Waveform Database mode acquisition stops after N samples are acquired where N is the number of samples specified It may take a number of sequences of acquisitions to fill a waveform to the desired number of samples Use the trigger controls to define the event on which
412. test results All tests except the Modem and CD ROM tests should pass The CD ROM test requires data from the CheckIt Utilities CD TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 29 Incoming Inspection 5 Dismiss the CheckIt Utilities Select Exit in the File menu 6 Restart your instrument UI software On the Quick Launch bar touch TekScope 1 30 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual y Operating Basics Operational Maps This chapter acquaints you with how the instrument functions and operates It consists of several maps that describe the system its operation and its documen tation m Documentation Map lists the documentation that supports the instrument m System Overview Maps describe the high level operating blocks and operating cycle of the instrument m User Interface Map describes the elements of the User Interface UI application which provides complete control of the instrument m Front Panel Map describes the elements of the instrument front panel and cross references information relevant to each element Display Map describes elements and operation of single graticule and multiple graticule displays m Front Panel I O Map describes inputs outputs and peripherals m Rear Panel I O Map describes input output ports and peripherals Tutorial How to procedures are available online as part of the online help For information on configuring and installing your instrument refer to Chap
413. the Trigger control window to access the online assistance specific to triggering commands Control elements and resources B Evert Woda BEA a Horizontal Delay Hode AEvent Ref Pt Trigger Reset Time B Evert Trig Delay Position dans Level Sin TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Comm Triggering The instrument can trigger on communication signals optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series For detailed information on using comm triggering to trigger on your communications signals see Appendix C in the User Manual Serial Pattern Triggering In applications that involve signals with serial data patterns you may be able to use serial pattern triggering optional on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series to capture more complex events Serial trigger provides a direct means to analyze pattern dependent issues even on a single shot basis Acquisition of low power signals can be enhanced by combining serial trigger and signal averaging to reduce random noise You can specify patterns with up to 64 bits at data rates up to 1 25 GHzbaud and up to 40 bits at data rates to 3 125Gbaud TDS6000C only including don t care bits The serial trigger system can be clocked from an external source or from internal clock recovery Serial pattern trigger operates on NRZ encoded signals at data rates up to 1 25Gbaud and on 8b 10b encoded data at up to 3 125Gbaud TDS6000C only For detailed information on
414. the front panel controls TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 49 Triggering Overview Triggering from the front panel Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be installed and operating Acquisition system should be set to Run and the p vertical and horizontal controls should be set appropri g ately for the signal to be acquired See page 3 17 for acquisition setup To select the 2 Push the EDGE button to select edge type triggering TRIGGER gt trigger type ager YP Push ADVANCED to bring up the Trigger control window omer where you can select and set up other trigger types SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE Cent POST Core Cae Cows FRED Cam D Ga C READY pea wa CE Gee HET Wa Ww eS To select the 3 Push the TRIGGER SLOPE button to toggle among TRRCER trigger slope POS and NEG and EITHER EITHER mode is indicated by both the POS and NEG indicators lighted SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE POS triggers on a rising edge positive going signal Cems ERED Cam Com Gre CO READY A A NOISE m NEG riggers on a falling edge negative going Mf signal ey ies AOE m Either triggers on both the rising edge and falling jo ii gS edge of the signal select Either in the setup window You can also set the slope in the Trigger setup window To set level 4 To manually change the trigger level when edge TRIGGER gt triggering or ce
415. the horizontal reference to 0 See Figure 3 28 Trigger point lt Waveform record gt lt Horizontal position gt Vv Time of first point Horizontal Time of last point reference point Figure 3 28 Horizontal Position includes time to Horizontal Reference Mouse and Touch Screen Operation In general anything that you can do with the mouse you can do by touching the screen if the touch screen is on You can select or change all menus and buttons that are displayed on screen by mouse clicks or touching the on screen control while the touch screen is on TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Displaying Waveforms To Display Waveforms in Use the procedure that follows to become familiar with the display adjustments the Main Graticule you can make Overview To display waveforms in the main graticule Related control elements and resources Prerequisites The instrument must be installed and operating 2 The acquisition system should be set to run continuously See page page 3 24 for acquisition setup and page 3 43 for trigger setup Set vertical 3 Push a channel button to select the waveform it atten 7 display displays POSTION cH1 POSITION CB POSTION CH3 POSITION parameters A channel button lights when its channel is on w Q Q Q Note For information on math waveforms see To Define a Math Waveform on page 3 153 For information on refe
416. the instrument and on the remote PC When Display Remote is enabled display updates control window accessing and menu items are slow TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Cursors Commands Table B 7 lists the commands available from the Cursors menu Table B 7 Cursor menu commands Menu Cursor Controls Cursors On Cursor Type Cursor Mode Cursor Position Cursor Setup Submenu H bars V bars Wave form Screen Independent Track Measure Commands Function Displays the Cursor Controls window that you use to set up and control cursors Toggles cursors on and off Enables the selected cursor type Sets the selected cursor tracking mode Displays the Cursor Position control window that you use to position the cursors Displays the Cursor Setup control window that you use to set up and control cursors Table B 8 lists the commands available from the Measure menu Table B 8 Measure menu commands Menu Measurement Setup Snapshot Amplitude TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Submenu High Level Low Level Amplitude Maximum Minimum Peak to Peak Pos Overshoot Neg Overshoot Mean RMS Cycle Mean Cycle RMS Function Displays the Math Setup control window you use to display measurements setup measurement reference levels gating statistics and histograms Displays a snapshot of all single waveform measurements of the selected waveform
417. the output is true when and only when all the inputs are true On the instrument a trigger logic pattern and state function Analog to Digital Converter A device that converts an analog signal to a digital signal TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 1 Glossary Glossary 2 Area Measurement of the waveform area taken over the entire waveform or the gated region Expressed in mixed amplitude and time units such as volt seconds Area above ground is positive area below ground is negative Attenuation The degree the amplitude of a signal is reduced when it passes through an attenuating device such as a probe or attenuator That is the ratio of the input measure to the output measure For example a 10X probe will attenuate or reduce the input voltage of a signal by a factor of 10 Automatic trigger mode A trigger mode that causes the instrument to automatically acquire if triggerable events are not detected within a specified time period Autoset A function of the instrument that automatically produces a stable waveform of usable size Autoset sets up front panel controls based on the characteristics of the active waveform A successful autoset will set the volts div time div and trigger level to produce a coherent and stable waveform display Average acquisition mode In this mode the instrument acquires and displays a waveform that is the averaged result of several acquisitions Averaging reduces the apparen
418. the sample rate This is true regardless of the real time sample rate setting m Frequency Domain Averaging You may turn on average for a math waveform by editing the math expression Sometimes it is more desirable to average in the spectrum than in the time domain For example consider a signal that has time domain components that are asynchronous to the trigger If you turn on averaging in the time domain these components may go to zero or produce strange non deterministic effects on the resultant waveform Thus these signal components may end up not appearing in the spectrum However if averaging is done in the frequency domain instead then these components will be present An example is Math1 AVG SpectralMag Ch1 Aliasing occurs when the input frequency of a signal is greater than one half of the sampling frequency the sample rate Set the sample rate high enough so that the signals in the spectrum appear at the correct frequencies as opposed to a lower aliased frequency value Also complex signal shapes that have many harmonics in them such as a triangle or square wave can appear to be OK in the time domain when in fact many of the harmonics in that signal are aliased One way to check for aliasing is to increase the sample rate and observe whether any of the harmonics unwrap to different frequency locations TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Higher order harmonics usua
419. the trigger coupling on page 3 52 for a description of each coupling type TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 47 Triggering Horizontal Position Slope and Level 3 48 Horizontal position is adjustable and defines where on the waveform record the trigger occurs It lets you choose how much the instrument acquires before and after the trigger event The part of the record that occurs before the trigger is the pretrigger portion The part that occurs after the trigger is the posttrigger portion When horizontal delay is off the reference marker shows the trigger position in the waveform Displaying pretrigger information can be valuable when troubleshooting For example if you are trying to find the cause of an unwanted glitch in your test circuit you can trigger on the glitch and make the pretrigger period large enough to capture data before the glitch By analyzing what happened before the glitch you may uncover clues about its source The slope control determines whether the instrument finds the trigger point on the rising or the falling edge of a signal See Figure 3 19 These oscilloscopes have bi slope triggering they can trigger on positive negative or either The front panel SLOPE button toggles among the three choices The level control determines where on that edge the trigger point occurs See Figure 3 19 You can set the trigger level with the LEVEL knob on the front panel Push the LEVEL knob to au
420. the waveform types the key points follow m All waveforms are displayed fit to screen that is within the horizontal divisions that the graticule provides However some waveforms may be wider or narrower than the full graticule due to acquisition rate time scale combinations and acquisition preview m The instrument displays a reference waveform with horizontal settings in effect at the time it was saved You cannot adjust these settings See Saving and Recalling Waveforms on page 3 205 for more information on reference waveforms TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 101 Displaying Waveforms 3 102 m The instrument displays a math waveform with the horizontal settings derived from the math expression that creates it You cannot change these directly See Creating and Using Math Waveforms on page 3 145 for more information on math waveforms Display and Acquisition Controls For channel waveforms the vertical and horizontal controls that you set also adjust the instrument acquisition parameters See the following descriptions for more information m Vertical Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 12 Horizontal Acquisition Window Considerations on page 3 14 Horizontal Position and the Horizontal Reference The time values that you set for horizontal position are from the trigger point to the horizontal reference point This is not the time from the trigger point to the start of the waveform record unless you set
421. tiation The math capabilities of the instrument include waveform differentiation This allows you to display a derivative math waveform that indicates the instantaneous rate of change of the waveform acquired TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 149 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Derivative math waveform Source waveform 3 150 Derivative waveforms are used in the measurement of slew rate of amplifiers and in educational applications You can create a derivative math waveform and then use it as a source for another derivative waveform The result is the second derivative of the waveform that was first differentiated The math waveform derived from the sampled waveform is computed based on the following equation Y Kuen Xa e Where X is the source waveform Y is the derivative math waveform T is the time between samples Since the resultant math waveform is a derivative waveform See Figure 3 40 its vertical scale is in volts second its horizontal scale is in seconds The source signal is differentiated over its entire record length therefore the math waveform record length equals that of the source waveform less 1 point Ie 50 0mV Q 10 0us div HMM 221MV s 10 Cus 25 0MS s 40 0ns pt 7 0mv Figure 3 40 Derivative math waveform TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Cursor Measurements You can also use cursors to measure derivative wave
422. time sampling Equivalent Time The instrument automatically uses equivalent time sampling when the sample rate is too fast to acquire enough samples using real time sampling Displays the Horizontal control window that you use to turn on and off delay mode position the waveform and set the horizontal scale Displays the Resolution control window that you use to set the record length and view the duration sample rate and resolution Sample Pk Detect Hi Allows you to select the acquisition mode or displays the Acquisition Mode Res Average Envelope control window that you use to select the acquisition mode Wim DB Mode Displays the FastFrame Setup window that you use to set up FastFrame acquisitions on instruments with this feature Displays the FastFrame control window that you use to select the frame to view and the reference frame used by time stamps on instruments with this feature Displays the Zoom Setup window that you use to set up the horizontal and vertical zoom controls TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix B Menu Bar Commands Table B 4 Horiz Acq menu commands Cont Menu Submenu Function Zoom Graticule Size 50 50 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 50 50 80 20 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 80 20 100 Sets the zoom graticule split mode to 100 Size Displays the Zoom Display Area control window that you use to set the zoom graticule size Trigger Commands Table
423. ting notes Ch Ref Math Yes Math and reference waveforms are scaled and positioned from their Yes ee setup control windows Yes Waveforms are adjusted according to the Zoom Lock setting Yes Yes Yes Dragging a box around a portion of the selected waveform adjusts horizontal scale to fill the zoom graticule with the boxed portion see Setting MultiView Zoom Controls on page 3 105 1 Pixel map reference waveforms those saved in waveform database mode cannot be repositioned or rescaled Graticules Select a graticule size from the Graticule Size drop down list in the Zoom Setup window to change the size of the acquisition waveform and zoomed waveform windows The 50 50 selection allocates half of the available display for the zoomed graticule and half of the available display for the acquisition window The 80 20 selection allocates 80 of the available display for the zoomed graticule and 20 for the acquisition window Touch 100 to use the entire display for the zoomed graticule Figure 3 27 on page 3 98 shows the elements of the graticules the elements are the same for each graticule displayed Operations on the Timebase In general the method of adjusting horizontally scaling setting resolution record length positioning and so on is from the front panel adjust the timebase using the Horizontal Scale Resolution and Position knobs Only channel waveforms can be set directly Table 3 4 shows how horizontal operations relate to
424. tom left of each segment The active selected vertex is indicated by an X The instru ment automatically assigns numbers to vertices during mask creation or editing Mask Margin Tolerance Mask margin tolerance moves the mask segment boundaries by the specified percentage Negative margins reduce the size of the segment making it easier to pass a mask test Turning mask margin tolerance off redraws the mask segment margins to their default values but leaves the numeric value as it is allowing you to quickly toggle between default and user set margin values TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix C Serial Mask Testing and Serial Triggering Standards and Bandwidth When the instrument system bandwidth which includes the instrument attached probes and or cabling falls into the range of 1 5 to 1 8 0 8 for optical signals times the data signal bit rate the third harmonic of the data signal is significantly attenuated The instrument displays useful qualitative information but quantitative rise time measurements under these conditions may not be accurate For example a 1394b standard signal at the S800b rate has a bit rate of 983 0 Mb s 1 5 to 1 8 times this value is a range of 1 47 to 1 77 GHz Therefore you should not use a 1 5 GHz measurement system for making quantitative rise time measurements of this standard When just the instrument bandwidth falls within 1 5 1 8 0 8 for optical signals times the bit rat
425. tomatically set the trigger level to the 50 amplitude point of the signal Positive going edge Negative going edge Trigger level can be adjusted vertically N J D4 Trigger slope can be positive negative or either Figure 3 19 Slope and level controls help define the trigger TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Delayed Trigger System You can trigger with the A Main trigger system alone or you can combine the A Main trigger with the B Delayed trigger to trigger on sequential events When using sequential triggering the A trigger event arms the trigger system and then the B trigger event triggers the instrument when the B trigger condi tions are met A and B triggers can and typically do have separate sources The B trigger condition can be based on a time delay or a specified number of counted events See Sequential Triggering on page 3 85 to learn how to use the delayed trigger system Triggering from the Front Panel Access Procedures The front panel provides quick access to the most frequently used trigger controls The trigger readout shows you the state of the trigger system The slope coupling and source controls work for edge triggering To access the advanced trigger controls display the Trigger Control window by pushing the ADVANCED button See Advanced Triggering on page 3 59 for more informa tion Use the procedure that follows when setting up the instrument to trigger using
426. trol window Touch Transition a_i THagecType Source Transition Time Trigger Transition Pec hi y T Less hany Select See Lt My At ue Lower Level To specify which channel becomes the trigger source Acvort ASEE Mision aavoes Alransiion Aeau x ource Transition Time Trigger ransition touch Source and select the source from the list ae EEN Width 500 0ps To specify the direction of the pulse edge touch Slope oye Pos ves ither and select Pos positive Neg negative or Either from the window Pos monitors the transition time slew rate of the positive going edges of pulses The edge must first cross the lower threshold and then cross the upper threshold Neg monitors the transition time slew rate of the negative going edges of pulses The edge must first cross the upper threshold and then cross the lower threshold m Either monitors positive and negative going edges of pulses The edge may first cross either threshold and then cross the other TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 71 Triggering Overview To trigger based on transition time Cont Control elements and resources Set the The threshold levels and the delta time setting determine the transition time transition time slew rate setting To set these parameters Mode A Transition gt Acquire 5 Touch the Upper Level or Lower Level button and use Source Transition Time Trigger the multipurpose knob or keypad to s
427. trols change as you select different combinations of options Window Event Trigger if Window Enter Window Occurs Y Exits Window Inside gt t m Enter Window and Occurs or Exits Window and rane Occurs Trigger the instrument when the signal enters or leaves the window defined by the threshold levels Inside limits and greater than or Outside limits and greater than Trigger the instrument when the signal enters or leaves the window defined by the threshold levels for the time specified by Time Window Trigger Window Event Trigger if Window Enter Window Logic Pattern i Ch3 Cch4 xY KY 1N 1 Window Event and Trigger if Window Logic When the instrument detects a signal entering or leaving the window defined by the threshold levels it checks the logic state of up to two other available channels and triggers only if their conditions are met For more information on qualifying triggers see Logic Qualify a Trigger on page 3 84 Set mode and 7 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger holdoff types Refer to To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 and To set holdoff on page 3 55 To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on For mode and holdoff setup see To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 and To set holdoff on page 3 55 page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 75 Triggering Trigger Basedon When you select t
428. true Otherwise the output is false On the instrument a trigger logic pattern and state function Peak Detect acquisition mode A mode in which the instrument saves the minimum and maximum samples over two adjacent acquisition intervals For many glitch free signals this mode is indistinguishable from the sample mode Peak detect mode works with real time non interpolation sampling only Peak to Peak Amplitude voltage measurement of the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude Period A timing measurement of the time covered by one complete signal cycle It is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 11 Glossary Glossary 12 Persistence The amount of time a data point remains displayed There are three persistence modes available in the instrument Variable Infinite and Off Phase A timing measurement between two waveforms of the amount one leads or lags the other in time Phase is expressed in degrees where 360 comprise one complete cycle of one of the waveforms Waveforms measured should be of the same frequency or one waveform should be a harmonic of the other Pixel A visible point on the display The instrument display is 640 pixels wide by 480 pixels high Positive duty cycle A timing measurement of the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Positive overshoot Amplitude vo
429. tup which is lost Overview To recall your setup Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Display the 2 setups control window Recall the setup 3 Recall setup 4 from a file Find the 5 source directory 3 204 The instrument must be powered up You must have access to a setup saved by the instrument Note This procedure does not make the setup active From the toolbar touch Setups and select the Recall Setups tab of the Setups control window Touch the number of the setup that you want to recall The current instrument setup is overwritten To display the Recall Instrument Setup dialog from the Recall Setup control window touch Recall The Recall Instrument Setup dialog allows navigation to directories lists setup files in the directory and provides for selection of a setup file Use the Look in drop down list and buttons to navigate to the directory which contains a setup that you want to recall See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 ups Delete Setups Recall Instrument Settings a coo a eo a aa Recall Setting trom File CH a Fecal TN 3 a Ka Default Ga u Recall Instrument Setup Lookin Setups r a Ear a 030709_101546 set Filename ME E Files of type Setup Files set Cancel Help Recall Instrument Setup E pee xj Lookin Setups amr TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Da
430. ual A Event f B Seq if B Event Mode Source Chi A Level 1 364V Polarity Tu ur guu Pos Either 0 0v ite Control elements and resources See page 3 17 for acquisition setup AGlitch gt Acquire Glitch Trigger Glitch Width Fa N Accept STA DEE y ES i Width 500 0ps AcGlitch gt Acquire Glitch Width Accept Y Glitch Trigger rmm T I nN l 1 H 0 I o a gt Width 500 0ps Polarity uwm Either a a Glitch Trigger ER i 7 AE Glitch Width Accept Y Width 3 65 Triggering Overview Set to trigger if 7 width Set the level 8 Logic qualify 9 the trigger To set mode 10 and holdoff 3 66 To trigger on a glitch Cont To specify whether to trigger on glitches narrower or greater than the width you specify touch Glitch Width and select from the list m Trig if Width Less Than will trigger only on pulses narrower than the width you specified Trig if Width Greater Than will trigger only on pulses wider than the specified width To set the Level that the glitch must cross to be recognized by the instrument touch Glitch Trigger Level and use the multipurpose knobs keypad or front panel LEVEL knob to set the glitch trigger level Note You can set the level to a value appropriate to either TTL or ECL logic families To do so touch Level and select the keypad touch either TTL or ECL To logic qualify the trigger see Logi
431. uch an available type from the Pattern Type window See Table 3 2 on page 3 62 for definitions of the logic functions for both pattern and state triggers To set trigger To choose to trigger when the logic condition is met uae RA Logic Pattern Trigger Pattern when goes TRUE or when the logic condition is not met Patter Te Threshold A Dae goes FALSE touch Trigger When Pattern and select Ea Ea ee More Than False Less Than More Than or True from the list Input Threshold The list items More Than and Less Than are used to time qualify a pattern trigger See the procedure To define a time qualified pattern trigger that follows for instructions el BS ee user 3 78 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering Overview To set mode and holdoff To define a time qualified pattern trigger Trigger on a pattern Cont 8 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger types You can time qualify a pattern logic trigger That is you specify a time that the boolean logic function AND NAND OR or NOR must be TRUE To specify the time limit as well as the type of time qualification More Than or Less Than the time limit specified for a pattern trigger do the following step 9 Select Pattern More Than and set the time using the multipurpose knob or keypad When you select TRUE for Less Than and specify a time the input conditions that you speci
432. udes 10 0ps div 5 0MS s 200ns pt T 32 0mV Cursors are Display Limited You cannot move a cursor off screen Also if you resize waveforms the cursors do not track That is a cursor stays at its screen position ignoring changes to horizontal and vertical scale and position and vertical offset waveform cursors will track a waveform vertically Cursors Ignore the Selected Waveform Each cursor measures its source defined in the Cursors Setup dialog box Selecting a waveform for scaling on screen by pushing the CH 3 front panel button for example does not change the source that each cursor measures TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 131 Measuring Waveforms 3 132 After you have selected the source from the Cursors Setup control window you can operate the cursor from the front panel knobs and buttons Cursors Treat Sources Independently Each cursor can take a different indepen dent source with each source having its own amplitude scale Cursor 1 is set to measure channel 3 Ch3 which is set to 100 mV per division so cursor readout v1 measures Ch3 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 100 mV div or about 300 mV Cursor 2 is set to measure reference 4 Ref4 which is set to 20 mV per division so cursor readout v2 measures R4 relative to its ground as 3 divisions x 20 mV div or about 60 mV Note that the value of each graticule division is not readily apparent relative to the delta readout
433. ue to preview zoom or Real Time mode with limited samples the available sample density falls to less than 1 sample per display column the instrument calculates intermediate points by either the linear or sine algorithms and uses them to produce points There are two options for interpola tion m Sin x x interpolation computes record points using a curve fit between the actual values acquired The curve fit assumes all the interpolated points fall along that curve Sin x x interpolation is particularly useful when acquiring more rounded waveforms such as sine waves It is also appropriate for general use although it may introduce some overshoot or undershoot in signals with fast rise times m Linear interpolation computes record points between actual acquired samples by using a straight line fit The straight line fit assumes all the interpolated points fall in their appropriate point in time on that straight line Linear interpolation is useful for many waveforms such as pulse trains Interpolation is used whenever the displayed sample density falls below 1 sample per column If the acquired record length is 500 points zoom of 2x requires interpolation If instead the record length of the acquisition is 100K horizontal zoom of 200x produces 1 sample per column 100 000 500 200 therefore you will see interpolated samples starting at the next scale setting TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 113 Displaying Waveforms
434. uisition window With no zero offset as shown in Figure 3 2 a and b that voltage level is zero ground m As you vary vertical offset the middle voltage level moves relative to zero This moves the vertical acquisition window up and down on the waveform With input signals that are smaller than the window it appears the waveform moves in the window Actually a larger signal shows what really happens the offset moves the middle of the vertical acquisition window up and down on the input signal Figure 3 3 shows how offset moves the acquisition window to control the portion of the waveform amplitude the window captures TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 13 Acquiring Waveforms m Applying a negative offset moves the vertical range down relative to the DC level of the input signal Likewise applying a positive offset moves the vertical range up See Figure 3 3 Vertical Window 100 mV 8 divs X 10 mV div 1 divs of position Acquisition window shifts ii Ai Ha a positive to capture overshoot ear waveform top leve Offset 0 0 V At waveform ground reference Acquisition window shifts Offset 300 mV Waveform bottom level negative to capture preshoot Figure 3 3 Varying offset moves the vertical acquisition window on the waveform Horizontal Acquisit
435. urce and select the source from the Trigger Tyee Ea r onn v list Man y Ch4 oon Select the 4 To specify the direction of the runt pulse touch Polarity Emmm ME ope 5 Source unt Trigger Runt polarity and select Pos positive Neg negative or Either from yijikdsikkdsd NNN ecoari 2 os Y Hewi an Y the window Upper Levei Select 1 Pos looks at positive going pulses ees 800 0mv Polarity m Neg looks at negative going pulses pos NES m Either looks at both positive and negative pulses Set to trigger To determine how wide a runt pulse the instrument will trigger Emmm E a when on TiogerTve SACS MP oy T h R f h ict Upper Level on 5 Touch Runt and select from the list rea ei 4 m Occurs triggers on all runt pulses regardless of On ae width m Wider triggers only on runt pulses that exceed the magyeeseee ee Bin ae width you set Enter the width using the multipur Tigger Type Seuss ae pose knob or keypad E ua an kosina nim i 6 To specify the minimum width of the runt pulse touch Lower Level Width and set the value using the multipurpose knob or Eewo A keypad TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 67 Triggering Overview To trigger on a runt pulse Cont Set the 7 To set the two threshold levels used in detecting a runt thresholds pulse touch Upper Limit or Lower Limit and use the multipurpose knob or keypad to set the values for the upper and lower thres
436. urce will look for Lower Limit is the minimum valid pulse width The instrument will always force the Lower Limit to be less than or equal to the Upper Limit Set the level 7 Touch Level and use the multipurpose knob or keypad Ecma ee Source Pulse Width Pulse Width to set the trigger level om wide Level e i e Upper Limit EJ 320 0mV 3 500 0ps Lower Limit L s Logic qualify 8 To logic qualify the trigger see Logic Qualify a Trigger the trigger on page 3 84 To set mode 9 Mode and holdoff can be set for all standard trigger and holdoff types p009 See To set holdoff on page 3 55 and To select the trigger mode on page 3 52 for mode and holdoff setup To learn more about trigger mode and holdoff see Trigger Modes on page 3 46 and Trigger Holdoff on page 3 46 3 70 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Triggering To Trigger Based When you select the type Transition Time slew rate the instrument will trigger on Transition Time on a pulse edge that traverses between an upper and lower threshold faster or Overview Select transition triggering Select the source Select slope To trigger based on transition time _ gt slower than a transition time you specify To set up for transition time triggering do the following procedures Control elements and resources From the toolbar touch Trig and select the A Event tab Tri of the Trigger con
437. ursor position on screen relative to first point You can find the horizontal readout both in the control window and in the readout at the bottom of the screen The following relationships hold Time from First Point Horiz Position when Horiz Delay and Ref Position are zero T1 readout Time to First Point Additional Time to Cursor Cursor Units Depend on Sources A cursor that measures amplitude or time will read out in the units of its source as indicated in Table 3 7 Note mixed sources require Delta Cursor readouts to follow units of the cursor 1 source Table 3 7 Cursor units Cursors Standard units Readout names Horizontal volts watts V1 V2 AV Vertical seconds bits T1 T2 AT F1 F2 AF Waveform Screen volts watts seconds bits V1 V2 AV T1 T2 AT 1 If the V1 and V2 units do not match the AV readout defaults to the units used by the V1 readout Multipurpose knobs You can change cursor position using the position controls in the Cursor setup window dragging the cursor into position using the touch screen or mouse or by turning the front panel multipurpose knobs The multipurpose knobs also work with other controls If a setup window item has an adjustable value you can adjust it with the multipurpose knob or keypad after touching the setup control NOTE To make small changes with the multipurpose knobs push the FINE button before turning the knob When a FINE button is illuminated its multipu
438. utoset Setup Setup On On Cn On ot ee a o Acquiring Waveforms To Reset the Instrument NOTE Autoset may change the vertical position to position the waveform appropriately It sets vertical offset to 0 V unless an offsetable probe is attached If you are not using an offsetable probe and your signal contains offset such as the fast edge signal you may need to adjust the Vertical Offset and SCALE to display the signal You may want to revert to the factory default setup if so reset the instrument Overview To reset the instrument Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument is powered up and running See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 Execute 2 Push the DEFAULT SETUP button To Get More Help Overview To get more help Prerequisites 1 Instrument powered up and running FINE auroser DEFAULT Prnt cursors FastAca c HORIZONTAL i TRIGGER POSITION nD ey ras SOURCE COUPLING SLOPE You can get help on the vertical and acquisition controls by accessing online help Control elements and resources See Powering On the Instrument on page 1 8 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To get more help Cont Control elements and resources Access 2 Touch the Help button in toolbar mode or select Help on vertical set up Window from the Help menu in menu bar mode help 5
439. ve all ratings and markings on the product Consult the product manual for further ratings information before making connections to the product Powering Off The power cord provides Mains disconnect Do Not Operate Without Covers Do not operate this product with covers or panels removed Use Proper Fuse Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product Avoid Exposed Circuitry Do not touch exposed connections and components when power is present Wear Eye Protection Wear eye protection if exposure to high intensity rays or laser radiation exists Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures If you suspect there is damage to this product have it inspected by qualified service personnel Do Not Operate in Wet Damp Conditions Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry Provide Proper Ventilation Refer to the manual s installation instructions for details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual xiii General Safety Summary Symbols and Terms Terms in this Manual These terms may appear in this manual WARNING Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result in injury or loss of life CAUTION Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to this product or other property A A Terms on the Product These terms may appear on the product DANGER i
440. ved data sequence Reference memory Memory in an instrument used to store waveforms or settings You can use that waveform data later for processing The instrument saves the data even when the instrument is turned off or unplugged Reference Waveforms Waveforms that are static not live see live waveforms Reference waveforms are channel or math waveforms that you save to references Once saved they do not update TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary 13 Glossary Glossary 14 Rise time The time it takes for a leading edge of a pulse to rise from a LowRef value typically 10 to a HighRef value typically 90 of its amplitude RMS Amplitude voltage measurement of the true Root Mean Square voltage Runt trigger A mode in which the instrument triggers on a runt A runt is a pulse that crosses one threshold but fails to cross a second threshold before recrossing the first The crossings detected can be positive negative or either Sample acquisition mode The instrument creates a record point by saving the first sample during each acquisition interval That is the default mode of the acquisition Sample interval The time interval between successive samples in a time base For real time digitizers the sample interval is the reciprocal of the sample rate For equivalent time digitizers the time interval between successive samples represents equivalent time not real time Sampling The process of captur
441. verified 9 Remove the test hookup Disconnect the equipment from the channel input and the FAST EDGE output Check Horizontal Equipment Operation required One SMA cable such as Tektronix part number 174 1427 xx One TCA SMA adapter None Prerequisites 1 Initialize the instrument Push the front panel DEFAULT SETUP button 2 Hook up the signal source Connect the equipment to the CH 1 input as shown in Figure 1 11 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 1 25 Incoming Inspection 1 26 Instrument under test ee Sly e 8E ols O 8s8 e ame Je JeF D QQ a gee s o LJ SMA cable from FAST EDGE output to CH 1 input Figure 1 11 Setup for time base test 3 Setup the instrument Push the front panel AUTOSET button 4 Touch the Vert button and then touch Offset Adjust the Ch1 Offset to 0 16 V TDS6000B Series 80 mV TDS6000C Series using the multipurpose knob 5 Set the Vertical SCALE to 100 mV per division 6 Set the time base Set the horizontal SCALE to 200 us div The time base readout is displayed at the bottom of the graticule 7 Verify that the time base operates Confirm the following statements m One period of the square wave fast edge signal is about five horizontal divisions on screen for the 200 us div horizontal scale setting m Rotating the horizontal SCALE knob clockwise expands the waveform on screen more horizontal di
442. vide a replacement in exchange for the defective product Parts modules and replacement products used by Tektronix for warranty work may be new or reconditioned to like new performance All replaced parts modules and products become the property of Tektronix In order to obtain service under this warranty Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service Customer shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix with shipping charges prepaid Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service center is located Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges duties taxes and any other charges for products returned to any other locations This warranty shall not apply to any defect failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a to repair damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install repair or service the product b to repair damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment c to repair any damage or malfunction caused by the use of non Tektronix supplies or d to service a product that has
443. visions per waveform period counter clockwise rotation contracts it and returning the horizontal scale to 200 us div returns the period to about five divisions m The horizontal POSITION knob positions the signal left and right on screen when rotated 8 Verify horizontal delay a Center a rising edge on screen m Set the horizontal POSITION knob so that the rising edge where the waveform is triggered is lined up with the center horizontal graticule m Change the horizontal SCALE to 20 us div The rising edge of the waveform should remain near the center graticule and the falling edge should be off screen TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Incoming Inspection b Turn on and set horizontal delay m From the Horiz Acq menu select Horizontal Acquisition Setup m Touch the Horizontal tab in the control window that displays m Touch the Delay Mode button to turn delay on m Double touch the Horiz Delay control in the control window to display the pop up keypad Touch the keypad buttons to set the horizontal delay to 1 5 ms and then touch the ENTER key c Verify the waveform Verify that a falling edge of the waveform is within a few divisions of center screen d Adjust the horizontal delay Rotate the upper multipurpose knob to change the horizontal delay setting Verify that the falling edge shifts horizontally Rotate the front panel horizontal POSITION knob Verify that this knob has the same effect it
444. waveforms that you include as math ex pression operands are reflected in the math waveform However if Ch1 is 4 divisions high at 100 mV per division then at 50 mV per division Ch1 is 8 divisions high Any math using Ch1 will not be affected by this change because the Ch1 voltage levels have not changed See Source Dependencies on page 3 148 How to manage displaying Turn on and off the display of math waveforms from the Math control window Use the same control window controls waveform selection buttons vertical position and vertical scale knobs Mouse or touch screen operations for positioning waveforms on screen work also 3 156 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms To Use Math Waveforms The procedure that follows demonstrates some common operations that you can perform on math waveforms Overview To use math waveforms Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The Math waveform must be defined and displayed See the reference listed at right See To Define a Math Waveform on page 3 153 Select and Touch the Math button to display the Math control display window 3 Touch any Math x tab to make that math waveform the Emmai selected waveform ARS Define Edit Expression Spectral Analysis on bese I Editor Avgs Setup Control m f the waveform that you select is not defined use a r Predefined Expression Predefined e the To Define a Math Waveform procedure s
445. when you want to m Recall a waveform for further evaluation or comparison with other wave forms TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 205 Data Input Output m Extend the waveform carrying capacity of the instrument The instrument supports four reference four channel and four math waveforms If you want more than four references you can save the additional reference to disk for recall later The Reference Waveform control window contains a Label field for including comments with your saved waveforms Using comments you can store informa tion readable upon recall describing each waveform that you save Virtual Keyboarding If you do not have a keyboard connected you can still enter comments and name waveform files The Reference control window includes a Keyboard button When you touch or click it the instrument displays a virtual keyboard on screen that you can use with your mouse or the touch screen to enter the waveform path name file name and comment You cannot recall a waveform into a channel or a math waveform The instru ment recalls each waveform into one of the reference waveform locations Ref1 Ref4 To Save Your Waveform Use the procedure that follows to save a waveform or waveforms to a reference location the instrument hard disk CD RW drive USB 2 0 memory device or third party storage device Overview To save a waveform Control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 The instrument must be
446. wing modes Sample m Peak Detect m HiRes Envelope m Average m Waveform Database For Average and Envelope modes only select the number of acquisitions to average or envelope For Waveform Database mode select the number of samples desired Push the RUN STOP button or touch Run Stop in the Run Stop control window to toggle between starting Running and stopping acquisitions Push the SINGLE button or touch Single Sequence in the Run Stop control window to acquire enough waveforms to satisfy the acquisition mode and then stop Control elements and resources See page 3 43 for trigger setup Horizontal Acquisition Acquisition Mode Sample Pk Detect Hi Res WimOe Average J Envelope ft of Wims 16 INTENSITY TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Acquiring Waveforms Overview To select real time or equivalent time sampling To set acquisition modes Cont To select real time sampling interpolated real time sampling or equivalent time sampling Touch the Horiz button Select the Acquisition tab from the Horiz Acq control window Or select Horizontal Acquisition Setup from the Horiz Acq menu to display the Acquisition Mode control window Select the Acquisition tab Select the sampling mode m Equivalent Time uses both the real time and equivalent time sampling as appropriate Real Time Only limits the instrument to real time s
447. x part number 071 7022 xx To Calibrate Probes To compensate the instrument so that it can take accurate measurements based on the ambient temperature use the procedure in the manual that came with the deskew fixture Tektronix part number 067 0484 xx Deskew Fixture Tektronix part number 071 7022 xx To Deskew Channels You can adjust a relative time delay for each channel This lets you align the signals to compensate for signals that may come in from cables of differing lengths The instrument applies deskew values after it completes each acquisi tion therefore the deskew values do not affect logic triggering To deskew channels use the procedure in the manual that came with the deskew fixture Tektronix part number 067 0484 xx Deskew Fixture Tektronix part number 071 7022 xx 071 7022 xx Figure 3 36 Probe calibration and deskew fixture TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual 3 141 Measuring Waveforms To Compensate Passive To compensate passive probes to ensure maximum distortion free input to the Probes instrument and to avoid high frequency amplitude errors use the procedure that follows Overview To compensate passive probes Related control elements and resources Prerequisites 1 Instrument should be powered on Allow a 20 minute warm up See page 3 24 for acquisition setup and Power on the Instrument on page 1 8 Use adapter
448. y to 62 5 kHz if necessary reduce the sample rate TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Control elements and resources Center Freq 62 5kHz Je Freq Span e 3 195 Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Spectral math example cont Set up the 10 From the toolbar touch Cursors cursors 11 To assign the cursors to the spectral analysis math waveform touch the Cursor Source Math tab and touch the Math 1 button 12 Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the Curs1 Pos to 0 0 Hz and the Curs2 Pos to 125 kHz The cursor readout now indicates the frequency span set in step 9 13 Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the Curs2 Pos to 62 5 kHz The cursor readout now indicates the center frequency set in step 9 3 196 Control elements and resources Cursor 100 0kHz bijet eaaa aaea E 200mv Q 2004B 12 5kHz okHz OkHz DE 232mV ee a BR Curst Pos 0 0Hz Curs2 Pos 62 5kHz HGH 200mv 2 IH fi 0 0Hz 400us div ii t2 G2 5kHz es 1 25MSis 800rs pt 20 0dB 12 5kHz Or af 62 5KHZ BG 7 232m TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Creating and Using Math Waveforms Overview Spectral math example cont Control elements and resources Measure the 14 Use the multipurpose knobs or keypad to set the Curs1 cei test results Pos to 3 0 kHz and the Curs2 Pos to 11 0 kHz
449. ye Base 2 horizontal arrows and 1 horizontal bar indicating the eye window left the eye window right and the eye base Jitter P P 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base Jitter RMS 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base Jitter 6 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base A 12 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Appendix A Automatic Measurements Supported Table A 2 Supported measurements and their definition Cont Measurements Annotation descriptions Comm Noise P P 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries measurement In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left annotations right top and base Noise RMS 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base S N Ratio 1 box indicating the histogram boundaries In detailed mode 4 horizontal arrows and 2 horizontal bars indicating the eye window left right top and base Cyc Distortion 2 horizontal arrows indicating the time of the rise time of the fall and the refe
450. ypically the most negative peak voltage Mode A stable condition of oscillation in a laser A laser can operate in one mode single mode or in many modes multimode Multipurpose knobs Front panel knobs you can use to change the value of the assigned parameter NAND A logic Boolean function in which the output of the AND function is complemented true becomes false and false becomes true On the instrument that is a trigger logic pattern and state function Negative duty cycle A timing measurement representing the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage Negative overshoot measurement Amplitude voltage measurement Low Min NegativeOvershoot Atamtnuade x 100 TDS6000B amp TDS6000C Series User Manual Glossary Negative width A timing measurement of the distance time between two amplitude points falling edge MidRef default 50 and rising edge MidRef default 50 on a negative pulse Normal trigger mode A mode on which the instrument does not acquire a waveform record unless a valid trigger event occurs It waits for a valid trigger event before acquiring waveform data NOR A logic Boolean function in which the output of the OR function is complemented true becomes false and false becomes true On the instrument a trigger logic pattern and state function OR A logic Boolean function in which the output is true if any of the inputs are

User Manual - Steven M. Anlage Research Page

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents